1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
HIGHLANDER_U
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Before driving
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for
driving
(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)
Interior features
Usage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat
belt, SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for
Canadian owners
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
2
HIGHLANDER_U
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information ........................5
Reading this manual........................9
How to search................................10
Pictorial index ................................11
1-1. For safe use
Before driving........................22
For safe driving .....................23
Seat belts..............................25
SRS airbags..........................32
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system..................41
Exhaust gas precautions.......46
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children...............47
Child restraint systems..........48
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect .....................63
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system ...69
Alarm.....................................71
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
............................................74
Gauges and meters ..............79
Multi-information display
(4.2-inch display).................82
Multi-information display (7-inch
display)................................91
Head-up display................. 101
Fuel consumption information
.........................................106
3-1. Key information
Keys................................... 112
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Side doors.......................... 115
Back door........................... 119
Smart key system .............. 131
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats......................... 138
Rear seats.......................... 139
Driving position memory .... 144
Head restraints................... 147
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel...................150
Inside rear view mirror ....... 151
Digital Rearview Mirror....... 152
Outside rear view mirrors... 162
3-5. Opening, closing the win-
dows and moon roof
Power windows.................. 164
Moon roof........................... 167
Panoramic moon roof......... 170
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.............. 177
Cargo and luggage ............184
Vehicle load limits .............. 187
Trailer towing...................... 188
Dinghy towing ....................199
4-2. Driving procedures
Eng
ine
(ignition) switch...... 200
Automatic transmission...... 204
Turn signal lever................. 208
Parking brake..................... 209
1
For safety and security
2
Vehicle status information
and indicators
3
Before driving
4
Driving
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HIGHLANDER_U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Brake Hold ......................... 212
4-3. Operating the lights and wip-
ers
Headlight switch................. 214
Automatic High Beam ........ 217
Fog light switch .................. 220
Windshield wipers and washer
.........................................220
Rear windshield wiper and
washer ............................. 223
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap.. 225
4-5. Using the driving support sys-
tems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0.... 227
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
.........................................233
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)... 241
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ..... 251
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range........ 254
Stop & Start system ........... 264
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)... 270
Intuitive parking assist........ 276
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
function ............................ 284
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
.........................................289
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects).................. 296
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles).... 302
Driving mode select switch
.........................................306
Multi-terrain Select............. 307
Snow mode switch............. 310
Downhill assist control system
.........................................311
Driving assist systems........ 313
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips............... 319
Utility vehicle precautions... 322
5-1. Toyota multi-operation touch
Toyota multi-operation touch
......................................... 326
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front manual air conditioning
system ............................. 328
Front automatic air conditioning
system ............................. 333
Rear manual air conditioning
system ............................. 346
Rear automatic air conditioning
system ............................. 348
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters/seat ventilators.... 352
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list................. 355
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features ......358
Luggage compartment features
......................................... 363
5-5. Using the other interior fea-
tures
Other interior features........ 367
Garage do
or opener
........... 379
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior................. 388
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior.................. 391
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
......................................... 394
General maintenance......... 396
5
Interior features
6
Maintenance and care
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HIGHLANDER_U
Emission inspection and mainte-
nance (I/M) programs....... 398
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precau-
tions ................................. 400
Hood ..................................402
Positioning a floor jack....... 403
Engine compartment.......... 404
Tires................................... 411
Tire inflation pressure......... 423
Wheels............................... 425
Air conditioning filter...........426
Electronic key battery......... 428
Checking and replacing fuses
.........................................429
Headlight aim..................... 431
Light bulbs.......................... 432
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ........... 442
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency .............. 442
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water................................ 443
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
.........................................445
If you think something is wrong
.........................................448
Fuel pump shut off system
.........................................449
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds.... 450
If a warning message is dis-
played .............................. 460
If you have a flat tire........... 464
If the engine will not start ... 478
If you lose your keys .......... 479
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened............................. 480
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............... 481
If the vehicle battery is dis-
charged............................ 483
If your vehicle overheats.... 487
If the vehicle becomes stuck
......................................... 489
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.).................................. 492
Fuel information................. 503
Tire information.................. 505
8-2. Customization
Customizable features....... 515
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ................ 527
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners ............................. 530
Seat belt instructions for Cana-
dian owners (in French)... 530
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)
......................................... 532
Headlight aim instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)
........
................................. 53
9
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
......................................... 542
Alphabetical Index.............. 545
7
When trouble arises
8
Vehicle specifications
9
For owners
Index
5
HIGHLANDER_U
Please note that this manual
applies to explains all models
and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equip-
ment not installed on your vehi-
cle.
All specifications provided in this
manual are current at the time of
printing. However, because of
the Toyota policy of continual
product improvement, we
reserve the right to make
changes at any time without
notice.
Depending on specifications,
the vehicle shown in the illustra-
tions may differ from your vehi-
cle in terms of color and
equipment.
Approximately five hours after
the engine is turned off, you
may hear sound coming from
under the vehicle for several
minutes. This is the sound of a
fuel evaporation leakage check
and, it does not indicate a mal-
function.
A wide variety of non-genuine
spare parts and accessories for
Toyota vehicles are currently
available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their per-
formance, repair, or replace-
ment, or for any damage they
may cause to, or adverse effect
they may have on, your Toyota
vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modi-
fied with non-genuine Toyota
products. Modification with
non-genuine Toyota products
could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regu-
lations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
The installation of a mobile
two-way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic
systems such as:
Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle
after turning off the engine
Accessories, spare parts
and modification of your
Toyota
Installation of a mobile
two-way radio system
6
HIGHLANDER_U
Anti-lock brake system
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toy-
ota dealer for precautionary
measures or special instructions
regarding installation of a mobile
two-way radio system.
The vehicle is equipped with
sophisticated computers that will
record certain data, such as:
• Engine speed/Electric motor
speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving
assist systems
• Images from the cameras
Your vehicle is equipped with cam-
eras. Contact your Toyota dealer for
the location of recording cameras.
The recorded data varies
according to the vehicle grade
level and options with which it is
equipped.
These computers do not record
conversations or sounds, and
only record images outside of
the vehicle in certain situations.
Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data
recorded in these computers to
Toyota without notification to you.
Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded
in this computer to diagnose mal-
functions, conduct research and
development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the
recorded data to a third party
except:
• With the consent of the vehicle
owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request
by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the
data is not tied to a specific vehi-
cle or vehicle owner
Recorded image information
can be erased by your Toyota
dealer.
The image recording function can
be disabled. However, if the func-
tion is disabled, data from when the
system operates will not be avail-
able.
To learn more about the vehi-
cle data collected, used and
shared by Toyota, please visit
www.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
If your Toyota has Safety Con-
nect and if you have subscribed
to those services, please refer to
the Safety Connect Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement
for information on data collected
Vehicle data recording
Usage of data collected
through Safety Connect
(U.S. mainland only)
7
HIGHLANDER_U
and its usage.
To learn more about the vehicle
data collected, used and shared
by Toyota, please visit
www.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 sec-
onds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data
as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver
was depressing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was trav-
eling.
These data can help provide a
better understanding of the cir-
cumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-triv-
ial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data rou-
tinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an
EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufac-
turer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the
information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data
recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s
owner (or the lessee for a leased
vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request
by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on
vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party
Event data recorder
8
HIGHLANDER_U
for research purposes without
disclosing information about the
specific vehicle or vehicle owner
The SRS airbag and seat belt
pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemi-
cals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such
as fire. Be sure to have the sys-
tems of the SRS airbag and seat
belt pretensioner removed and
disposed of by a qualified ser-
vice shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your
vehicle.
Special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components
that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include
airbag, seat belt pretensioners,
and wireless remote control bat-
teries.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Perchlorate Material
WARNING
■ General precautions while
driving
Driving under the influence: Never
drive your vehicle when under the
influence of alcohol or drugs that
have impaired your ability to oper-
ate your vehicle. Alcohol and cer-
tain drugs delay reaction time,
impair judgment and reduce coor-
dination, which could lead to an
accident that could result in death
or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive
defensively. Anticipate mistakes
that other drivers or pedestrians
might make and be ready to avoid
accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give
your full attention to driving. Any-
thing that distracts the driver, such
as adjusting controls, talking on a
cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting
death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding
children’s safety
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
selves by playing with the win-
dows, the moon roof or panoramic
moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up
or extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
9
HIGHLANDER_U
Reading this manual
Explains symbols used in
this manual.
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause death or
serious injury to peo-
ple.
NOTICE:
Explains something
that, if not obeyed,
could cause dam-
age to or a malfunc-
tion in the vehicle or
its equipment.
Indicates operating
or working proce-
dures. Follow the
steps in numerical
order.
Symbols in illustrations
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the action
(pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate
switches and other
devices.
Indicates the out-
come of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the compo-
nent or position
being explained.
Means Do not, Do
not do this, or Do
not let this happen.
11
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■Exterior
The shape of the lights may differ depending on the grade, etc.
Side doors .......................................................................... P.115
Locking/unlocking ................................................................ P.115
Opening/closing the side windows.......................................P.164
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key ..................P.481
Warning lights/warning messages ...............................P.450, 460
Back door ........................................................................... P.119
Opening from inside the cabin
*
............................................P.122
Opening from outside...........................................................P.123
Warning lights/warning messages ...............................P.450, 460
Outside rear view mirrors .................................................P.162
Adjusting the mirror angle....................................................P.162
Folding the mirrors...............................................................P.163
Driving position memory
*
.....................................................P.144
Defogging the mirrors ..................................................P.329, 335
Windshield wipers..............................................................P.220
12
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
Precautions for winter season..............................................P.319
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer).............P.330, 335
Precautions for car wash
*
....................................................P.389
Fuel filler door....................................................................P.225
Refueling method.................................................................P.225
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity .................................................P.495
Tires..................................................................................... P.411
Tire size/inflation pressure ........................................... P.411, 499
Winter tires/tire chains .........................................................P.319
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system.................. P.411
Coping with flat tires.............................................................P.464
Hood....................................................................................P.402
Opening ...............................................................................P.402
Engine oil.............................................................................P.495
Coping with overheating ......................................................P.487
Warning messages ..............................................................P.460
Headlights...........................................................................P.214
Parking lights .....................................................................P.214
Front turn signal lights......................................................P.208
Parking lights
*
/daytime running lights.............................P.214
Front side marker lights....................................................P.214
Front fog lights
*
..................................................................P.220
Stop/tail lights ....................................................................P.214
Tail lights.............................................................................P.214
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R...................................................P.204
License plate lights............................................................P.214
Rear turn signal lights.......................................................P.208
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.432, Watts: P.501)
14
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
■Instrument panel
Engine switch.....................................................................P.200
Starting the engine/changing the modes .............................P.200
Emergency stop of the engine .............................................P.442
When the engine will not start..............................................P.478
Warning messages ..............................................................P.460
Shift lever............................................................................P.204
Changing the shift position...................................................P.205
Precautions for towing .........................................................P.445
When the shift lever does not move.....................................P.206
Meters ...................................................................................P.79
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light.P.79, 81
Warning lights/indicator lights ................................................P.74
When a warning light turns on .............................................P.450
Multi-information display ..............................................P.82, 91
Display .............................................................................P.82, 91
When the warning messages are displayed ........................P.460
15
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
Turn signal lever.................................................................P.208
Headlight switch ................................................................P.214
Headlights/side marker lights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate
lights/daytime running lights.................................................P.214
Front fog lights
*1
...................................................................P.220
Windshield wiper and washer switch.......................P.220, 223
Usage...........................................................................P.220, 223
Adding washer fluid..............................................................P.410
Warning messages ..............................................................P.460
Emergency flasher switch.................................................P.442
Hood lock release lever.....................................................P.402
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever................P.150
Adjustment...........................................................................P.150
Air conditioning system............................................P.328, 333
Usage...........................................................................P.328, 333
Rear window defogger.................................................P.329, 335
Windshield wiper de-icer
*1
...........................................P.330, 335
Audio system
*2
Fuel filler door opener switch...........................................P.225
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
16
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
■Switches
Driving position memory switches
*1
................................P.144
Window lock switch...........................................................P.166
Power window switches....................................................P.164
Door lock switches ............................................................ P.118
Outside rear view mirror switches ...................................P.162
“ODO TRIP” switch..............................................................P.81
Instrument panel light control switches............................P.81
Automatic High Beam switch ...........................................P.217
Camera switch
*2
Power back door switch
*1
.................................................P.122
Heated steering wheel switch
*1
........................................P.352
Windshield wiper de-icer
*1
................................................P.343
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
17
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
Meter control switches..................................................P.83, 92
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch...................................P.258
Cruise control switch
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.............P.254
Audio remote control switches
*
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch .....................................P.241
Phone switch
*
Talk switch
*
*
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
18
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
USB port
*1
USB charging ports ...........................................................P.367
Power outlet .......................................................................P.376
Brake hold switch ..............................................................P.212
Parking brake switch.........................................................P.209
Applying/releasing................................................................P.209
Precautions against winter season ......................................P.319
Warning buzzer/light/message.............................................P.460
Stop & Start cancel switch
*2
.............................................P.265
“DAC” switch
*2
................................................................... P.311
Snow mode switch.............................................................P.310
VSC OFF switch .................................................................P.314
Driving mode select switch...............................................P.306
Multi-terrain Select switch
*2
..............................................P.307
*1
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
*2
:If equipped
19
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
■Interior
SRS airbags..........................................................................P.32
Floor mats.............................................................................P.22
Front seats..........................................................................P.138
Rear seats...........................................................................P.139
Head restraints...................................................................P.147
Seat belts..............................................................................P.25
Console box .......................................................................P.359
Inside lock buttons ............................................................ P.118
Cup holders........................................................................P.360
Assist grips ........................................................................P.375
Rear seat entertainment system
*1, 2
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
20
Pictorial index
HIGHLANDER_U
■Ceiling
Auxiliary box ......................................................................P.361
Conversation mirror ..........................................................P.378
Interior light
*1
.....................................................................P.356
Personal lights
*1
.................................................................P.356
Moon roof switches
*2
.........................................................P.167
Panoramic moon roof switches
*2
.....................................P.170
Vanity mirrors.....................................................................P.377
Sun visors...........................................................................P.377
“SOS” button
*2
.....................................................................P.63
Inside rear view mirror
*2
....................................................P.151
Digital Rearview Mirror
*2
...................................................P.152
Garage door opener switches
*2
........................................P.379
*1
:The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*2
:If equipped
21
HIGHLANDER_U
1
1
For safety and security
For safety and security
.
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................22
For safe driving..............23
Seat belts.......................25
SRS airbags...................32
Front passenger occupant
classification system....41
Exhaust gas precautions
.....................................46
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children........47
Child restraint systems...48
1-3. Emergency assistance
Safety Connect ..............63
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
.....................................69
Alarm..............................71
22
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1-1.For safe use
Use only floor mats designed
specifically for vehicles of the
same model and model year as
your vehicle. Fix them securely
in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
2 Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
Always align the marks .
The shape of the retaining hooks
(clips) may differ from that shown in
the illustration.
Before driving
Observe the following
before starting off in the
vehicle to ensure safety of
driving.
Installing floor mats
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause the
driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly
interfering with the pedals while
driving. An unexpectedly high
speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehi-
cle. This could lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the driver’s
floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed
for other models or different
mo
del year vehicles, even
if
they
are Toyota Genuine floor
mats.
● Only use floor mats designed
for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat
secur
ely using the retain
ing
h
ooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor
ma
ts on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bot-
tom-side up or upside-down.
23
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (P.138)
Adjust the seat so that you
can depress the pedals fully
and so that your arms bend
slightly at the elbow when
gripping the steering wheel.
(P.138)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P.147)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P.25)
WARNING
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is
securely fixed in the correct
place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be espe-
cially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and
the shift lever in P, fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make
sure it does not interfere with
the floor mat.
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the
seat and mirror to an appro-
priate position before driv-
ing.
Correct driving posture
24
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle. (P.25)
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt. (P.48)
Make sure that you can see
backward clearly by adjusting
the inside and outside rear view
mirrors properly. (P.151, 152,
162)
WARNING
■ For safe driving
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the
driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between
the driver or passenger and the
seatback. A cushion may pre-
vent correct posture from being
achieved, and reduce the effec-
tiveness of the seat belt and
head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the
front seats. Objects placed
under the front seats may
become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from
locking in place. This may lead
to an accident and the adjust-
ment mechanism may also be
damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed
limit when driving on public
roads.
● When driving over long dis-
tances, take regular breaks
before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy
while driving, do not force your-
self to continue driving and take
a break immediately.
Correct use of the seat
belts
Adjusting the mirrors
25
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
Seat belts
Make sure that all occu-
pants are wearing their seat
belts before driving the
vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident. Failure
to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear
a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt prop-
erly.
● Each seat belt should be used
by one person only. Do not use
a seat belt for more than one
person at once, including chil-
dren.
● Toyota recommends that chil-
dren be seated in the rear seat
and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child
restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating
position, do not recline the seat
more than necessary. The seat
belt is most effective when the
occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low
and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear
the seat belt in the proper way.
(
P.2 6)
Women who are pregnant should
position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips in the same
manner as other occupants,
extending the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and
avoiding belt contact with the
rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn prop-
erly, not only the pregnant
woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear
the seat belt in the proper way.
(
P.2 6)
■ When children are in the vehi-
cle
P. 57
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts
by allowing the belt, plate, or
buckle to be jammed in the
door.
26
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Emergency locking retractor
(ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during
a sudden stop or on impact. It may
also lock if you lean forward too
quickly. A slow, easy motion will
allow the belt to extend so that you
can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor
(ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is
completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is
locked in that position and cannot
be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system
(CRS) firmly. To free the belt again,
fully retract the belt and then pull the
belt out once more. (P. 48 )
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were
principally designed for persons of
adult size.
● Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt. (P. 48)
● When the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehi-
cle’s seat belt, follow the instruc-
tions regarding seat belt usage.
(P. 25 )
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toy-
ota dealer free of charge.
WARNING
● Inspect the seat belt system
periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Do not
use a damaged seat belt until it
is replaced. Damaged seat belts
cannot protect an occupant
from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate
are locked and the belt is not
twisted. If the seat belt does not
function correctly, immediately
contact your Toyota dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly,
including the belts, if your vehi-
cle has been involved in a seri-
ous accident, even if there is no
obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install,
remove, modify, disassemble or
dispose of the seat belts. Have
any necessary repairs carried
out by your Toyota dealer. Inap-
propriate handling may lead to
incorrect operation.
Correct use of the seat
belts
27
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
1 To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle until
a click sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt,
press the release button .
■ When not using the rear seat
belts
Pass the outer seat belts through
the seat belt hangers and secure
the seat belt plates to prevent the
shoulder belts from being damaged.
Second seat belts
Third seat belts
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident. Failure
to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not wear the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the
seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt
extender when installing a child
restraint system because the
belt will not securely hold the
child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
● The personalized extender may
not be safe on another vehicle,
when used by another person,
or at a different seating position
other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt
extender
When releasing the seat belt,
press on the buckle release but-
ton on the extender, not on the
seat belt. This helps prevent dam-
age to the vehicle interior and the
extender itself.
Fastening and releasing
the seat belt (except for
the third center seat)
28
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Take the plate out of the
holder, and then pull down
the seat belt.
2 Push plate into buckle
until a click sound is heard.
3 Push plate into buckle
until a click sound is heard.
1 To release plate , press the
release button on buckle
.
2 To release plate , insert the
mechanical key (P.112) or
plate into the hole on
buckle .
Retract the belt slowly when releas-
Fastening the seat belt
(for the third center seat)
WARNING
■ When using the third center
seat belt
Do not use the third center seat
belt with either buckle released.
Fastening only one of the buckles
may result in death or serious
injury in case of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or a collision.
Fastening the seat belt
(for the third center seat)
29
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
ing and stowing the seat belt.
3 Stow the plate and in
the holder on the roof.
In order to securely stow them,
firmly insert them as far as possi-
ble.
1 Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button .
2 Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
If the shoulder belt sits close to
a person’s neck, use the seat
belt comfort guide.
1 Pull the comfort guide from
the pocket.
2 Slide the belt past the slot of
the guide.
The elastic cord must be behind the
Adjusting the seat belt
shoulder anchor height
(front seats)
WARNING
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the cen-
ter of your shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from your
neck, but not falling off your shoul-
der. Failure to do so could reduce
the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or seri-
ous injuries in the event of a sud-
den stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
Seat belt comfort guide
(for the third center seat)
30
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
seat belt.
3 Buckle the seat belt and posi-
tion it comfortably.
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the
occupants by retracting the seat
belts when the vehicle is sub-
jected to certain types of severe
frontal or side collision or a vehi-
cle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact or a
rear impact.
■ Replacing the belt after the pre-
tensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple
collisions, the pretensioner will acti-
vate for the first collision, but will not
activate for the second or subse-
quent collisions.
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt comfort
guide
Failure to observe the following
precautions could reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt in an
accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
● Make sure the belt is not twisted
and that it lies flat. The elastic
cord must be behind the belt
and the guide must be on the
front.
● To reduce the chance of injury
in case of a sudden stop, sud-
den swerve or accident while
driving, remove and store the
comfort guide in its pocket when
it is not in use.
● Always make sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the
center of the shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from the
neck, and should not fall off the
shoulder.
Seat belt pretensioners
(front seats)
31
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ Seat belt pretensioners
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident. Failure
to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not place anything, such as
a cushion, on the front passen-
ger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sen-
sor from detecting the passen-
ger’s weight properly. As a
result, the seat belt pretensioner
for the front passenger’s seat
may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has acti-
vated, the SRS warning light will
come on. In that case, the seat
belt cannot be used again and
must be replaced at your Toyota
dealer.
32
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Location of the SRS airbags
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components
SRS knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection
SRS seat cushion airbag
Can help restrain the front passenger
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to cer-
tain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury
to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to
help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
SRS airbag system
33
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
SRS curtain shield airbags
• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the
event of vehicle rollover
■ SRS airbag system components
Front passenger airbag
“PASS AIR BAG ON” and “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Front side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Side impact sensors (rear)
SRS warning light
Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sen-
sors)
Driver airbag
Side impact sensors (front door)
Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
Seat cushion airbag
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver’s knee airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Front impact sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
34
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed
based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on
information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system
components diagram above. This information includes crash sever-
ity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical
reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising
etc., may be sustained from SRS
airbags, due to the extremely high
speed deployment (inflation) by
hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will
be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steer-
ing wheel hub, airbag cover and
inflator) as well as the front seats,
parts of the front and rear pillars,
and roof side rails, may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself
may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● All of the doors will be unlocked.
(P.116)
● The brakes and stop lights will be
controlled automatically. (P.314)
● The interior lights will turn on auto-
matically. (P.357)
● The emergency flashers will turn
on automatically. (P.442)
● Fuel supply to the engine will be
stopped. (P.449)
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if
any of the following situations
occur, the system is designed to
send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of
the vehicle’s location (without
needing to push the “SOS” button)
and an agent will attempt to speak
with the occupants to ascertain
the level of emergency and assis-
tance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the
agent automatically treats the call
as an emergency and helps to dis-
patch the necessary emergency
services. (P. 63 )
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is acti-
vated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe
rear-end collision.
■ SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy
in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level
(the level of force corresponding
to an approximately 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with
a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will
be considerably higher in the follow-
ing situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object,
such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform
on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision, such as a colli-
sion in which the front of the vehi-
cle “underrides”, or goes under,
the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision,
it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front
passenger will not activate if there
is no passenger sitting in the front
passenger seat. However, the
SRS front airbags for the front
35
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
passenger may deploy if luggage
is put in the seat, even if the seat
is unoccupied.
● The SRS seat cushion airbag on
the front passenger seat will not
operate if the occupant is not
wearing a seat belt.
■ SRS airbag deployment condi-
tions (SRS side and curtain
shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield
airbags will deploy in the event of
an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding
with the vehicle cabin from a
direction perpendicular to the
vehicle orientation at an approxi-
mate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 -
30 km/h]).
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
may deploy in the event of a
severe side collision.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of vehicle
rollover.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags
may also deploy in the event of a
severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the
SRS airbags may deploy
(inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS cur-
tain shield airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement
or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep
hole
● Landing hard or falling
The SRS curtain shield airbags may
also deploy under the situations
shown in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is mar-
ginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb
stone.
■ Types of collisions that may not
deploy the SRS airbags (SRS
front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not gener-
ally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a
low-speed frontal collision. But,
whenever a collision of any type
causes sufficient forward decelera-
tion of the vehicle, deployment of
the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
36
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Types of collisions that may not
deploy the SRS airbags (SRS
side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the
side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehi-
cle body other than the passenger
compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not gener-
ally inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags do
not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a rear collision, if it
pitches end over end, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side or
low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
■ When to contact your Toyota
dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle
will require inspection and/or repair.
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have
been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is dam-
aged or deformed, or was
involved in an accident that was
not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surround-
ing area is damaged, deformed or
has had a hole made in it, or the
vehicle was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough
to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering
wheel, dashboard near the front
passenger airbag or lower portion
of the instrument panel is
37
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The front passenger’s seat cush-
ion surface is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the
SRS side airbag is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes
(padding) containing the SRS cur-
tain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in
the vehicle must wear their seat
belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supple-
mental devices to be used with
the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys
with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious
injury especially if the driver is
very close to the airbag. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
advises:
Since the risk zone for the
driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3
in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm)
from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of
safety. This distance is mea-
sured from the center of the
steering wheel to your breast-
bone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in
several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as
far as you can while still reach-
ing the pedals comfortably.
38
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
• Slightly recline the back of the
seat.
Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the
10 in. (250 mm) distance, even
with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If
reclining the back of your seat
makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjust-
able, tilt it downward. This
points the airbag toward your
chest instead of your head and
neck.
The seat should be adjusted as
recommended by NHTSA above,
while still maintaining control of
the foot pedals, steering wheel,
and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
● If the seat belt extender has
been connected to the front
seat belt buckles but the seat
belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags
will judge that the driver and
front passenger are wearing the
seat belt even though the seat
belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags
may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or
serious injury in the event of a
collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
● The SRS front passenger air-
bag also deploys with consider-
able force, and can cause death
or serious injury especially if the
front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger
seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seat-
back adjusted, so the front pas-
senger sits upright.
39
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Improperly seated and/or
restrained infants and children
can be killed or seriously injured
by a deploying airbag. An infant
or child who is too small to use
a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint
system. Toyota strongly recom-
mends that all infants and chil-
dren be placed in the rear seats
of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children
than the front passenger seat.
(
P.4 8)
● Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or lean against the dash-
board.
● Do not allow a child to stand in
front of the SRS front passenger
airbag unit or sit on the knees of
a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occu-
pants to hold items on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door,
the roof side rail or the front,
side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on
the passenger seat toward the
door or put their head or hands
outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or
lean anything against areas
such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad and lower portion of
the instrument panel.
These items can become pro-
jectiles when the SRS driver,
front passenger and knee air-
bags deploy.
40
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Do not attach anything to areas
such as a door, windshield, side
windows, front or rear pillar, roof
side rail and assist grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard objects on the coat
hooks. All of these items could
become projectiles and may
cause death or serious injury,
should the SRS curtain shield
airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area
where the SRS knee airbag will
deploy, be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories
which cover the parts where the
SRS side airbags and SRS seat
cushion airbag inflate as they
may interfere with inflation of
the SRS airbags. Such acces-
sories may prevent the side air-
bags and seat cushion airbag
from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side
airbags and seat cushion airbag
to inflate accidentally, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant
levels of force to the area of the
SRS airbag components or the
front doors. Doing so can cause
the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the compo-
nent parts immediately after the
SRS airbags have deployed
(inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult
after the SRS airbags have
deployed, open a door or win-
dow to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to
do so. Wash off any residue as
soon as possible to prevent skin
irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS air-
bags are stored, such as the
steering wheel pad and front
and rear pillar garnishes, are
damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as
a cushion, on the front passen-
ger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sen-
sor from detecting the passen-
ger’s weight properly. As a
result, the SRS front airbags for
the front passenger may not
deploy in the event of a colli-
sion.
■ Modification and disposal of
SRS airbag system compo-
nents
Do not dispose of your vehicle or
perform any of the following modi-
fications without consulting your
Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags
may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassem-
bly and repair of the SRS air-
bags
● Repairs, modifications, removal
or replacement of the steering
wheel, instrument panel, dash-
board, seats or seat upholstery,
front, side and rear pillars, roof
side rails, front door panels,
front door trims or front door
speakers
41
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
Vehicles with a 8-inch display
SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat belt reminder light
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor light
WARNING
● Modifications to the front door
panel (such as making a hole in
it)
● Repairs or modifications of the
front fender, front bumper, or
side of the occupant compart-
ment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow
plows, winches or roof luggage
carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s
suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices
such as mobile two-way radios
and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for
a person with a physical disabil-
ity
Front passenger occu-
pant classification
system
Your vehicle is equipped
with a front passenger
occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects
the conditions of the front
passenger seat and acti-
vates or deactivates the
front passenger airbag and
seat cushion airbag.
System components
42
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
“PASS AIR BAG ON” indica-
tor light
Vehicles with a 12.3-inch dis-
play
SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat belt reminder light
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor light
“PASS AIR BAG ON” indica-
tor light
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant
classification system precau-
tions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the front passenger
occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt plate has not been left
inserted into the buckle before
someone sits in the front pas-
senger seat.
● Make sure the “PASS AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is not illumi-
nated when using the seat belt
extender for the front passenger
seat. If the “PASS AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt
buckle, and reconnect the seat
belt. Reconnect the seat belt
extender after making sure the
“PASS AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If you use
the seat belt extender while the
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, the SRS air-
bags for the front passenger will
not activate, which could cause
death or serious injury in the
event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger seat or equip-
ment (e.g. seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front
passenger seat by putting your
hands or feet on the front pas-
senger seat seatback from the
rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift
the front passenger seat with
their feet or press on the seat-
back with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the
front passenger seat.
43
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Do not recline the front passen-
ger seatback so far that it
touches a rear seat. This may
cause the “PASS AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light to be illumi-
nated, which indicates that the
SRS airbags for the front pas-
senger will not activate in the
event of a severe accident. If
the seatback touches the rear
seat, return the seatback to a
position where it does not touch
the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright
as possible when the vehicle is
moving. Reclining the seatback
excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt
system.
● If an adult sits in the front pas-
senger seat, the “PASS AIR
BAG ON” indicator light is illumi-
nated. If the “PASS AIR BAG
OFF” indicator is illuminated,
ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat,
feet on the floor, and with the
seat belt worn correctly. If the
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator
still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to
the rear seat, or if that is not
possible, move the front pas-
senger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install
a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat, install the child restraint
system on the front passenger
seat in the proper order.
(
P.5 0)
● Do not modify or remove the
front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger
seat or subject it to severe
impact. Otherwise, the SRS
warning light may come on to
indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant clas-
sification system. In this case,
contact your Toyota dealer
immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed
on the rear seat should not con-
tact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory,
such as a cushion and seat
cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the
upholstery of the front seat.
44
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Adult
*1
■ Child
*4
■ Child restraint system with infant
*5
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
Indicator/warning
light
“PASS AIR BAG ON” and “PASS
AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASS AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Activated
Front passenger seat cushion air-
bag
Activated
*2
or
deactivated
*3
Indicator/warning
light
“PASS AIR BAG ON” and “PASS
AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASS AIR BAG
OFF” or “PASS
AIR BAG ON”
*4
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated or
activated
*4
Front passenger seat cushion air-
bag
Deactivated or
activated
*4, 2
Indicator/warning
light
“PASS AIR BAG ON” and “PASS
AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASS AIR BAG
OFF”
*6
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger seat cushion air-
bag
45
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
■ Unoccupied
■ There is a malfunction in the system
*1
:The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize
him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2
:In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3
:In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4
:For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert-
ible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors
which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5
:Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P.48)
*6
:In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 50 )
Indicator/warning
light
“PASS AIR BAG ON” and “PASS
AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASS AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light
Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Seat cushion airbag in the front
passenger side
Indicator/warning
light
“PASS AIR BAG ON” and “PASS
AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASS AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger seat cushion air-
bag
46
1-1. For safe use
HIGHLANDER_U
Exhaust gas precau-
tions
Harmful substance to the
human body is included in
exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Observe
the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
exhaust gases enter the vehicle
and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back door closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in
the vehicle even when the ba
ck
doo
r is closed, open the win-
dows and have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-
lated area or a closed area,
s
uch as a garage, stop the
engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with
the engine running for a long
tim
e.
If such a situation cannot
be
avoide
d, park the vehicle in an
open space and ensure that
exhaust fumes do not enter th
e
ve
hicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running
in an area with snow build-up,
or where it is snowing. If snow-
banks build up around the vehi-
cle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect a
nd
e
nter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be
checked periodically. If there is a
hole or crack caused by corro-
sion, damage to a joint or abnor-
mal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and
repaired by your Toyota dealer.
47
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
1-2.Child saf ety
Riding with children
Observe the following pre-
cautions when children are
in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system
appropriate for the child,
until the child becomes
large enough to properly
wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
It is recommended that chil-
dren sit in th
e rear seats to
avoid a
ccident
al contact
with
the shift lever
, wiper
swi
tch, etc.
Use the rear door child-pro-
tector lock or the
window
lock switch to avoid children
ope
ning the door while driv-
ing or operating the p
ower
wind
ow accidentally
.
(
P.118, 166)
Do not let small children
operate eq
uipment which
may catch or pinch body
p
arts, such as the power
window, hood, back door
,
se
ats etc.
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehi-
cle
Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, and never allow
children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the
vehicle or shift the vehicle into
neutral. There is also a danger
that children may injure them-
selves by playing with the win-
dows, the moon roof or panoramic
moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up
or extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
48
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
Points to remember: P.48
Child restraint system: P.50
When using a child restraint sys-
tem: P.51
Child restraint system installa-
tion method
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.53
• Fixed with a child restraint
LATCH anchor: P.58
• Using an anchor bracket (for
top tether strap): P.60
The laws of all 50 states of the
U.S.A. as well as Canada now
require the use of child restraint
systems.
Prioritize and observe the
warnings, as well as the laws
and regulations for child
restraint systems.
Use a child restraint system
until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belt.
Choose a child restraint sys-
tem that suits your vehicle
and is appropriate to the age
and size of the child.
Child restraint sys-
tems
Before installing a child
restraint system in the vehi-
cle, there are precautions
that need to be observed,
different types of child
restraint systems, as well as
installation methods, etc.,
written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system
when riding with a small
child that cannot properly
use a seat belt. For the
child’s safety, install the
child restraint system to a
second seat. Be sure to fol-
low the installation method
that is in the operation man-
ual enclosed with the
restraint system.
Table of contents
Points to remember
WARNING
■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● For effective protection in auto-
mobile accidents and sudden
stops, a child must be properly
restrained, using a seat belt or
child restraint system which is
correctly installed. For installa-
tion details, refer to the opera-
tion manual enclosed with the
child restraint system. General
installation instruction is pro-
vided in this manual.
49
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Toyota strongly urges the use of
a proper child restraint system
that conforms to the weight and
size of the child, installed on the
second seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the
second seat than in the front
seat.
● Holding a child in your or some-
one else’s arms is not a substi-
tute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield
or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint
system
If the child restraint system is not
properly fixed in place, the child or
other passengers may be seri-
ously injured or even killed in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a
strong impact from an accident,
etc., it is possible that the child
restraint system has damage
that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the
restraint system.
● Make sure you have complied
with all installation instructions
provided with the child restraint
system manufacturer and that
the system is properly secured.
● Keep the child restraint system
properly secured on the seat
even if it is not in use. Do not
store the child restraint system
unsecured in the passenger
compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the
child restraint system, remove it
from the vehicle or store it
securely in the luggage com-
partment.
50
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint
system about the installation of the child restraint system.
Child restraint system
Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.5 3
Child restraint LATCH
anchors attachment
P.5 8
51
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
*
: The third seats are not equipped with Child restraint LATCH anchors.
■ When installing a child
restraint system to a front
passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install
child restraint systems to sec-
ond seats. When installing child
restraint system to a front pas-
senger seat is unavoidable,
adjust the seat as follows and
install the child restraint system.
Anchor brackets (for
top tether strap) attach-
ment
8-seat models second seats:
P.6 0
7-seat models second seats:
Third seats
*
:
Installation method Page
When using a child
restraint system
52
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
Move the seat to the rearmost
position
Raise the seatback as much
as possible
If the head restraint interferes
with the installation of the
child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be
removed, remove the head
restraint
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint
system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Never install a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front
passenger seat even if the
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the
rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to the child if
the rear-facing child restraint
system is installed on the front
passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint
system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. A child
restraint system that requires a
top tether strap should not be
used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger
seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint
system may be installed on the
front passenger seat only when
it is unavoidable. When install-
ing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front
passenger seat, raise the seat-
back as much as possible, and
move the seat to the rearmost
position, even if the “PASS AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illu-
minated.
If the head restraint interferes with
the installation of the child
restraint system, and the head
restraint can be removed, remove
the head restraint.
If the head restraint cannot be
removed, raise it to the uppermost
position.
53
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
A child restraint system for a
small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat
with the lap portion of the
lap/shoulder belt.
■ Installing child restraint
system using a seat belt
(child restraint lock func-
tion belt)
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
■ Rear-facing Infant
seat/convertible seat
1 Adjust the rear seat
If there is a gap between the child
seat and the seatback, adjust the
seatback angle until good contact is
achieved.
WARNING
● Do not allow the child to lean
his/her head or any part of
his/her body against the door or
the area of the seat, front or rear
pillars, or roof side rails from
which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is
seated in the child restraint sys-
tem. It is dangerous if the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
● When a booster seat is
installed, always ensure that the
shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck,
but not so that it could fall off the
child’s shoulder.
● Use child restraint system suit-
able to the age and size of the
child and install it to the rear
seat.
● If the driver’s seat interferes
with the child restraint system
and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the
right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat
so that it does not interfere with
the child restraint system.
Child restraint system
fixed with a seat belt
54
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
2 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
3 Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
5 While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the shoul-
der belt to retract until the
child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
6 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.57)
■ Forward-facing Convert-
ible seat
1 Adjust the seat
When using the front passen-
ger seat
If installing the child restraint
system to the front passenger
seat is unavoidable, refer to
P.51for the front passenger seat
adjustment.
When using the rear seat
If there is a gap between the
child seat and the seatback,
adjust the seatback angle until
good contact is achieved.
55
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
2 Remove the head restraint if
it interferes with your child
restraint system. (P.147)
3 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
4 Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
5 Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
6 While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
7 If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s
operation manual regarding
the installation, using the top
tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor.
(P.60)
8 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
56
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.57)
■ Booster seat
1 If installing the child restraint
system to the front passen-
ger seat is unavoidable, refer
to P.51for the front passenger
seat adjustment.
2 High back type: Remove the
head restraint if it interferes
with your child restraint sys-
tem. (P.147)
3 Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Booster type
High back type
4 Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 25 )
■ Removing a child restraint
system installed with a seat
belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the
child restraint system may spring
up due to the rebound of the seat
cushion. Release the buckle while
holding down the child restraint
57
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
system.
Since the seat belt automatically
reels itself, slowly return it to the
stowing position.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play
with the seat belt. If the seat belt
becomes twisted around a
child’s neck, it may lead to
choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle
cannot be unfastened, scissors
should be used to cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate
are securely locked and the
seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system
left and right, and forward and
backward to ensure that it has
been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint
system, never adjust the seat.
● When a booster seat is
installed, always ensure that the
shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck,
but not so that it could fall off the
child’s shoulder.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
● Child restraint systems cannot
be installed in the rear center
seat. Do not install the child
restraint system in the rear cen-
ter seat using the LATCH
anchors.
● When securing some types of
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to
properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effective-
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a differ-
ent position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
■ When installing a booster
seat
To prevent the belt from going into
ALR lock mode, do not fully
extend the shoulder belt. ALR
mode causes the belt to tighten
only. This could cause injury or
discomfort to the child. (P. 26)
58
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Child restraint LATCH
anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outboard second seats.
■ When installing in the rear
outboard seats
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
1 Adjust the seat
If there is a gap between the child
seat and the seatback, adjust the
seatback angle until good contact is
achieved.
2 Remove the head restraint if
it interferes with your child
restraint system. (P.147)
3 Widen the gap between the
seat cushion and seatback
slightly.
With flexible lower attach-
ments
4 Latch the hooks of the lower
attachments onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child
restraint system indicates
the presence of a lower con-
nector system.
Canada only
WARNING
■ Do not use a seat belt
extender
If a seat belt extender is used
when installing a child restraint
system, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint
system, which could cause death
or serious injury to the child or
other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerv-
ing or an accident.
Child restraint system
fixed with a child restraint
LATCH anchor
59
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
With rigid lower attachments
4 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child
restraint system indicates
the presence of a lower con-
nector system.
Canada only
5 If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s
operation manual regarding
the installation, using the top
tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor.
(P.60)
6 After installing the child
restraint system, rock it back
and forth to ensure that it is
installed securely. (P.57)
■ When installing in the sec-
ond center seat (8-seat
models)
There are no LATCH anchors
behind the seceond center seat.
However, the inboard LATCH
anchors of the outboard seats,
which are 18.6 in. (473 mm)
apart, can be used if the child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit use of those
anchors with the anchor spacing
stated.
Child restraint systems with rigid
lower attachments cannot be
installed in the center seat. This
type of child restraint system
can only be installed in the out-
board seat.
■ Laws and regulations pertain-
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● After securing a child restraint
system, never adjust the seat.
● When using the LATCH
anchors, be sure that there are
no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is
not caught behind the child
restraint system.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
60
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Anchor brackets (for top
tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for the following seats:
Use anchor brackets when fix-
ing the top tether strap.
8-seat models second seats
Anchor brackets
Top tether strap
7-seat models second seats
Anchor brackets
Top tether strap
Third center seat
*
Anchor brackets
Top tether strap
*
: The third seats are not equipped
with Child restraint LATCH
WARNING
● Never attach two child restraint
system attachments to the
same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child
restraint system attachments
and may break.
If the LATCH anchors are already
in use, use the seat belt to install
a child restraint system in the cen-
ter seat.
● When securing some types of
child restraint systems in rear
seats, it may not be possible to
properly use the seat belts in
positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with
it or affecting seat belt effective-
ness. Be sure your seat belt fits
snugly across your shoulder
and low on your hips. If it does
not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a differ-
ent position. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious
injury.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
system.
Using an anchor bracket
(for top tether strap)
61
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
anchors.
■ Fixing the top tether strap
to the anchor bracket (sec-
ond seats)
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
1 Remove the head restraint if
it interferes with your child
restraint system. (P.147)
2 Open the anchor bracket
cover, latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten
the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched. (P.57)
When installing the child restraint
system with the head restraint
being raised, be sure to have the
top tether strap pass underneath
the head restraint.
Hook
Top tether strap
■ Fixing the top tether strap
to the anchor bracket (third
center seat)
Install the child restraint system
in accordance to the operation
manual enclosed with the child
restraint system.
1 Remove the head restraint if
it interferes with your child
restraint system. (P.147)
2 Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten
the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched. (P. 57 )
When installing the child restraint
system with the head restraint
being raised, be sure to have the
top tether strap pass underneath
the head restraint.
Hook
Top tether strap
62
1-2. Child safety
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Laws and regulations pertain-
ing to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming
to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 speci-
fications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform
to SAE J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a child
restraint system
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Firmly attach the top tether
strap and make sure that the
belt
is not twisted.
● Do not attach the top strap to
anythin
g other than the anchor
bracket of the seat the
child
restraint
system is installed to.
● Follow all installation instruc-
tions provided by the ch
ild
restr
aint system manufacturer.
● When installing a child restraint
syste
m in the center rear seat
,
adju
st both seatbacks at
the
s
ame angle. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot
be
se
curely restrained and
this
m
ay cause death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
● When installing the child
r
estraint system with the head
restraint being raised, after the
head restraint has been raised
and then the anchor bracket ha
s
bee
n fixed, do not lower th
e
hea
d restraint.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm
the security of the child restraint
sy
stem.
NOTICE
■ Anchor brackets (for top
te
ther strap)
When not in use, make certain to
close the lid. If it remains open,
the lid may be damaged.
63
1-3. Emergency assistance
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
1-3.Emergency assistance
*
: If equipped
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Microphone
Safety Connect
*
Safety Connect is a sub-
scription-based telematics
service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS)
data and embedded cellular
technology to provide
safety and security features
to subscribers. Safety Con-
nect is supported by Toy-
ota’s designated response
center, which operates 24
hours per day, 7 days per
week.
Safety Connect service is
available by subscription on
select, telematics hard-
ware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect
service, you are agreeing to
be bound by the Telematics
Subscription Service Agree-
ment and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and
amended from time to time,
a current copy of which is
available at Toyota.com in
the United States, Toy-
otapr.com in Puerto Rico
and Toyota.ca in Canada. All
use of the Safety Connect
service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and
Conditions.
System components
65
1-3. Emergency assistance
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
*
: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle
theft. (P.6 6)
Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-cen-
ter support. (P.6 7)
Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Provides drivers various on-road
assistance. (P.6 7)
After you have signed the
Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement and are enrolled,
you can begin receiving ser-
vices.
A variety of subscription terms
are available for purchase. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer, call the
following appropriate Customer
Experience Center or push the
“SOS” button in your vehicle for
further subscription details.
The United States
1-800-331-4331
Canada
1-888-869-6828
Puerto Rico
1-877-855-8377
■ Safety Connect Services Infor-
mation
● Phone calls using the vehicle’s
Bluetooth
®
technology will not be
possible when Safety Connect is
active and in use.
● Safety Connect is available begin-
ning Fall 2009 on select Toyota
models (in the contiguous United
States only). Contact with the
Safety Connect response center
is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condi-
tion, cellular connection availabil-
ity, and GPS satellite signal
reception, which can limit the abil-
ity to reach the response center or
receive emergency service sup-
port. Enrollment and Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement
are required. A variety of subscrip-
tion terms are available; charges
vary by subscription term selected
and location.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
Emergency Assistance and Stolen
Vehicle Location are available in
the United States, including
Hawaii and Alaska, Puerto Rico
and Canada, and Enhanced
Roadside Assistance are avail-
able in the United States, Puerto
Rico and Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification,
Emergency Assistance, Stolen
Vehicle and Enhanced Road
Assistance are not available in the
U.S. Virgin Islands.
For vehicles first sold in the U.S.
Virgin Islands, no Safety Connect
services will function in or outside
the U.S. Virgin Islands.
● Safety Connect services are not
subject to section 255 of the Tele-
communications Act and the
device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response cen-
ter will offer support in multiple lan-
guages. The Safety Connect system
will offer voice prompts in English,
Spanish, and French. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when
enrolling.
Subscription
66
1-3. Emergency assistance
HIGHLANDER_U
■ When contacting the response
center
You may be unable to contact the
response center if the network is
busy.
When the engine switch is
turned to ON, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds
then turns off. Afterward, the
green indicator light comes on,
indicating that the service is
active.
The following indicator light pat-
terns indicate specific system
usage conditions:
Green indicator light on =
Active service
Green indicator light flashing
= Safety Connect call in pro-
cess
Red indicator light (except at
vehicle start-up) = System
malfunction (contact your Toy-
ota dealer)
No indicator light (off) =
Safety Connect service not
active
■ Automatic Collision Notifi-
cation
In case of either airbag deploy-
ment or severe rear-end colli-
sion, the system is designed to
automatically call the response
center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location
and attempts to speak with the
vehicle occupants to assess the
level of emergency. If the occu-
pants are unable to communi-
cate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency,
contacts the nearest emer-
gency services provider to
describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety
Connect can work with local
authorities to assist them in
locating and recovering the
vehicle. After filing a police
report, call the Customer Experi-
ence Center at 1-800-331-4331
in the United States,
1-877-855-8377 in Puerto Rico
or 1-888-869-6828 in Canada,
and follow the prompts for
Safety Connect to initiate this
service.
In addition to assisting law
enforcement with recovery of a
stolen vehicle, Safety-Con-
nect-equipped vehicle location
data may, under certain circum-
stances, be shared with third
parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available
at Toyota.com in the United
States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto
Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.
Safety Connect LED light
Indicators
Safety Connect services
67
1-3. Emergency assistance
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
■ Emergency Assistance But-
ton (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on
the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect
response center. The answer-
ing agent will determine your
vehicle’s location, assess the
emergency, and dispatch the
necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS”
button, tell the response-center
agent that you are not experiencing
an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assis-
tance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance
adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota
roadside service.
Subscribers can press the
“SOS” button to reach a Safety
Connect response-center agent,
who can help with a wide range
of needs, such as: towing, flat
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a
description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services
and their limitations, please see
the Safety Connect Terms and
Conditions, which are available
at Toyota.com in the United
States, Toyotapr.com in Puerto
Rico and Toyota.ca in Canada.
Important! Read this informa-
tion before using Safety Con-
nect.
■ Exposure to radio fre-
quency signals
The Safety Connect system
installed in your vehicle is a
low-power radio transmitter and
receiver. It receives and also
sends out radio frequency (RF)
signals.
In August 1996, the Federal
Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted RF exposure
guidelines with safety levels for
mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with
the safety standards previously
set by the following U.S. and
international standards bodies.
ANSI (American National
Standards Institute) C95.1
[1992]
NCRP (National Council on
Radiation Protection and
Measurement) Report 86
[1986]
ICNIRP (International Com-
mission on Non-Ionizing Radi-
ation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on
comprehensive and periodic
evaluations of the relevant sci-
entific literature. Over 120 scien-
tists, engineers, and physicians
from universities, and govern-
ment health agencies and
industries reviewed the avail-
able body of research to
Safety information for
Safety Connect
68
1-3. Emergency assistance
HIGHLANDER_U
develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect
complies with the FCC guide-
lines in addition to those stan-
dards.
69
1-4. Theft deterrent system
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
1-4.Theft deterrent system
The indicator light flashes after
the engine switch has been
turned off to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the engine switch has been
turned to ACC or ON to indicate
that the system has been can-
celed.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a mainte-
nance-free type engine immobilizer
system.
■ Conditions that may cause the
system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in
contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or
touching a key registered to the
security system (key with a built-in
transponder chip) of another vehi-
cle
Engine immobilizer
system
The vehicle’s keys have
built-in transponder chips
that prevent the engine from
starting if a key has not
been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board
computer.
Never leave the keys inside
the vehicle when you leave
the vehicle.
This system is designed to
help prevent vehicle theft
but does not guarantee
absolute security against all
vehicle thefts.
Operating the system
70
1-4. Theft deterrent system
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Certification for the engine immobilizer system
Except for vehicles sold in Canada
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the sys-
tem. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
71
1-4. Theft deterrent system
HIGHLANDER_U
1
For safety and security
*
: If equipped
■ Items to check before lock-
ing the vehicle
To prevent unexpected trigger-
ing of the alarm and vehicle
theft, make sure of the following:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows, moon roof (if
equipped) and panoramic
moon roof (if equipped) are
closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other per-
sonal items are left in the
vehicle.
■ Setting
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The security indicator changes from
being on to flashing when the sys-
tem is set.
■ Canceling or stopping
Do one of the following to deac-
tivate or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors.
Turn the engine switch to
ACC or ON, or start the
engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a mainte-
nance-free type alarm system.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the
following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the
alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens
a door or hood, or unlocks the
vehicle.
Alarm
*
The alarm uses light and
sound to give an alert when
an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the
following situations when
the alarm is set:
A locked door is unlocked or
opened in any way other
than using the entry func-
tion, wireless remote control
or mechanical key. (The
doors will lock again auto-
matically.)
The hood is opened.
Setting/canceling/stop-
ping the alarm system
72
1-4. Theft deterrent system
HIGHLANDER_U
● The battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle
is
locked.
(P.485)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending
on the situation, the door may auto-
matically lock to prevent improper
entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the
v
ehicle unlocks the door and the
alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a
pe
rson remaining in the
vehicle
un
locks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the
battery
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
Do not modify or remove the sys-
tem. If modified or removed, the
proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
73
HIGHLANDER_U
2
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Vehicle status information
and indicators
.
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indica-
tors...............................74
Gauges and meters .......79
Multi-information display
(4.2-inch display)..........82
Multi-information display
(7-inch display).............91
Head-up display.......... 101
Fuel consumption informa-
tion............................ 106
74
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2-1.Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.
4.2-inch display
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ
depending on the target region.
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster,
center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of
the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instru-
ment cluster
75
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
7-inch display
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ
depending on the target region.
Warning lights inform the driver
of malfunctions in the indicated
vehicle’s systems.
Warning lights
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning
light
*1
(P.450)
(red)
(Canada)
Brake system warning
light
*1
(P.450)
(yellow)
Brake system warning
light
*1
(P.450)
High coolant temperature
warning light
*2
(P.450)
Charging system warning
light
*1
(P.451)
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
*2
(P.451)
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator
lamp
*1
(P.451)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator
lamp
*1
(P.451)
SRS warning light
*1
(P.451)
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.452)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.452)
Brake Override System
warning light/Drive-Start
Control warning light
*2
(P.452)
(red/yel-
low)
Electric power steering
system warning light
(P.452)
Low fuel level warning
light
*1
(P.453)
Driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat belt reminder
light (P.453)
76
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
*1
:These lights turn on when the
engine switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the engine is started, or
after a few seconds. There may
be a malfunction in a system if a
light does not come on, or turn
off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
*2
:This light illuminates on the
multi-information display.
*3
:7-inch display only: This light illu-
minates on the multi-information
display.
*4
:This light comes on when the
system is turned off.
*5
:4.2-inch display only: These
lights turn on when the engine
switch is turned to ON to indicate
that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a
malfunction in a system if a light
does not come on, or turn off.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
*6
:7-inch display only
The indicators inform the driver
of the operating state of the
Rear passengers’ seat
belt reminder light
*2
(P.453)
Tire pressure warning
light
*1
(P.454)
(orange)
LTA indicator
*2
(P.454)
(flashes)
Stop & Start cancel indica-
tor
*3, 4, 5
(if equipped)
(P.454)
(flashes)
Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator
*1, 4, 6
(if
equipped) (P.455)
(flashes)
RCTA OFF indicator
*2, 4
(if
equipped) (P.455)
(flashes)
PKSB OFF indicator
*1, 4, 6
(if equipped) (P.455)
(flashes or
illumi-
nates)
PCS warning light
*1
(P.456)
Slip indicator
*1
(P.456)
(flashes)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
*1
(P.457)
(flashes)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
*1
(P.457)
(flashes)
Brake hold operated indi-
cator
*1
(P.457)
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning
light does not come on
Should a safety system light such
as the ABS and SRS warning
lights not come on when you start
the engine, this could mean that
these systems are not available to
help protect you in an accident,
which could result in death or seri-
ous injury. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
Indicators
77
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P.208)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P.214)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P.214)
Headlight high beam indi-
cator (P.216)
Automatic High Beam indi-
cator
*1
(P.217)
Front fog light indicator
*1
(if equipped) (P.220)
PCS warning light
*3, 4
(P.235)
Cruise control indicator
*2
(P.261)
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol indicator
*2
(P.254)
Cruise control “SET” indi-
cator
*2
(P.254)
(white)
LTA indicator
*2
(P.246)
(green)
LTA indicator
*2
(P.246)
(orange)
(flashes)
LTA indicator
*2
(P.246)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators
*5, 6
(if
equipped) (P.271, 284)
BSM OFF indicator
*2, 3
(if
equipped) (P.271)
Intuitive parking assist
OFF indicator
*3, 4, 10
(if
equipped) (P.277)
RCTA OFF indicator
*2, 3
(if
equipped) (P.284)
PKSB OFF indicator
*3, 4,
10
(if equipped) (P.290)
Stop & Start indicator
*1, 9
(if equipped) (P.264)
Stop & Start cancel indica-
tor
*1, 3, 9
(if equipped)
(P.265)
(flashes)
Slip indicator
*4
(P.314)
VSC OFF indicator
*3, 4
(P.315)
Smart key system indica-
tor
*2
(P.200)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
*4
(P.209)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
*4
(P.209)
Brake hold standby indica-
tor
*4
(P.212)
Brake hold operated indi-
cator
*4
(P.212)
Snow mode indicator
*2
(P.310)
Downhill assist control
system indicator
*1, 9
(if
equipped) (P.311)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light
*4
(P.84, 93)
Low outside temperature
indicator
*2, 7
(P. 79 )
Security indicator
*8
(P.69, 71)
“PASS AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator
*4, 8
(P. 41 )
78
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Drive mode indicators
*1
:7-inch display only: This light illu-
minates on the multi-information
display.
*2
:This light illuminates on the
multi-information display.
*3
:This light comes on when the
system is turned off.
*4
:These lights turn on when the
engine switch is turned to ON to
indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn
off after the engine is started, or
after a few seconds. There may
be a malfunction in a system if a
light does not come on, or turn
off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
*5
:In order to confirm operation, the
BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators illuminate in the follow-
ing situations:
When the BSM function is
enabled on of the
multi-information display, the
engine switch is turned to ON.
When the engine switch is in
ON, the BSM function is
enabled on of the
multi-information display.
If the system is functioning cor-
rectly, the BSM outside rear
view mirror indicators will turn
off after a few seconds. If the
BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators do not illuminate or do
not turn off, there may be a mal-
function in the system. If this
occurs, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*6
:This light illuminates on the out-
side rear view mirrors.
*7
:When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or
lower, this indicator will flash for
approximately 10 seconds, then
stay on.
*8
:This light illuminates on the cen-
ter panel.
*9
:4.2-inch display only: These
lights turn on when the engine
switch is turned to ON to indicate
that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a
malfunction in a system if a light
does not come on, or turn off.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
*10
:7-inch display only
Eco drive mode indicator
*2
(P.306)
Sport mode indicator
*2
(P.306)
Mud & sand mode indica-
tor
*2
(if equipped)
(P.308)
Rock & dirt mode indica-
tor
*2
(if equipped)
(P.308)
79
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Locations of gauges and meters
4.2-inch display
7-inch display
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.82, 91)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P.460)
Gauges and meters
Meter display
80
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Clock (P.82)
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Odometer and trip meter display (P.81)
Shift position display (P.204)
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient
temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
■ The meters and display illumi-
nate when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the cor-
rect outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may
take longer than normal to
change:
• When stopped, or driving at low
speeds (less than 12 mph [20
km/h])
• When the outside temperature
has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel,
etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the
system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may
appear on the display. This phenom-
enon is characteristic of liquid crys-
tal displays, and there is no problem
continuing to use the display.
■ Customization
The meters can be customized on
of the multi-information display.
(P.89, 99)
WARNING
■ The information display at
low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to
warm up before using the liquid
crystal information display. At
extremely low temperatures, the
information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag
between the driver’s shifting and
the new gear number appearing
on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift
again, causing rapid and exces-
sive engine braking and possibly
an accident resulting in death or
injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle
of the tachometer enter the red
zone, which indicates the maxi-
mum engine speed.
81
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehi-
cle has been driven.
Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle
has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B
can be used to record and display
different distances independently.
Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance the vehicle
can be driven until an oil change is
necessary.
■ Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP”
switch is pressed, the displayed
item will be changed. When the
trip meter is displayed, pressing
and holding the switch will reset
the trip meter.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations the following
will be temporarily displayed:
Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance until the next
engine oil change. This display will
be displayed in the following situa-
tions:
When the engine switch is
turned to ON.
When a warning message
indicating that oil mainte-
nance should be performed
soon or is required is dis-
played.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights can be adjusted.
NOTICE
● The engine may be overheating
if the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge is in the red zone
(H). In this case, immediately
stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it
has cooled completely.
(P.487)
Odometer and trip meter
display
Changing the instrument
panel light brightness
82
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
This image is for example only, and
may differ from the actual vehicle.
1 Darker
2 Brighter
■ Brightness of the meters (day
mode and night mode)
The brightness of the meters is
changed between day mode and
night mode.
● Day mode: When the surrounding
area is bright
● Night mode: When the surround-
ing area is dark
The clocks can be adjusted on
the audio system screen.
Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Display
The multi-information display
presents the driver with a variety
of driving-related information.
Warning or suggestion/advice
pop-up displays are also dis-
played in certain situations.
■ Menu icons
Select a menu icon to display its
content.
Adjusting the clock
Multi-information dis-
play (4.2-inch display)
Display and menu icons
Driving information display
(P. 8 3)
Driving support system
information display
(P. 8 5)
Audio system-linked dis-
play (P. 86 )
Vehicle information dis-
play (P. 86 )
Settings display (P.87)
Warning message display
(P. 9 0)
83
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may
appear on the display. This phenom-
enon is characteristic of liquid crys-
tal displays, and there is no problem
continuing to use the display.
The multi-information display is
operated using the meter control
switches.
Scroll screens
*
, change the
displayed content
*
and move
the cursor
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset/Dis-
play customizable items
Return to the previous screen
Call sending/receiving and
history display
Linked with the hands-free system,
sending or receiving call is dis-
played. For details regarding the
hands-free system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
: On screens where the screen can
be scrolled and the display can
be switched, a scroll bar or a
round icon that shows the num-
ber of registered screens is dis-
played.
■ Speedometer display/Driv-
ing range
Speedometer display
Displays the vehicle speed.
Driving range
Displays driving range with remain-
ing fuel. Use the displayed values
as a reference only.
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption.
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-infor-
mation display while driving,
pay extra attention to the safety
of the area around the vehicle.
● Do not look continuously at the
multi-information display while
driving as you may fail to see
pedestrians, objects on the
road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
■ The information display at
low temperatures
P.8 0
Changing the meter dis-
play
Driving information dis-
play ( )
84
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven with
the remaining fuel cannot be calcu-
lated.
Refuel immediately.
■ Fuel economy
Use the displayed values as a ref-
erence only.
Driving range
Displays driving range with remain-
ing fuel.
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven with
the remaining fuel cannot be calcu-
lated.
Refuel immediately.
Current fuel economy
Displays the instantaneous current
fuel Economy.
Average fuel economy
Displays the average fuel economy
since the function was reset or the
average fuel economy after starting
or refueling.
*1, 2, 3
The average fuel economy dis-
play can be changed in .
(P.87)
*1
:Use the displayed fuel consump-
tion as a reference only.
*2
:Average fuel economy since the
function was reset can be reset
by pressing and holding .
*3
:Average fuel economy after
starting is reset each time the
engine stops.
■ Eco Driving Indicator/Driv-
ing range
Eco Driving Indicator
85
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration
(Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indi-
cator Light will turn on. When the
acceleration exceeds the Zone of
Eco driving, or when the vehicle is
stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving
with current Eco driving ratio based
on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the
Zone of Eco driving, the right side
of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display will illuminate.
At this time, the Eco Driving Indica-
tor Light will turn off.
Zone of Eco driving
Driving range
Displays driving range with remain-
ing fuel. Use the displayed values
as a reference only.
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven with
the remaining fuel cannot be calcu-
lated.
Refuel immediately.
■ Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator will not oper-
ate under the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position
other than D.
● The driving mode is set to sport
mode.
● The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 80 mph (130 km/h) or
higher.
■ Driving support system
information
Select to display the operational
status of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.241)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.251)
Driving support system
information display ( )
86
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
(P.254)
■ Navigation system-linked
display (if equipped)
Select to display the following
navigation system-linked infor-
mation:
Route guidance to destination
Compass display (head-
ing-up display)
■ Route guidance to destination
display
When the route guidance to destina-
tion display is enabled on the
head-up display, it will not be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play. (P.103)
Select to enable selection of an
audio source or track on the
meter using the meter control
switches.
This menu icon can be set to be
displayed/not displayed in .
■ Drive information
2 items that are selected using
the “Drive Info Items” setting
(average speed, distance and
total time) can be displayed ver-
tically.
The displayed information
changes according to the “Drive
Info Type” setting (since the sys-
tem was started or between
resets). (P. 87 )
Use the displayed information
as a reference only.
Following items will be dis-
played.
“Trip”
• “Average Speed”: Displays the
average vehicle speed since
engine start
*
• “Distance”: Displays the distance
driven since engine start
*
• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed
time since engine start
*
*
: These items are reset each time
the engine stops.
“Total”
• “Average Speed”: Displays the
average vehicle speed since the
display was reset
*
• “Distance”: Displays the distance
driven since the display was
reset
*
• “Total Time”: Displays the elapsed
time since the display was reset
*
*
: To reset, display the desired item
and press and hold .
■ Tire pressure
P.414
Audio system-linked dis-
play ( )
Vehicle information dis-
play ( )
87
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ AWD Control (if equipped)
Torque distribution display
Displays the drive status of each
wheel in 6 steps from 0 to 5.
G-force display
*
Displays the size and direction of
the G-force applied to the vehicle
via changes to the position of the
ball on the display.
Maximum G-force course
*
This item is linked with the G-force
display and the course of the past
movement of the ball is displayed.
Press and hold to reset the
record.
Wheel spin display
When a tire is spinning, its icon on
the display changes its color and
blinks.
*
: This item is displayed only when
driving mode is set to sport mode.
■ Tire pressure
• It may take a few minutes to dis-
play the tire inflation pressure
after the engine switch is turned to
ON. It may also take a few min-
utes to display the tire inflation
pressure after inflation pressure
has been adjusted.
• “---” may be displayed if the tire
position information cannot be
determined due to unfavorable
radio wave conditions.
• Tire inflation pressure changes
with temperature. The displayed
values may also be different from
the values measured using a tire
pressure gauge.
■ Changing settings
Use the meter control switches
on the steering wheel to change
settings.
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch to select the
desired item to be custom-
ized.
3 Press or press and hold .
The available settings will differ
depending on if is pressed or
pressed and held. Follow the
instructions on the display.
■ Setting items
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.241)
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “Lane Center”
Select to enable/disable the lane
centering function.
• “Steering Assist”
Select to enable/disable steering
wheel assistance.
• “Sensitivity”
Select to set the warning sensitivity.
Settings display ( )
88
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
•“Sway Warning”
Select to enable/disable the vehicle
sway warning.
• “Sway Sensitivity”
Select to set the vehicle sway warn-
ing sensitivity.
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem) (P.233)
Press to enable/disable the
pre-collision system.
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
on/off
Select to enable/disable the
pre-collision system.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following item:
• “Sensitivity”
Select to change the pre-collision
warning timing.
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
(if equipped) (P.270)
Press to enable/disable the
Blind Spot Monitor function.
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) on/off
Select to enable/disable the Blind
Spot Monitor function.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “Brightness”
Select to switch the brightness of
the outside rear view mirror indica-
tors. (P.271)
• “Sensitivity”
Select to change the alert timing for
an approaching vehicle.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) (if equipped) (P.284)
Press to enable/disable the
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
on/off
Select to enable/disable the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert function.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following item:
•“Volume”
Select to change the volume of the
RCTA buzzer.
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.251)
Press to enable/disable the
Road Sign Assist.
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) on/off
Select to enable/disable the Road
Sign Assist.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “Notification Method”
Select to change each notification
method used to notify the driver
when the system recognizes
excess speed and no-entry sign.
• “Notification Level”
Select to change each notification
level used to notify the driver when
the system recognizes a speed limit
sign.
■ Vehicle settings
Press and hold to change
the settings of the following
89
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
items:
PBD (Power Back Door)
(if equipped)
*
(P.119)
• “System Settings”
Select to enable/disable the power
back door system.
• “Opening Adjustment”
Select the open position when
power back door is fully open.
•“Volume”
Select to set the volume of the
buzzer which sounds when the
power back door system operates.
*
: Vehicles with a power back door
(Stop & Start) (if
equipped) (P.264)
Select to set the length of time the
Stop & Start system will operate
when the “A/C” switch of the air
conditioning system is on.
“TPWS” (Tire Pressure Warn-
ing System) (P.414)
• “Set Pressure” (tire pressure
warning system initialization)
Select to initialize the tire pressure
warning system.
• “Change Wheel” (change the tire
pressure warning system sensor
ID code set)
Select to change the tire pressure
warning system sensor ID code set.
To enable this function, a second
set of tire pressure warning system
sensor ID codes must be registered
by a Toyota dealer. For information
regarding changing the registered
ID code set, contact your Toyota
dealer. (P.420)
• “Change Wheel” (register tire
pressure warning system sensor
ID codes)
Select to register the ID codes of
the tire pressure sensors to the tire
pressure warning system.
“Rear Seat Reminder”
(P.117)
Select to enable/disable the rear
seat reminder.
“Scheduled Maintenance”
(P.395)
Select to reset the scheduled main-
tenance information (maintenance
required message and distance
until maintenance necessary) after
all maintenance is performed.
“Oil Maintenance” (P.404)
Select to reset the oil maintenance
information (maintenance required
message and distance until mainte-
nance necessary) after an oil
change is performed.
■ Meter settings
Press and hold to change
the settings of the following
items:
Language
Select to change the language dis-
played.
Units
Select to change the units of mea-
sure displayed.
Eco Driving Indicator Light
(P.84)
Select to enable/disable the Eco
Driving Indicator Light.
90
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Fuel economy display
Select to change the average fuel
consumption display between after
start/after reset. (P.84)
Select to display/not display the
audio system linked display.
Select to change the displayed con-
tent of the following:
• Display contents
Select to display/not display the
AWD control (if equipped). (P. 87 )
• Drive information type
Select to change the drive informa-
tion type display between after
start/after reset.
• Drive information items
Select to set the first and second
items of the drive information dis-
play to any of the following: aver-
age vehicle
speed/distance/elapsed time.
Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up
displays for each relevant system.
Multi-information display off
Displays a blank screen.
Default setting
Select to reset the meter display
settings to the default setting.
■ Vehicle functions and set-
tings that can be changed
P.515
■ Suspension of the settings dis-
play
● Some settings cannot be changed
while driving. When changing set-
tings, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
● If a warning message is displayed,
operation of the settings display
will be suspended.
■ Pop-up displays
Depending on the pop-up display,
the currently displayed item in the
message display area may be tem-
porarily not displayed. The item will
be displayed after the pop-up dis-
play is no longer displayed.
Select to display warning mes-
sages and measures to be
taken if a malfunction is
detected. (P.460)
WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up
the display
As the engine needs to be run-
ning during setting up the display,
ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a place with adequate ventila-
tion. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including
harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while setting up the display fea-
tures.
Warning message display
()
91
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Displays suggestions to the
driver in the following situations.
To select a response to a dis-
played suggestion, use the
meter control switches.
■ Suggestion to turn off the
headlights
If the headlights are left on for a
certain amount of time after the
engine switch has been turned
off, if the headlight switch is in
the “AUTO” position, a sugges-
tion message will be displayed
asking if you wish to turn the
headlights off.
To turn the headlights off, select
“Yes”.
If the driver's door is opened after
the engine switch is turned off, this
suggestion message will not be dis-
played.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
■ Display
The multi-information display
presents the driver with a variety
of driving-related information.
Warning or suggestion/advice
pop-up displays are also dis-
played in certain situations.
■ Menu icons
Select a menu icon to display its
content.
Suggestion function Multi-information dis-
play (7-inch display)
Display and menu icons
Driving information display
(P. 9 2)
Driving support system
information display
(P. 9 5)
Audio system-linked dis-
play (P. 95 )
Vehicle information dis-
play (P. 95 )
Settings display (P.96)
Warning message display
(P.100)
92
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may
appear on the display. This phenom-
enon is characteristic of liquid crys-
tal displays, and there is no problem
continuing to use the display.
The multi-information display is
operated using the meter control
switches.
Scroll screens
*
, change the
displayed content
*
and move
the cursor
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset/Dis-
play customizable items
Return to the previous screen
Call sending/receiving and
history display
Linked with the hands-free system,
sending or receiving call is dis-
played. For details regarding the
hands-free system, refer to the
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
: On screens where the screen can
be scrolled and the display can
be switched, a scroll bar or a
round icon that shows the num-
ber of registered screens is dis-
played.
■ Fuel economy
Use the displayed values as a ref-
erence only.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the instantaneous current
fuel consumption.
Average fuel economy (after
start)
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption since engine start.
*1
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-infor-
mation display while driving,
pay extra attention to the safety
of the area around the vehicle.
● Do not look continuously at the
multi-information display while
driving as you may fail to see
pedestrians, objects on the
road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
■ The information display at
low temperatures
P.8 0
Changing the meter dis-
play
Driving information dis-
play ( )
93
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Driving range
Displays the driving range with
remaining fuel.
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven with
the remaining fuel cannot be calcu-
lated.
Refuel immediately.
Gadget
*2
The following items can be dis-
played by changing the settings for
gadget content and fuel economy
type on . (P. 96 )
•Other
Blank: No item
• Average vehicle speed
After start: Displays average vehi-
cle speed since engine start
After reset: Displays average vehi-
cle speed since the display was
reset
*3
• Distance
After start: Displays the distance
driven since vehicle start.
After reset: Displays the distance
driven since the display was reset
*3
• Elapsed time
After start: Displays elapsed time
since engine start
After reset: Displays elapsed time
since the display was reset
*3
Average fuel economy
Displayed item (listed below) can
be changed on the fuel economy
type screen of . (P. 96 )
Total (after reset)
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption since the display was
reset.
*1, 3
Tank (after refuel)
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption since the vehicle was
refueled.
*1
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
*1
:Use the displayed fuel consump-
tion as a reference only.
*2
:The default setting is no display.
*3
:This display can be reset by
pressing and holding while it
is displayed.
■ Eco Driving Indicator/Driv-
ing range
Eco Driving Indicator
94
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration
(Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indi-
cator Light will turn on. When the
acceleration exceeds the Zone of
Eco driving, or when the vehicle is
stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving
with current Eco driving ratio based
on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the
Zone of Eco driving, the right side
of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display will illuminate.
Zone of Eco driving
Driving range
Displays driving range with remain-
ing fuel. Use the displayed values
as a reference only.
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven with
the remaining fuel cannot be calcu-
lated.
Refuel immediately.
■ Speedometer display (digi-
tal speed)/Driving range
Speedometer display (digital
speed)
P. 99
Driving range
Displays driving range with remain-
ing fuel. Use the displayed values
as a reference only.
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine
switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the engine switch
off, the display may not be updated.
95
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
When “Refuel” is displayed, the
remaining fuel amount is low and
the distance that can be driven with
the remaining fuel cannot be calcu-
lated.
Refuel immediately.
■ Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator will not oper-
ate under the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position
other than D.
● The driving mode is set to sport
mode.
● The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 80 mph (130 km/h) or
higher.
■ Driving support system
information
Select to display the operational
status of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.241)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.251)
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
(P.254)
■ Navigation system-linked
display (if equipped)
Select to display the following
navigation system-linked infor-
mation:
Route guidance to destination
Compass display (head-
ing-up display)
■ Route guidance to destination
display
When the route guidance to destina-
tion display is enabled on the
head-up display, it will not be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play. (P.103)
Select to enable selection of an
audio source or track on the
meter using the meter control
switches.
This menu icon can be set to be
displayed/not displayed in .
■ Tire pressure
P.414
■ AWD Control (if equipped)
Torque distribution display
Displays the drive status of each
wheel in 6 steps from 0 to 5.
G-force display
*
Displays the size and direction of
the G-force applied to the vehicle
Driving support system
information display ( )
Audio system-linked dis-
play ( )
Vehicle information dis-
play ( )
96
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
via changes to the position of the
ball on the display.
Maximum G-force course
*
This item is linked with the G-force
display and the course of the past
movement of the ball is displayed.
Press and hold to reset the
record.
Wheel spin display
When a tire is spinning, its icon on
the display changes its color and
blinks.
*
: This item is displayed only when
driving mode is set to sport mode.
■ Safety system status
Enable/Disable the following
systems:
PCS (Pre-Collision system)
(P.233)
Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped) (P.276)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if
equipped) (P.270)
RCTA (Rear Crossing Traffic
Alert) (if equipped) (P.284)
■ Tire pressure
• It may take a few minutes to dis-
play the tire inflation pressure
after the engine switch is turned to
ON. It may also take a few min-
utes to display the tire inflation
pressure after inflation pressure
has been adjusted.
• “---” may be displayed if the tire
position information cannot be
determined due to unfavorable
radio wave conditions.
• Tire inflation pressure changes
with temperature. The displayed
values may also be different from
the values measured using a tire
pressure gauge.
■ Changing settings
Use the meter control switches
on the steering wheel to change
settings.
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch to select the
desired item to be custom-
ized.
3 Press or press and hold .
The available settings will differ
depending on if is pressed or
pressed and held. Follow the
instructions on the display.
■ Setting items
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.241)
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “Lane Center”
Select to enable/disable the lane
centering function.
• “Steering Assist”
Select to enable/disable steering
wheel assistance.
• “Sensitivity”
Select to set the warning sensitivity.
•“Sway Warning”
Select to enable/disable the vehicle
sway warning.
Settings display ( )
97
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
• “Sway Sensitivity”
Select to set the vehicle sway warn-
ing sensitivity.
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem) (P.233)
Press to enable/disable the
pre-collision system.
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
on/off
Select to enable/disable the
pre-collision system.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following item:
• “Sensitivity”
Select to change the pre-collision
warning timing.
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
(if equipped) (P.270)
Press to enable/disable the
Blind Spot Monitor function.
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) on/off
Select to enable/disable the Blind
Spot Monitor function.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “Brightness”
Select to switch the brightness of
the outside rear view mirror indica-
tors. (P.271)
• “Sensitivity”
Select to change the alert timing for
an approaching vehicle.
Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped) (P.276)
Press to enable/disable the
Intuitive parking assist.
• Intuitive parking assist on/off
Select to enable/disable the Intui-
tive parking assist.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following item:
•“Volume”
Select to set the volume of the
buzzer which sounds when the
Intuitive parking assist is operated.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) (if equipped) (P.284)
Press to enable/disable the
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
on/off
Select to enable/disable the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert function.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following item:
•“Volume”
Select to change the volume of the
RCTA buzzer.
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) (if equipped) (P.289)
Press to enable/disable the
Parking Support Brake function.
HUD (Head-up display) (if
equipped) (P.101)
Press to enable/disable the
head-up display.
• HUD (Head-up display) on/off
Select to enable/disable the
head-up display.
98
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “HUD Brightness/Position”
Select to adjust the brightness/posi-
tion of the head-up display.
• “HUD Driving Support”
Select to change the displayed
head-up display driving support
item.
• “HUD Rotation”
Select to adjust the angle of the
head-up display.
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.251)
Press to enable/disable the
Road Sign Assist.
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) on/off
Select to enable/disable the Road
Sign Assist.
Press and hold to change the
settings of the following items:
• “Notification Method”
Select to change each notification
method used to notify the driver
when the system recognizes
excess speed and no-entry sign.
• “Notification Level”
Select to change each notification
level used to notify the driver when
the system recognizes a speed limit
sign.
■ Vehicle settings
Press and hold to change
the settings of the following
items:
PBD (Power Back Door)
(P.119)
• “System Settings”
Select to enable/disable the power
back door system.
• “Kick Sensor”
*
Select to enable/disable the kick
sensor.
• “Opening Adjustment”
Select the open position when
power back door is fully open.
•“Volume”
Select to set the volume of the
buzzer which sounds when the
power back door system operates.
*
: Vehicles with a hands free power
back door
(Stop & Start) (if
equipped) (P.264)
Select to set the length of time the
Stop & Start system will operate
when the “A/C” switch of the air
conditioning system is on.
“TPWS” (Tire Pressure Warn-
ing System) (P.414)
• “Set Pressure” (tire pressure
warning system initialization)
Select to initialize the tire pressure
warning system.
• “Change Wheel” (change the tire
pressure warning system sensor
ID code set)
Select to change the tire pressure
warning system sensor ID code set.
To enable this function, a second
set of tire pressure warning system
sensor ID codes must be registered
by a Toyota dealer. For information
regarding changing the registered
ID code set, contact your Toyota
99
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
dealer. (P.420)
• “Change Wheel” (register tire
pressure warning system sensor
ID codes)
Select to register the ID codes of
the tire pressure sensors to the tire
pressure warning system.
“Rear Seat Reminder”
(P.11 7)
Select to enable/disable the rear
seat reminder.
“Scheduled Maintenance”
(P.395)
Select to reset the scheduled main-
tenance information (maintenance
required message and distance
until maintenance necessary) after
all maintenance is performed.
“Oil Maintenance” (P.404)
Select to reset the oil maintenance
information (maintenance required
message and distance until mainte-
nance necessary) after an oil
change is performed.
■ Meter settings
Press and hold to change
the settings of the following
items:
Language
Select to change the language dis-
played.
Units
Select to change the units of mea-
sure displayed.
Eco Driving Indicator Light
(P.93)
Select to enable/disable the Eco
Driving Indicator Light.
Speedometer display (digital
speed)
Select to enable/disable the speed-
ometer display.
Gadget content
Select to turn the display of a gad-
get.
Fuel economy type
Select to change the average fuel
consumption display and an item to
be displayed as gadget.
Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up
displays for each relevant system.
Multi-information display off
Displays a blank screen.
Default setting
Select to reset the meter display
settings to the default setting.
■ Vehicle functions and set-
tings that can be changed
P.515
■ Background color of the indica-
tor/shift position display area
The background color of the indica-
tor/shift position display area is
changed according to the driving
mode as follows (P.306):
● Eco drive mode: Blue
● Sport mode: Red
■ Suspension of the settings dis-
play
● Some settings cannot be changed
while driving. When changing set-
tings, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
● If a warning message is displayed,
100
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
operation of the settings display
will be suspended.
■ Pop-up displays
Depending on the pop-up display,
the currently displayed item in the
message display area may be tem-
porarily not displayed. The item will
be displayed after the pop-up dis-
play is no longer displayed.
Select to display warning mes-
sages and measures to be
taken if a malfunction is
detected. (P.460)
Displays suggestions to the
driver in the following situations.
To select a response to a dis-
played suggestion, use the
meter control switches.
■ Suggestion to turn off the
headlights
If the headlights are left on for a
certain amount of time after the
engine switch has been turned
off, if the headlight switch is in
the “AUTO” position, a sugges-
tion message will be displayed
asking if you wish to turn the
headlights off.
To turn the headlights off, select
“Yes”.
If the driver's door is opened after
the engine switch is turned off, this
suggestion message will not be dis-
played.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up
the display
As the engine needs to be run-
ning during setting up the display,
ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a place with adequate ventila-
tion. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including
harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while setting up the display fea-
tures.
Warning message display
()
Suggestion function
101
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
*
: If equipped
Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from
the image that is actually displayed by the head-up display.
Shift position display (P.204)
Speed limit/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area
Displays the following items:
• Speed limit of the current road (linked to the navigation system) (U.S.A.
only)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) display (if equipped) (P.251)
Vehicle speed display area
Eco Driving Indicator/Tachometer/Outside temperature (P.104)
Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped) (P.104)
Displays the following items, which are linked to the navigation system:
• Route guidance to destination
• Street name
• Compass (heading-up display)
Driving assist system status display area (P.105)
Head-up display
*
The head-up display is linked to the meters and navigation
system (if equipped) and projects a variety of information in
front of the driver, such as the current vehicle speed and route
guidance to a set destination.
System components
102
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Message display area (P.105)
The following pop-up displays will be displayed in certain situations:
• Warning/message
• Hands-free system status
• Audio system operation status
■ Head-up display will operate
when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ When using the head-up dis-
play
The head-up display may seem
dark or hard to see when viewed
through sunglasses, especially
polarized sunglasses. Adjust the
brightness of the head-up display or
remove your sunglasses.
■ Outside temperature display
If the outside temperature becomes
approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower,
the low outside temperature indica-
tor will flash for 10 seconds then the
low outside temperature indicator
and outside temperature display will
turn off. The low outside tempera-
ture indicator will operate again if
the outside temperature becomes
approximately 41°F (5°C) or more
and then decreases to 37°F (3°C) or
lower.
■ Changing settings of the
head-up display
Select on the multi-informa-
WARNING
■ Before using the head-up dis-
play
● Check that the position and
brightness of the head-up dis-
play image does not interfere
with safe driving. Incorrect
adjustment of the image’s posi-
tion or brightness may obstruct
the driver’s view and lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not continuously look at the
head-up display while driving as
you may fail to see pedestrians,
objects on the road, etc. ahead
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to compo-
nents
● Do not place any drinks near
the head-up display projector. If
the projector gets wet, electrical
malfunctions may result.
● Do not place anything on or put
stickers onto the head-up dis-
play projector. Doing so could
interrupt head-up display indica-
tions.
● Do not touch the inside of the
head-up display projector or
thrust sharp edges or the like
into the projector. Doing so
could cause mechanical mal-
functions.
Using the head-up display
103
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
tion display (P.515) and then
.
■ Enabling/disabling the
head-up display
Press to enable/disable the
head-up display.
■ Changing the head-up dis-
play settings
Press and hold to display the
following settings.
“HUD Brightness/Position”
Select to adjust the brightness and
vertical position of the head-up dis-
play.
“HUD Driving Support”
• Tachometer Settings
Blank/Eco Indicator/Tachometer
Select to change the display to
blank (no display)/Eco Driving Indi-
cator/tachometer.
Select to enable/disable the follow-
ing items:
• Navigation (if equipped)
• Driving Assist
• Compass (if equipped)
• Audio
“HUD Rotation”
Select to adjust the angle of the
head-up display.
Press the or switch to
adjust the angle of the head-up dis-
play.
■ Enabling/disabling of the
head-up display
If the head-up display is disabled, it
will remain disabled when the
engine switch is turned off then back
to ON.
■ Display brightness
The brightness of the head-up dis-
play can be adjusted on of the
multi-information display. Also, it is
automatically adjusted according to
the ambient brightness.
■ Automatic adjustment of the
head-up display position (vehi-
cles with driving position mem-
ory)
A desired head-up display position
can be entered to memory and
recalled automatically by the driving
position memory system. (P.144)
■ When the battery is discon-
nected
The customize settings of the
head-up display will be reset.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
WARNING
■ Caution for changing settings
of the head-up display
As the engine needs to be run-
ning while changing the settings
of the head-up display, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a
place with adequate ventilation. In
a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful
carbon monoxide (CO) may col-
lect and enter the vehicle. This
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
104
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Zone
Display
Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration
Zone of Eco driving
Displayed content is the same as
that displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display (Eco Driving Indicator).
For details, refer to P.93.
■ Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
■ Outside temperature
Displayed in the following situa-
tions:
When the engine switch is
turned to ON (Displayed for
approximately 10 seconds)
When the low outside tem-
perature indicator is flashing
Displayed content is the same
as that displayed on the
multi-information display. For
details, refer to the explanation
of the outside temperature dis-
play on the multi-information
display. (P.80)
Displays the following naviga-
tion system linked items:
(Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.)
■ Route guidance to destina-
tion
Displayed when the navigation
system is performing route guid-
ance. When approaching an
intersection, an arrow indicating
the suggested direction of travel
will be displayed.
■ Street name
Depending on the situation, the
names of the streets of an
approaching intersection will be
displayed.
■ Compass (heading-up dis-
play)
Displays the direction of travel.
NOTICE
■ When changing the settings
of the head-up display
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while the changing the settings of
the head-up display.
Eco Driving Indica-
tor/Tachometer/Outside
temperature
Navigation system-linked
display area (if equipped)
105
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Street name display (vehicles
with a navigation system)
Depending on the situation, such as
when no information is available in
map data, etc., the street names of
an intersection may not be dis-
played.
Displays the operational status
of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(P.241)
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
(P.254)
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(P.233)
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (for static objects) (if
equipped) (P.296)
Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped) (P.276)
Drive-Start Control (P.178)
Brake Override System
(P.178)
Displayed content is the same as
that displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. For details, refer to the
explanations of each system.
Displays the following
multi-information display linked
icons and a message:
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning mes-
sage is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.460)
: Information icon
Displayed when a sugges-
tion/advice pop-up display is dis-
played on the multi-information
display. (P.91, 100)
Depending on the situation, the
following will be displayed:
■ Warning/Message
Depending on the situation, a
warning message or other mes-
sage will be displayed.
Warning messages
Certain warning messages can be
displayed.
Pop-up displays
When the driving assist system
operates, some of the information
displayed on the multi-information
display will be displayed on the
head-up display as a pop-up dis-
play.
■ Hands-free system status
Displayed when the hands-free
system is operated.
(Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.)
■ Audio system operation
status
Displayed when the audio sys-
Driving assist system sta-
tus display area
/ icons
Message display area
106
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
tem is operated.
(Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.)
■ Pop-up displays
Depending on the pop-up display,
the currently displayed item in the
message display area may be tem-
porarily not displayed. The item will
be displayed after the pop-up dis-
play is no longer displayed.
Audio system screen
■ Trip information
Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles
without Data Communication
Module)
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
If a screen other than “Trip Informa-
tion” is displayed, select “Trip Infor-
mation”.
Fuel consumption
information
Fuel consumption informa-
tion can be displayed on the
audio system screen.
Vehicles with a 12.3-inch
display: The fuel consump-
tion information can be dis-
played and operated on the
Toyota multi-operation
touch.
System components
Consumption
107
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Audio Plus (vehicles with
Data Communication Mod-
ule) or Premium Audio
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “ECO” on the “Infor-
mation” screen.
If a screen other than “Trip Informa-
tion” is displayed, select “Trip Infor-
mation”.
12.3-inch display
1 Select Toyota multi-oper-
ation touch (P.326).
2 Select “TripInfo.”.
The screen position can also be
changed by select a desired infor-
mation in full screen.
Resetting the consumption
data
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Current fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed since
the engine was started.
Elapsed time since the
engine was started.
Cruising range
The average fuel consumption
history is divided by color into
past averages and the average
fuel consumption since the last
updated. Use the displayed
average fuel consumption as a
reference.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
■ History
Audio or Audio Plus (vehicles
without Data Communication
Module)
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
If a screen other than “History” is
displayed, select “History”.
Audio Plus (vehicles with
Data Communication Mod-
ule) or Premium Audio
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “ECO” on the “Infor-
mation” screen.
If a screen other than “History” is
displayed, select “History”.
12.3-inch display
1 Select Toyota multi-oper-
ation touch (P.326).
2 Select “History”.
The screen position can also be
changed by select a desired infor-
mation in full screen.
108
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
Best recorded fuel consump-
tion
Latest fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption
record
Resetting the history data
Updating the latest fuel con-
sumption data
The average fuel consumption
history is divided by color into
past averages and the average
fuel consumption since the last
updated. Use the displayed
average fuel consumption as a
reference.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
■ Updating the history data
Update the latest fuel consumption
by selecting “Update” to measure
the current fuel consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be
deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum
distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on
your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that
can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
Display the vehicle information
on the Toyota multi-operation
touch (P.326), and then select
the button to display the desired
screen.
The image is an example only,
and may vary slightly from
actual conditions.
Trip information
History
■ Trip information
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption for the past 10 min-
utes in 1 minute intervals, as
well as the cruising range.
Using the Toyota
multi-operation touch
(vehicles with a 12.3-inch
display)
109
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
■ History
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption and highest fuel con-
sumption.
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
110
2-1. Instrument cluster
HIGHLANDER_U
111
HIGHLANDER_U
3
3
Before driving
Before driving
.
3-1. Key information
Keys............................ 112
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Side doors................... 115
Back door.................... 119
Smart key system ....... 131
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.................. 138
Rear seats................... 139
Driving position memory
.................................. 144
Head restraints............ 147
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel............ 150
Inside rear view mirror
.................................. 151
Digital Rearview Mirror
.................................. 152
Outside rear view mirrors
.................................. 162
3-5. Opening, closing the win-
dows and moon roof
Power windows........... 164
Moon roof.................... 167
Panoramic moon roof.. 170
112
3-1. Key information
HIGHLANDER_U
3-1.Key information
The following keys are provided
with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key system
(P.131)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function (P.11 3)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key
onto an aircraft, make sure you do
not press any buttons on the elec-
tronic key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying an elec-
tronic key in your bag, etc., ensure
that the buttons are not likely to be
pressed accidentally. Pressing a
button may cause the electronic key
to emit radio waves that could inter-
fere with the operation of the air-
craft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2
years.
● If the battery becomes low, an
alarm will sound in the cabin wh
en
th
e engine is stopped.
● To reduce key battery depletion
whe
n the electronic key is to not
be used for long periods of time,
set the electronic key to the bat-
tery-saving mode. (P.132)
● As the electronic key always
r
eceives radio waves, the battery
will become depleted even
if the
e
lectronic key is not used. The fol-
lowing symptoms indicate that the
electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary.
• The smart key system or the wire-
less remote control does not oper-
ate.
• The detection area become
s
smaller
.
• The LED indicator on the key sur-
face does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do
not leave the electron
ic key within
3
ft. (1 m) of the following electri-
cal appliances that produce
a
ma
gnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones
and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phon
es or
cor
dless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■ Replacing the battery
P.428
■ Confirmation of the registered
k
ey number
The number of keys already regis-
tered to the vehicle can be con-
firmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for
details.
■ If “A New Key has been Regis-
tered Contact Your Dealer f
or
Details” is
show
n on the
mul
ti-information display
This message will be displayed
each time the driver’s door is
opened when the doors are
unlocked from the outside for
approximately 10 days after a new
electronic key has been registered.
Keys
The keys
113
3-1. Key information
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
If this message is displayed but you
have not had a new electronic key
registered, ask your Toyota dealer to
check if an unknown electronic key
(other than those in your posses-
sion) has been registered.
The electronic keys are
equipped with the following
wireless remote control:
Locks the doors (P.115)
Unlocks the doors (P.115)
Opens the windows
*1
and
moon roof
*1, 2
(P.115)
Opens and closes the power
back door
*2
(P.122)
Sounds the alarm
*1
:These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject
them to strong shocks or bend
them.
● Do not expose the keys to high
temperatures for long periods of
time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash
them in an ultrasonic washer,
etc.
● Do not attach metallic or mag-
netic materials to the keys or
place the keys close to such
materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or any-
thing else to the surface of the
electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near
objects that produce magnetic
fields, such as TVs, audio sys-
tems and induction cookers.
● Do not place the keys near
medical electrical equipment
such as low-frequency therapy
equipment or microwave ther-
apy equipment, and do not
receive medical attention with
the keys on your person.
■ Carrying the electronic key
on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in.
(10 cm) or more away from elec-
tric appliances that are turned on.
Radio waves emitted from electric
appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere
with the key, causing the key to
not function properly.
■ In case of a smart key system
malfunction or other
key-related problems
P. 48 1
■ When an electronic key is lost
P. 47 9
Wireless remote control
114
3-1. Key information
HIGHLANDER_U
*2
:If equipped
■ Theft deterrent panic mode
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm
will sound intermittently and the
vehicle lights will flash to deter any
person from trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button
on the electronic key.
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release button and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cyl-
inder, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P.481)
■ When required to leave the
vehicle’s key with a parking
a
ttendant
Lock the glove box as circum-
stances demand. (P.359)
Remove the mechanical key for
your own use and provide the atten-
dant with the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical
keys
P.479
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely, iso-
lated from the internal mechanism.
Using the mechanical key
115
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Smart key system
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
1 Grip the driver’s door handle
to unlock the door. Holding
the driver’s door handle for
approximately 2 seconds
unlocks all the doors. Grip
the front passenger’s door
handle to unlock all the
doors.
*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
*
: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P.115, 515)
2 Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the upper part
of the front door handle) to
lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely
locked.
■ Wireless remote control
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Press and hold to open the win-
dows
*1
and moon roof
*1, 2
*1
:This setting must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.
*2
:If equipped
■ Switching the door unlock func-
tion
It is possible to set which doors the
entry function unlocks using the
wireless remote control.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 When the indicator light on the
key surface is not on, press and
hold , or for
approximately 5 seconds while
pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an
operation is performed, as shown
below. (When changing the setting
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked
and unlocked using the
entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock
switches.
Unlocking and locking the
doors from the outside
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
continuously, release the buttons,
wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2.)
For vehicles with an alarm: To pre-
vent unintended triggering of the
alarm, unlock the doors using the
wireless remote control and open
and close a door once after the set-
tings have been changed. (If a door
is not opened within 60 seconds
after is pressed, the doors will
be locked again and the alarm will
automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered,
immediately stop the alarm. (P.7 1)
■ Impact detection door lock
release system
In the event that the vehicle is sub-
ject to a strong impact, all the doors
are unlocked. Depending on the
force of the impact or the type of
accident, however, the system may
not operate.
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emer-
gency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been
locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once;
Unlocked: Twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the
windows and the moon roof
*
or pan-
oramic moon roof
*
are operating.
*
: If equipped
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within
approximately 60 seconds after the
vehicle is unlocked, the security fea-
ture automatically locks the vehicle
again.
■ When the door cannot be
locked by the lock sensor on
the surface of the front door
handle
If the door will not lock even when
the topside sensor area is touched,
try touching both the topside and
underside sensor areas at the same
time.
When gloves are being worn,
remove the gloves.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors using
the smart key system is made when
a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
will sound continuously for 5 sec-
onds. Fully close the door to stop
the buzzer, and lock the doors
again.
■ Setting the alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors will set the alarm
system. (P. 71 )
Multi-informa-
tion display/Beep
Unlocking func-
tion
Exterior: Beeps 3
times
Interior: Pings
once
Holding the
driver’s door
handle unlocks
only the driver’s
door.
Holding the front
passenger’s
door handle
unlocks all the
doors.
Exterior: Beeps
twice
Interior: Pings
once
Holding either
front door handle
unlocks all the
doors.
117
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Conditions affecting the opera-
tion of the smart key system or
wireless remote control
P. 13 2
■ If the smart key system or the
wireless remote control does
not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and
unlock the doors. (P.481)
Replace the key battery with a new
one if it is depleted. (P.428)
■ If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked and
unlocked using the smart key sys-
tem or wireless remote control. Lock
or unlock the doors using the
mechanical key. (P.481)
■ Rear seat reminder function
In order to remind you not to forget
luggage, etc. in the rear seat, when
the engine switch is turned off after
any of the following conditions are
met, a buzzer will sound and a mes-
sage will be displayed on the
multi-information display for approx-
imately 6 seconds.
● The engine is started within 10
minutes after opening and closing
a rear door.
● A rear door has been opened and
closed after the engine was
started.
However, if a rear door is opened
and then closed within approxi-
mately 2 seconds, the rear seat
reminder function may not operate.
The rear seat reminder function
determines that luggage, etc. has
been placed in a rear seat based on
opening and closing of a rear door.
Therefore, depending on the situa-
tion, the rear seat reminder function
may not operate and you may still
forget luggage, etc. in the rear seat,
or it may operate unnecessarily.
The rear seat reminder function can
be enabled/disabled. (P.515)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions
while driving the vehicle. Failure
to do so may result in a door
opening and an occupant falling
out, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Ensure that all doors are prop-
erly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of
the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front
doors, as the doors may be
opened even if the inside lock but-
tons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector
locks when children are seated
in the rear seats.
■ When opening or closing a
door
Check the surroundings of the
vehicle such as whether the vehi-
cle is on an incline, whether there
is enough space for a door to
open and whether a strong wind
is blowing. When opening or clos-
ing the door, hold the door handle
tightly to prepare for any unpre-
dictable movement.
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Door lock switches
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
■ Inside lock buttons
1 Locks the door
2 Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
■ Locking the front doors from
the outside without a key
1 Move the inside lock button to
the lock position.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the
engine switch is in ACC or ON, or
the electronic key is left inside the
vehicle.
The key may not be detected cor-
rectly and the door may be locked.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If a door or the hood is not fully
closed, a buzzer will sound when
the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5
km/h).
The open door(s) or hood is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
The door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set.
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
The following functions can be
set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing,
refer to P.515.
Unlocking and locking the
doors from the inside
Rear door child-protector
lock
Automatic door locking
and unlocking systems
119
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
Function Operation
Speed linked
door locking
function
All doors are auto-
matically locked
when vehicle
speed is approxi-
mately 12 mph (20
km/h) or higher.
Shift position
linked door
locking func-
tion
All doors are auto-
matically locked
when shifting the
shift lever out of P.
Shift position
linked door
unlocking
function
All doors are auto-
matically unlocked
when shifting the
shift lever to P.
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking
function
All doors are auto-
matically unlocked
when driver’s door
is opened.
Back door
The back door can be
locked/unlocked and
opened/closed by the fol-
lowing procedures.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Before driving the vehicle, make
sure that the back door is fully
closed. If the back door is not fully
closed, it may open unexpectedly
while driving, causing an acci-
dent.
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the back door closed
while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may
hit near-by objects while driving or
luggage may be unexpectedly
thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may
enter the vehicle, causing death
or a serious health hazard. Make
sure to close the back door before
driving.
● Never let anyone sit in the lug-
gage compartment. In the event
of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or a collision, they are
susceptible to death or serious
injury.
■ When children are in the vehi-
cle
● Do not allow children to play in
the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment, they
could have heat exhaustion or
other injuries.
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Do not allow a child to open or
close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back
door to move unexpectedly, or
cause the child’s hands, arms,
head, or neck to be caught by the
closing back door.
■ Operating the back door
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may cause
parts of the body to be caught,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such
as snow and ice, from the back
door before opening it. Failure
to do so may cause the back
door to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the
back door, thoroughly check to
make sure the surrounding area
is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make
sure they are safe and let them
know that the back door is
about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or
closing the back door in windy
weather as it may move
abruptly in strong wind.
● Vehicles without a power back
door: The back door may sud-
denly shut if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the back door on an
incline than on a level surface,
so beware of the back door
unexpectedly opening or closing
by itself. Make sure that the
back door is fully open and
secure before using the luggage
compartment.
● Vehicles with a power back
door: The back door may sud-
denly shut if it is not opened
fully while on a steep incline.
Make sure that the back door is
secured before using the lug-
gage compartment.
● When closing the back door,
take extra care to prevent your
fingers, etc., from being caught.
● When closing the back door,
make sure to press it lightly on
its outer surface. If the back
door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may
result in hands or arms being
caught.
121
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Smart key system
Carry the electronic key to
enable this function.
1 Unlocks all the doors
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
2 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
■ Wireless remote control
P.115
■ Operation signals
P.116
■ Door lock switches
P.118
■ Opening the back door
Raise the back door while push-
ing up the back door opener
switch.
■ Closing the back door
Lower the back door using a
back door handle, and then
push the back door from the out-
side to close it.
WARNING
● Do not pull on the back door
damper stay (vehicles without a
power back door) (P.122) or
back door spindle (vehicles with
a power back door) (P.128) to
close the back door, and do not
hang on the back door damper
stay (vehicles without a power
back door) or back door spindle
(vehicles with a power back
door).
Doing so may cause hands to be
caught or the back door damper
stay (vehicles without a power
back door) or back door spindle
(vehicles with a power back door)
to break, causing an accident.
● If a heavy object is attached to
the back door, it may suddenly
shut again after being opened,
causing someone’s hands,
arms, head or neck to be caught
and injured. Do not attach any
accessories other than genuine
Toyota parts to the back door.
Unlocking and locking the
back door from the out-
side
Unlocking and locking the
back door from the inside
Opening/closing the back
door (vehicles without a
power back door)
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
Be careful not to pull the back
door sideways when using a
handle.
■ Open door warning buzzer
P. 11 8
■ Opening/closing the back
door using the wireless
remote control
Press and hold the switch.
Pressing the switch while the back
door is opening/closing will stop the
operation. Pressing and holding the
switch again will operate the back
door in the opposite direction.
■ Opening/closing the back
door using the power back
door switch on the instru-
ment panel
Press and hold the switch.
Unlock the back door before oper-
ating.
Pressing the switch while the back
door is opening/closing will stop the
operation. Pressing and holding the
switch again will operate the back
door in the opposite direction.
NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with
damper stays that hold the back
door in place.
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may cause
damage to the back door damper
stay, resulting in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign
objects, such as stickers, plastic
sheets, or adhesives to the
damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay
rod with gloves or other fabric
items.
● Do not attach any accessories
other than genuine Toyota parts
to the back door.
● Do not place your hand on the
damper stay or apply lateral
forces to it.
Opening/closing the back
door (vehicles with a
power back door)
123
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Opening the back door
using the back door opener
switch
When the back door is
unlocked: Press the back door
opener switch.
When the back door is locked:
While carrying the electronic key
on your person, press the back
door opener switch.
Pressing the switch while the back
door is opening/closing will stop the
operation. Pressing the switch
again will open the back door.
■ Opening/closing the back
door using the power back
door switch on the back
door
Press the switch.
Pressing the switch while the back
door is opening/closing will stop the
operation. Pressing the switch
again will operate the back door in
the opposite direction.
■ Closing the back door
using the back door handle
Lower the back door using the
back door handle, then a buzzer
sounds and the back door auto-
matically closes.
■ Opening/closing the back
door using the kick sensor
(vehicles with a Hands Free
Power Back Door)
The Hands Free Power Back
Door enables automatic opening
and closing of the power back
door by putting your foot near
the lower center part of the rear
bumper and moving it away
from the rear bumper.
1 While carrying an electronic
key, stand within the smart
key system operation range,
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
approximately 13.8 to 21.7 in.
(35 to 55 cm) from the rear
bumper.
Kick sensor
Hands Free Power Back
Door operation detection
area
Smart key system operation
detection area (P.131)
2 Perform a kick operation by
moving your foot to within
approximately 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the rear bumper and then
pulling it back.
• Perform the entire kick opera-
tion within 1 second.
• The back door will not start
operating while a foot is
detected under the rear
bumper.
• Operate the Hands Free
Power Back Door without
contacting the rear bumper
with your foot.
• If another electronic key is in
the cabin or luggage compart-
ment, it may take slightly lon-
ger than normal for the
operation to occur.
Kick sensor
Hands Free Power Back
Door operation detection
area
3 When the sensor detects that
your foot is pulled back, a
buzzer will sound and the
back door will automatically
fully open/close.
If kick operation is performed while
the back door is opening/closing,
the back door will stop the opera-
tion. Perform a kick operation again
will operate the back door in the
opposite direction.
■ Back door closer
In the event that the back door is left
slightly open, the back door closer
will automatically close it to the fully
closed position.
● The back door closer can function
when the engine switch is in any
mode.
● The back door can be opened
using the back door opener switch
even if the back door closer is
operating.
■ Power back door operating con-
ditions
If the following conditions are met,
the power back door can be opened
and closed automatically.
● When the power back door sys-
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
tem is enabled. (P.515)
● When the engine switch is in ON,
one of the following conditions
must be met in addition to the
above conditions:
• The parking brake is engaged.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• The shift lever is in P.
■ Operation of the power back
door
● When the power back door begins
to operate, the emergency flash-
ers will flash twice and a buzzer
will sound.
● When the power back door is dis-
abled, the power back door will
not operate but can be opened
and closed manually.
● When the power back door is
opening/closing, if the power back
door becomes obstructed, opera-
tion will stop.
■ Jam protection function
Sensors are installed on the right
and left sides of the power back
door. When the door is automati-
cally closing and the sensors are
pushed due to an object being
clamped, etc., the jam protection
function operates.
From that position the door auto-
matically moves a little in the oppo-
site direction and then the function
stops.
■ Back door reserve lock function
This function reserves the locking of
the power back door when the
power back door is open. If the fol-
lowing operations are performed, all
of the doors except the power back
door will lock and then the power
back door will lock when it is com-
pletely closed.
1 Close all of the doors, except the
back door.
2 Perform an automatic closing
operation of the power back door
and lock the doors using the
wireless remote control (P.11 5)
or smart key system (P. 11 5 )
while the power back door is
closing.
A buzzer sounds and the emer-
gency flashers flash to indicate that
all the doors have been closed and
locked.
● If the electronic key is placed
inside the vehicle after starting a
close operation via the door
reserve lock function, the elec-
tronic key may become locked
inside the vehicle.
● If the back door does not fully
close due to the operation of the
jam protection function, etc., while
the back door is automatically
closing after a door reserve lock
operation is performed, the door
reserve lock function is canceled
and all the doors will unlock.
● Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that all the doors are closed
and locked.
■ Kick sensor operating condi-
tions (vehicles with a Hands
Free Power Back Door)
● When the kick sensor operation
setting is turned on (P.515) and
the engine switch is turned off.
● When an electronic key is carried
within the operation detection
area.
■ Situations in which the Hands
Free Power Back Door may not
operate properly (if equipped)
In the following situations, the
Hands Free Power Back Door may
not operate properly:
● When a foot remains under the
rear bumper.
126
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
● If the rear bumper is strongly hit
with a foot or is touched for a
while.
If the rear bumper has been touched
for a while, wait for a short time
before attempting to operate the
Hands Free Power Back Door
again.
● When standing excessively close
to the rear bumper.
● When an external radio wave
source interferes with the commu-
nication between the electronic
key and the vehicle. (P.132)
● When the vehicle is parked near
an electrical noise source which
affects the sensitivity of the Hands
Free Power Back Door, such as a
pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluo-
rescent light.
● When the vehicle is near a TV
tower, electric power plant, radio
station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong
radio waves or electrical noise.
● When a large amount of water is
applied to the rear bumper, such
as when the vehicle is being
washed or in heavy rain.
● When mud, snow, ice, etc. is
attached to the rear bumper.
● When the vehicle has been
parked for a while near objects
that may move and contact the
rear bumper, such as plants.
● When an accessory is installed to
the rear bumper.
If an accessory has been installed,
turn the kick sensor operation set-
ting off. (P.515)
■ Preventing unintentional opera-
tion of the Hands Free Power
Back Door (if equipped)
When an electronic key is in the
operation detection area, the Hands
Free Power Back Door may operate
unintentionally, so be careful in the
following situations:
● When a large amount of water is
applied to the rear bumper, such
as when the vehicle is being
washed or in heavy rain.
● When dirt is wiped off the rear
bumper.
● When a small animal or small
object, such as a ball, moves
under the rear bumper.
● When an object is moved from
under the rear bumper.
● If someone is swinging their legs
while sitting on the rear bumper.
● If the legs or another part of some-
one’s body contacts the rear
bumper while passing by the vehi-
cle.
● When the vehicle is parked near
an electrical noise source which
affects the sensitivity of the Hands
Free Power Back Door, such as a
pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluo-
rescent light.
● When the vehicle is near a TV
tower, electric power plant, radio
station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong
radio waves or electrical noise.
● When the vehicle is parked in a
place where objects such as
plants are near the rear bumper.
● When luggage, etc. is set in or
removed from the luggage com-
partment from outside of the vehi-
cle.
● If accessories or a vehicle cover is
installed/removed near the rear
bumper.
● When snow attached to the inner
side of the rear bumper melts.
To prevent unintentional operation,
turn the kick sensor operation set-
ting off. (P.515)
■ When reconnecting the battery
To enable the power back door to
operate properly, close the back
door manually.
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
WARNING
■ Back door closer
● In the event that the back door
is left slightly open, the back
door closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed posi-
tion. It takes several seconds
before the back door closer
begins to operate. Be careful
not to get fingers caught or any-
thing else in the back door, as
this may cause bone fractures
or other serious injuries.
● Use caution when using the
back door closer as it still oper-
ates when the power back door
system is disabled.
■ Power back door
Observe the following precautions
when operating the power back
door. Failure to do so may cause
death or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the sur-
rounding area to make sure
there are no obstacles or any-
thing that could cause any of
your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make
sure they are safe and let them
know that the back door is
about to open or close.
● If the power back door system is
disabled while the power back
door is operating, the back door
will stop operating. The back
door must then be operated
manually. Take extra care in this
situation, as the back door may
open or close suddenly.
● If the operating conditions of the
power back door (
P.124) are
no longer met, a buzzer may
sound and the back door may
stop opening or closing. The
back door must then be oper-
ated manually. Take extra care
on an incline in this situation, as
the back door may move sud-
denly.
● On an incline, the back door
may suddenly shut after it
opens. Make sure the back door
is fully open and secure.
● In the following situations, the
power back door may detect an
abnormality and automatic
operation may be stopped. In
this case, the back door must
then be operated manually.
Take extra care in this situation,
as the stopped back door may
suddenly open or close, causing
an accident.
• When the back door contacts an
obstacle
• When the battery voltage sud-
denly drops, such as when the
engine switch is turned to ON or
the engine is started during
automatic operation
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● If a heavy object is attached to
the back door, the back door
may not operate, causing a mal-
function, or the back door may
suddenly shut again after being
opened, causing someone’s
hands, arms, head or neck to be
caught and injured. Do not
attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the
back door.
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may cause
death or serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the back door
fully closes. Be careful not to
get fingers caught or anything
else.
● The jam protection function may
not work depending on the
shape of the object that is
caught. Be careful not to catch
fingers or anything else.
■ Hands Free Power Back Door
(if equipped)
Observe the following precautions
when operating the Hands Free
Power Back Door. Failure to do so
may cause death or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the sur-
rounding area to make sure
there are no obstacles or any-
thing that could cause any of
your belongings to get caught.
● Exhaust gasses cause the
exhaust pipes to become quite
hot. When operating the Hands
Free Power Back Door, be care-
ful not to touch the exhaust
pipe.
● Do not operate the Hands Free
Power Back Door if there is little
space under the rear bumper.
NOTICE
■ Back door spindles
The back door is equipped with
spindles that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may cause
damage to the back door spindle,
resulting in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign
objects, such as stickers, plastic
sheets, or adhesives to the
spindle rod.
● Do not attach any accessories
other than genuine Toyota parts
to the back door.
● Do not place your hand on the
spindle or apply lateral forces to
it.
■ To prevent back door closer
malfunction
Do not apply excessive force to
the back door while the back door
closer is operating. Applying
excessive force may cause the
back door closer to malfunction.
129
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
NOTICE
■ To prevent malfunction of the
power back door
● Make sure that there is no ice
between the back door and
frame that would prevent move-
ment of the back door. Operat-
ing the power back door when
excessive load is present on the
back door may cause a mal-
function.
● Do not apply excessive force to
the power back door while the
back door is operating.
● Take care not to damage the
sensors (installed on the right
and left edges of the power
back door) with a knife or other
sharp object. If a sensor is dis-
connected, the power back door
will not close automatically.
■ Hands Free Power Back Door
precautions (if equipped)
The kick sensor is located behind
lower center part of the rear
bumper. Observe the following to
ensure that the Hands Free
Power Back Door function oper-
ates properly:
● Keep the lower center part of
the rear bumper clean at all
times.
If the lower center part of the rear
bumper is dirty or covered with
snow, the kick sensor may not
operate. In this situation, clean off
the dirt or snow, move the vehicle
from the current position and then
check if the kick sensor operates.
If it does not operate, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not apply coatings that have
a rain clearing (hydrophilic)
effect, or other coatings, to the
lower center part of the rear
bumper.
● Do not park the vehicle near
objects that may move and con-
tact the lower center part of the
rear bumper, such as grass or
trees.
If the vehicle has been parked for
a while near objects that may
move and contact the lower cen-
ter part of the rear bumper, such
as grass or trees, the kick sensor
may not operate. In this situation,
move the vehicle from the current
position and then check if the kick
sensor operates. If it does not
operate, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the kick sensor
or its surrounding area to a
strong impact.
If the kick sensor or its surround-
ing area has been subjected to a
strong impact, the kick sensor
may not operate properly.
If the kick sensor does not oper-
ate in the following situations,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• The kick sensor or its surround-
ing area has been subjected to
a strong impact.
• The lower center part of the rear
bumper is scratched or dam-
aged.
● Do not disassemble the rear
bumper.
● Do not attach stickers to the
rear bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper.
● If a heavy object is attached to
the power back door, disable
the kick sensor.
130
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
The open position of the power
back door can be adjusted.
1 Stop the power back door at
the desired position.
(P.122)
2 Press and hold the power
back door switch on the back
door for approximately 2 sec-
onds.
• When setting is complete, a
buzzer will sound 4 times.
• The next time the power back
door is opened, it will stop at
that position.
■ Returning the power back door
opening position to the default
setting
Press and hold the power back door
switch on the back door for approxi-
mately 7 seconds.
A buzzer will sound 4 times, pause,
and then sound 2 more times. The
next time the power back door is
opened, it will stop at the default
position.
■ When setting the open position
of the back door by the
multi-information display
The open position of the power back
door can be adjusted using the
multi-information display. (P.515)
When opened, the power back door
will open to the last position set
using the power back door switch on
the back door or on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Adjusting the open posi-
tion of the back door
(vehicles with a power
back door)
131
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment
■ Effective range (areas within
which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about 2.3
ft. (0.7 m) of an outside front door
handle and back door. (Only the
doors detecting the key can be
operated.)
When starting the engine or
changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle.
■ Alarms and warning messages
A combination of exterior and inte-
rior alarms as well as warning mes-
sages shown on the
multi-information display are used to
prevent theft of the vehicle and acci-
dents resulting from erroneous
operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures in response to any warning
message on the multi-information
display. (P.460)
When only an alarm sounds, cir-
cumstances and correction proce-
dures are as follows.
● When an exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
Smart key system
The following operations
can be performed simply by
carrying the electronic key
on your person, for example
in your pocket. The driver
should always carry the
electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the
doors (P.115)
Locks and unlocks the back
door (P.121)
Starts and stops the engine
(P.200)
132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
● When an interior alarm sounds
continuously
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be
activated in order to prevent the
electronic key battery and the vehi-
cle battery from being discharged
while the vehicle is not operated for
a long time.
● In the following situations, the
smart key system may take some
time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in
an area of approximately 6 ft. (2
m) of the outside of the vehicle for
10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not
been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart key system has not
been used for 14 days or longer,
the doors cannot be unlocked at
any doors except the driver’s door.
In this case, take hold of the
driver’s door handle, or use the
wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the
doors.
■ Turning an electronic key to
battery-saving mode
When battery-saving mode is set,
battery depletion is minimized by
stopping the electronic key from
receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and
holding . Confirm that the elec-
tronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is
set, the smart key system cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press
any of the electronic key buttons.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak
radio waves. In the following situa-
tions, the communication between
the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the
smart key system, wireless remote
control and engine immobilizer sys-
tem from operating properly. (Ways
of coping:P.481)
● When the electronic key battery is
depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in con-
tact with, or is covered by the fol-
lowing metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alumi-
num foil inside
Situation
Correction
procedure
An attempt was
made to lock the
vehicle while a door
was open.
Close all of
the doors
and lock the
doors again.
Situation
Correction
procedure
The engine switch
was turned to ACC
while the driver’s
door was open (or
the driver’s door was
opened while the
engine switch was in
ACC).
Turn the
engine
switch off
and close
the driver’s
door.
The engine switch
was turned off while
the driver’s door was
open.
Close the
driver’s
door.
133
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that
emit radio waves) are being used
nearby
● When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Portable radio, cellular phone,
cordless phone or other wireless
communication devices
• Another electronic key or a wire-
less key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal
digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic con-
tent or metallic objects are
attached to the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed
near a battery charger or elec-
tronic devices
● When the vehicle is parked in a
pay parking spot where radio
waves are emitted
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is
within the effective range (detec-
tion areas), the system may not
operate properly in the following
cases:
• The electronic key is too close to
the window or outside door han-
dle, near the ground, or in a high
place when the doors are locked
or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instru-
ment panel, luggage compart-
ment, floor, or in the door pockets
or glove box when the engine is
started or engine switch modes
are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on
top of the instrument panel or near
the door pockets when exiting the
vehicle. Depending on the radio
wave reception conditions, it may
be detected by the antenna out-
side the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside,
possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is
within the effective range, the
doors may be locked or unlocked
by anyone. However, only the
doors detecting the electronic key
can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not
inside the vehicle, it may be possi-
ble to start the engine if the elec-
tronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a
large amount of water splashes on
the door handle, such as in the
rain or in a car wash when the
electronic key is within the effec-
tive range. (The doors will auto-
matically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the
doors are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is
used to lock the doors when the
electronic key is near the vehicle,
there is a possibility that the door
may not be unlocked by the entry
function. (Use the wireless remote
control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock or unlock
sensor while wearing gloves may
prevent lock or unlock operation.
● When the lock operation is per-
formed using the lock sensor, rec-
ognition signals will be shown up
to two consecutive times. After
this, no recognition signals will be
given.
● If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within
the effective range, the door may
lock and unlock repeatedly. In that
case, follow the following correc-
tion procedures to wash the vehi-
cle:
• Place the electronic key in a loca-
tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from
the vehicle. (Take care to ensure
that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to bat-
134
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
tery-saving mode to disable the
smart key system. (P.132)
● If the electronic key is inside the
vehicle and a door handle
becomes wet during a car wash, a
message may be shown on the
multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehi-
cle. To turn off the alarm, lock all
the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work
properly if it comes into contact
with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean
the lock sensor and attempt to
operate it again, or use the lock
sensor on the lower part of the
door handle.
● A sudden handle operation or a
handle operation immediately
after entering the effective range
may prevent the doors from being
unlocked. Touch the door unlock
sensor and check that the doors
are unlocked before pulling the
door handle again.
● If there is another electronic key in
the detection area, it may take
slightly longer to unlock the doors
after the door handle is gripped.
■ When the vehicle is not driven
for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do
not leave the electronic key within
6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be
deactivated in advance. (P.515)
● Setting the electronic key to bat-
tery-saving mode helps to reduce
key battery depletion. (P.132)
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic
key when operating the system. Do
not get the electronic key too close
to the vehicle when operating the
system from the outside of the vehi-
cle.
Depending on the position and hold-
ing condition of the electronic key,
the key may not be detected cor-
rectly and the system may not oper-
ate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock pre-
vention may not operate.)
■ If the smart key system does
not operate properly
If the doors cannot be
locked/unlocked using the smart key
system, lock/unlock the doors by
performing any of the following:
● Bring the electronic key close to
either front door handle and oper-
ate the entry function.
● Operate the wireless remote con-
trol.
If the doors cannot be
locked/unlocked using the above
methods, use the mechanical key.
(P.481)
If the engine cannot be started using
the smart key system, refer to
P.482.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
■ If the smart key system has
been deactivated in a custom-
ized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (P.115, 481)
● Starting the engine and changing
engine switch modes: P. 48 2
● Stopping the engine: P. 20 1
135
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
136
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
For vehicles sold in Canada
137
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
● People with implantable car-
diac pacemakers, card
iac
resynchroniz
ation ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
keep away from the smart
key
syste
m antennas. (P.131) The
radio waves may affect the
operat
ion of such devices. If
necessary, the entry function
can be disabled. Ask your Toy-
ota dealer for details, su
ch as
th
e frequency of radio
waves
and
timing of the emitted radio
waves. Then, consult your doc-
tor to see if you should disabl
e
th
e entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical
device
other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, card
iac
resynchroniz
ation ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
consult the manufacturer of th
e
device for information about its
ope
ration under the influence of
radio waves. Radio waves
could
have
unexpected effects on
the
ope
ration of such medica
l
devices.
Ask
your Toyota dealer for details
on disabling the entry function.
138
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3-3.Adjusting the seats
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Power seat
Seat position adjustment
switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch (driver’s
side only)
Vertical height adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)
Lumbar support adjustment
switch (driver’s side only)
■ When adjusting the seat
Take care when adjusting the seat
so that the head restraint does not
touch the ceiling.
Front seats
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat posi-
tion
● Take care when adjusting the
seat position to ensure th
at
othe
r passengers are
not
inju
red by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the
seat or near the moving parts to
avoid injury. Fingers or hand
s
m
ay become jammed in the
seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough
space around the feet so they
do not get stuck.
■ Seat adjustment
● Be careful that the seat does
not hit passengers or luggage.
● To reduce the risk of sliding
under the lap belt during a colli-
sion, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap
belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to
the abdomen, or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made
while driving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause
the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
139
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
WARNING
● Manual seat only: After adjust-
ing the seat, make sure that the
seat is locked in position.
Rear seats
The seat position and seat-
back angle can be adjusted,
and the seatback can be
folded by operating a seat-
back angle adjustment
lever.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding
under the lap belt during a colli-
sion, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap
belt may slide past the hips and
apply restraint forces directly to
the abdomen, or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made
while driving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause
the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
● Be careful that the seat does
not hit passengers or luggage.
● Be careful not to get your hands
or feet caught in the seat.
■ After adjusting or returning
the seats
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
● Make sure that the seat and
seatback are securely locked in
position by lightly rocking them
back and forth.
● Check that the seat belts are
not twisted or caught in the
seatback.
140
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Second seats
8-seat models
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Seat position adjustment
lever
WARNING
■ When folding the rear seat-
backs down
Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result
in death or serious injury.
● Do not fold the seatbacks down
while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level
ground, set the parking brake
and shift the shift lever to P.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a
folded seatback or in the lug-
gage compartment while driv-
ing.
● Do not allow children to enter
the luggage compartment.
● Do not fold down a rear seat-
back when there are passen-
gers sitting in the rear seats or
when there is luggage placed
on the rear seats.
● Be careful not to catch your
hand when folding the rear seat-
backs.
Adjustment procedure
141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
7-seat models
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Seat position adjustment
lever
■ Third seats
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
■ When entering/exiting the
vehicle
Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever or to tilt the
seatback forward and then slide
the seat forward.
Make sure that the second seat is
free of passengers and obstruc-
tions before operating the lever.
■ After passengers have
entered/exited the vehicle
Lift up the seatback and slide
the seat backward until it locks.
■ Before folding down the
second seats
1 Stow the armrest. (P.375)
Moving a second seat for
third seat access
Folding down the second
seats
142
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
2 Stow the second seat belt
buckles.
3 Pass the outer seat belts
through the seat belt hangers
and secure the seat belt
plates.
This prevents the shoulder belts
from being damaged.
4 Lower the head restraints to
the lowest position. (P.147)
■ Folding down the second
seats
1 Pull the seatback angle
adjustment lever or to
tilt the seatback forward.
Each seatback may be folded sep-
arately.
2 Pull the seatback folding
lever to unlock the seatback.
The seatback will be folded
down.
■ After folding down the sec-
ond seats
Slide the folded second seats
backward until they lock.
143
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Returning the second seats
Lift up the seatbacks until they
lock.
Remove the secured seat belts
from the seat belt hangers before
using them.
■ Before folding down the
third seats
1 Stow the third seat belt buck-
les.
2 Pass the outer seat belts
through the seat belt hangers
and secure the seat belt
plates.
This prevents the shoulder belts
from being damaged.
3 Lower the center head
restraint to the lowest posi-
tion. (P.147)
■ Folding down the third
seats
While pulling the the seatback
angle adjustment lever, fold
down the seatbacks.
The outer head restraints will fold
forward.
■ Returning the third seats
1 Returning the seatbacks
From inside
Lift up the seatbacks until they lock.
Folding down the third
seats
144
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
From outside
Pull the straps and raise the seat-
backs until they lock.
After using either strap, use the vel-
cro on the strap to attach it to the
seatback.
2 Returning the outer head
restraints.
Remove the secured seat belts
from the seat belt hangers before
using them.
*
: If equipped
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 Adjust the driver’s seat, out-
side rear view mirrors and
head-up display (if equipped)
to the desired positions.
4 While pressing the “SET” but-
ton, or within 3 seconds after
the “SET” button is pressed,
press button “1” or “2” until
the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously
recorded position will be overwrit-
Driving position mem-
ory
*
This feature automatically
adjusts the driver’s seat,
outside rear view mirrors
and head-up display (if
equipped) to suit your pref-
erences.
Two different driving posi-
tions can be recorded into
memory.
Each electronic key can be
registered to recall your pre-
ferred driving position.
Recording a driving posi-
tion into memory
145
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
ten.
■ Seat positions that can be
memorized
The adjusted positions other than
the position adjusted by lumbar sup-
port switch can be recorded.
■ In order to correctly use the
driving position memory func-
tion
If a seat position is already in the
furthest possible position and the
seat is operated in the same direc-
tion, the recorded position may be
slightly different when it is recalled.
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 Press one of the buttons for
the driving position you want
to recall until the buzzer
sounds.
■ To stop the position recall oper-
ation part-way through
Perform any of the following opera-
tions:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1” or “2”.
● Operate any of the seat adjust-
ment switches (only cancels seat
position recall).
■ Operating the driving position
memory after turning the
engine switch off
Recorded seat positions can be
activated up to 180 seconds after
the driver’s door is opened and
another 60 seconds after it is closed
again.
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to
button “1” or “2” before perform-
ing the following:
Carry only the key you want to
register, and then close the
driver’s door.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment
so that the seat does not strike
the rear passenger or squeeze
your body against the steering
wheel.
Recalling a driving posi-
tion
Registering/cancel-
ing/recall a driving posi-
tion to an electronic key
(memory recall function)
146
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle,
the driving position cannot be
recorded properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
2 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
3 Recall the driving position
that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled
button, press and hold the
door lock switch (either lock
or unlock) until the buzzer
sounds.
If the button could not be regis-
tered, the buzzer sounds continu-
ously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to
cancel and then close the
driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle,
the driving position cannot be can-
celed properly.
1 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
2 While pressing the “SET” but-
ton, press and hold the door
lock switch (either lock or
unlock) until the buzzer
sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled,
the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recall procedure
Make sure that the doors are
locked before recalling the driv-
ing position. Carry the electronic
key that has been registered to
the driving position, and then
unlock and open the driver’s
door using the smart key system
or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the
recorded position.
If the driving position is in a position
that has already been recorded, the
seat and outside rear view mirrors
will not move.
■ Recalling the driving position
using the memory recall func-
tion
● Different driving positions can be
registered for each electronic key.
Therefore, the driving position that
is recalled may be different
depending on the key being car-
ried.
● If a door other than the driver’s
door is unlocked with the smart
key system, the driving position
cannot be recalled. In this case,
press the driving position button
which has been set.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
147
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Front seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button .
■ Second seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button .
■ Third center seat
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button .
■ Adjusting the height of the head
restraints
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided
for all seats.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints
designed for each respective
seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the
correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head
restraints, push down on them
and make sure they are locked
in position.
● Do not drive with the head
restraints removed.
Adjusting a head restraint
148
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
Make sure that the head restraints
are adjusted so that the center of
the head restraint is closest to the
top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the third center seat
head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one
level from the stowed position when
using.
■ When using the outboard third
seats
If a head restraint is folded forward,
make sure to return it to the upright
position. (P.143)
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing the lock release button
.
If the head restraint touches the
ceiling, making the removal difficult,
change the seat height or angle.
(P.138, 139)
Front seats
Second seats
Third center seat
Align the head restraint with the
installation holes and push it
down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release
button when lowering the
head restraint.
Front seats
Removing the head
restraints
Installing the head
restraints
149
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
Second seats
Third center seat
150
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirr ors
1 Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
2 Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
Press on or close to the
mark.
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to
mishandle the vehicle and cause
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering
wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel
is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel
may move suddenly, possibly
causing an accident, and resulting
in death or serious injury. Also,
the horn may not sound if the
steering wheel is not securely
locked.
Sounding the horn
151
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
*
: If equipped
The height of the rear view mir-
ror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and
down.
Manual anti-glare inside rear
view mirror
Reflected light from the head-
lights of vehicles behind can be
reduced by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear
view mirror
Responding to the level of
brightness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the reflected
light is automatically reduced.
Turn the automatic anti-glare
function mode on/off
When the automatic anti-glare func-
tion is in ON mode, the indicator
illuminates. The function will set to
ON mode each time the engine
switch is turned to ON.
Pressing the button turns the func-
tion to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)
Inside rear view mir-
ror
*
The rear view mirror’s posi-
tion can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of
rear view mirror
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the
mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling
of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Anti-glare function
152
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
■ To prevent sensor error (vehi-
cles with auto anti-glare inside
rear view mirror)
To ensure that the sensors operate
properly, do not touch or cover
them.
*
: If equipped
Digital Rearview Mir-
ror
*
The Digital Rearview Mirror
is a system that uses the
camera on the rear of the
vehicle and displays its
image on the display of the
Digital Rearview Mirror.
The Digital Rearview Mirror
can be changed between
optical mirror mode and dig-
ital mirror mode by operat-
ing the lever.
The Digital Rearview Mirror
allows the driver to see the
rear view despite obstruc-
tions, such as the head
restraints or luggage, ensur-
ing rear visibility. Also, the
rear seats are not displayed
and privacy of the passen-
gers is enhanced.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Before using the Digital Rear-
view Mirror
● Make sure to adjust the mirror
before driving. (P.154)
• Change to optical mirror mode
and adjust the position of the
Digital Rearview Mirror so that
the area behind your vehicle
can be viewed properly.
153
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
Camera indicator
Indicates that the camera is operat-
ing normally.
Icon display area
Displays icons, adjusting gauge,
etc. (P.154)
Select button
Press to change the setting of the
item you want to adjust.
Menu button
Press to display the icon display
area and select the item you want
to adjust.
Lever
Operate to change between digital
mirror mode and optical mirror
mode.
Operate the lever to change
between digital mirror mode and
optical mirror mode.
1 Digital mirror mode
Displays an image of the area
behind the vehicle.
will illuminate in this mode.
2 Optical mirror mode
Turns off the display of the Digital
Rearview Mirror allows it to be used
as an optical mirror.
■ Digital mirror mode operating
condition
The engine switch is turned to ON.
When the engine switch is changed
from ON to OFF or ACC, the image
will disappear after several seconds.
■ When using the Digital Rear-
view Mirror in digital mirror
mode
● If it is difficult to see the displayed
image due to light reflected off the
Digital Rearview Mirror, the cam-
era being dirty, or if lights of a
vehicle behind your vehicle or the
displayed image are bothering
you, change to optical mirror
mode.
● When the back door is open, the
Digital Rearview Mirror image may
not display properly. Before driv-
ing, make sure the back door is
WARNING
• Change to digital mirror mode
and adjust the display settings.
● As the range of the image dis-
played by the Digital Rearview
Mirror is different from that of
the optical mirror, make sure to
check this difference before
driving.
System components
Changing modes
154
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
closed.
● If the display is difficult to see due
to reflected light, close the sun-
shade for the moon roof or the
electronic sunshade for the pan-
oramic moon roof.
● Any of the following conditions
may occur when driving in the
dark, such as at night. None of
them indicates that a malfunction
has occurred.
• Colors of objects in the displayed
image may differ from their actual
color.
• Depending on the height of the
lights of the vehicle behind, the
area around the vehicle may
appear white and blurry.
• Automatic image adjustment for
brighter surrounding image may
cause flickering.
If it is difficult to see the displayed
image or flickering bothers you,
change to optical mirror mode.
● The Digital Rearview Mirror may
become hot while it is in digital
mirror mode.
This is not a malfunction.
● Depending on your physical con-
dition or age, it may take longer
than usual to focus on the dis-
played image. In this case,
change to optical mirror mode.
● Do not let passengers stare at the
displayed image when the vehicle
is being driven, as doing so may
cause motion sickness.
■ When the system malfunctions
If the symbol shown in the illustra-
tion is displayed when using the
Digital Rearview Mirror in digital mir-
ror mode, the system may be mal-
functioning. The symbol will
disappear in a few seconds. Oper-
ate the lever, change to optical mir-
ror mode and have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Adjusting the mirror height
The height of the rear view mir-
ror can be adjusted to suit your
driving posture.
Change to optical mirror mode,
adjusting the height of the rear
view mirror by moving it up and
down.
■ Display settings (digital mir-
ror mode)
Settings of the display in the dig-
ital mirror mode, on/off operation
of the automatic anti-glare func-
tion, etc. can be changed.
1 Press the menu button.
Adjusting the mirror
155
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
The icons will be displayed.
2 Press the menu button
repeatedly and select the
item you want to adjust.
3 Press or to
change the setting.
The icons will disappear if a button
is not operated for approximately 5
seconds or more.
*
: This is a function for the optical
mirror mode, however, the setting
can also be changed while using
the digital mirror mode.
■ Enabling/disabling the
automatic anti-glare func-
tion (optical mirror mode)
The automatic anti-glare func-
tion in the optical mirror mode
can be enabled/disabled. The
setting can be changed in both
the digital mirror mode and the
optical mirror mode.
When using the digital mirror
mode
P.154
When using the optical mirror
mode
1 Press the menu button.
The icons will be displayed.
2 Press the menu button
repeatedly and select .
Icons Settings
Select to adjust the bright-
ness of the display.
Select to adjust the area
displayed up/down.
Select to adjust the area
displayed to the left/right.
Select to adjust the angle of
the displayed image.
Select to zoom in/out the
displayed image.
Select to enable/disable the
automatic anti-glare func-
tion.
*
Responding to the bright-
ness of the headlights of
vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automati-
cally adjusted.
The automatic anti-glare
function is enabled each
time the engine switch is
changed to ON.
Icons Settings
156
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
The setting display will be dis-
played.
3 Press or to
enable (“ON”)/disable
(“OFF”) the automatic
anti-glare function.
The icons will disappear if a button
is not operated for approximately 5
seconds or more.
■ Adjusting the display (digital
mirror mode)
● If the displayed image is adjusted,
it may appear distorted. This is not
a malfunction.
● If the brightness of the Digital
Rearview Mirror is set too high, it
may cause eye strain. Adjust the
Digital Rearview Mirror to an
appropriate brightness. If your
eyes become tired, change to
optical mirror mode.
● The brightness of the Digital Rear-
view Mirror will change automati-
cally according to the brightness
of the area in front of your vehicle.
■ To prevent the light sensors
from malfunctioning
To prevent the light sensors from
malfunctioning, do not touch or
cover them.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the
Digital Rearview Mirror or adjust
the display settings while driv-
ing.
Stop the vehicle and operate
the Digital Rearview Mirror con-
trol switches.
Failure to do so may cause a
steering wheel operation error,
resulting in an unexpected acci-
dent.
● Always pay attention to the
vehicle’s surroundings.
The size of the vehicles and other
objects may look different when in
digital mirror mode and optical
mirror mode.
When backing up, make sure to
directly check the safety of the
area around your vehicle, espe-
cially behind the vehicle.
Additionally, if a vehicle
approaches from the rear in the
dark, such as at night, the sur-
rounding area may appear dim.
■ To prevent causes of fire
If the driver continues using the
Digital Rearview Mirror while
smoke or odor comes from the
mirror, it may result in fire. Stop
using the system immediately and
contact your Toyota dealer.
157
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ Cleaning the mirror surface
If the mirror surface is dirty, the
image on the display may be dif-
ficult to see.
Clean the mirror surface gently
using a soft dry cloth.
■ Cleaning the camera
If the camera lens is dirty or cov-
ered with foreign matter, such as
water droplets, snow, mud, etc.,
the displayed image may not be
clear. In this case, rinse the
camera lens with a large quan-
tity of water and then wipe it
clean with a soft cloth damp-
ened with water.
Dirt on the camera lens can be
cleaned by operating the dedi-
cated camera cleaning washer.
(P.223)
■ The camera
The camera for the Digital Rearview
Mirror is located as shown.
Cleaning the Digital Rear-
view Mirror
NOTICE
■ To prevent the Digital Rear-
view Mirror from malfunction-
ing
● Do not use detergents, such as
thinner, benzene, and alcohol to
clean the mirror. They may dis-
color, deteriorate or damage the
mirror surface.
● Do not smoke, use matches,
use cigarette lighters or allow
open flames near the mirror. It
may damage the mirror or
cause a fire.
● Do not remove, disassemble or
modify the mirror.
■ To prevent the camera from
malfunctioning
● Observe the following precau-
tions, otherwise the Digital
Rearview Mirror may not oper-
ate properly.
• Do not strike or hit the camera
or subject it to a strong impact,
as the camera installation posi-
tion and angle may be changed.
• Do not remove, disassemble or
modify the camera.
• When washing the camera,
rinse it with a large quantity of
water and then wipe it clean
with a soft cloth dampened with
water.
Do not strongly rub the camera
lens, as it may be scratched and
will not be able to transmit a
clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent,
car wax, window cleaner or
glass coat to adhere to the cam-
era cover. If this happens, wipe
it off as soon as possible.
158
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following
table for the likely cause and the solution.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
• Do not apply hot water to the
camera in cold weather, as the
sudden change of temperature
may cause the camera to not
operate properly.
• When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not directly spray the camera
and its surrounding area, as
doing so may cause the camera
to not operate properly.
● Do not subject the camera to a
strong impact as this could
cause a malfunction.
If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
If you notice any symptoms
159
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is diffi-
cult to see.
The mirror surface is dirty.
Clean the mirror surface
gently, using a soft dry
cloth.
Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the Dig-
ital Rearview Mirror.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(If the light is coming
through the moon roof or
panoramic moon roof,
close the sunshade or
electronic sunshade.)
• The vehicle is in a dark
area.
• The vehicle is near a TV
tower, broadcasting sta-
tion, electric power plant,
or other location where
strong radio waves or
electrical noise may be
present.
• The temperature around
the camera is extremely
high/low.
• The ambient temperature
is extremely low.
• It is raining or humid.
• Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera lens.
• The vehicle is under fluo-
rescent lights, sodium
lights, mercury lights, etc.
• Exhaust gas is obstruct-
ing the camera.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(Change back to digital
mirror mode when the
conditions have
improved.)
160
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
The image is diffi-
cult to see.
Foreign matters (such as
water droplets, snow, mud,
etc.) is on the camera lens.
Operate the dedicated
camera cleaning
washer and clean the
camera lens. (P.223)
Change to optical mir-
ror mode.
Rinse the camera with
a large quantity of
water, wipe it clean
with a soft cloth damp-
ened with water, and
then change back to
digital mirror mode.
The image is out of
alignment.
The back door is not fully
closed.
Fully close the back
door.
The camera or its surround-
ing area has received a
strong impact.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehi-
cle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
The display is dim
and is dis-
played.
The system may be mal-
functioning.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehi-
cle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
goes off.
Symptom Likely cause Solution
161
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
is displayed.
The Digital Rearview Mirror
is extremely hot.
(The display will gradually
become more dim. If the
temperature continues to
increase, the Digital Rear-
view Mirror will turn off.)
Reducing the cabin tem-
perature is recom-
mended to reduce the
temperature of the mir-
ror.
( will disappear
when the mirror
becomes cool.)
If does not disap-
pear even though the
mirror is cool, have the
vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The lever cannot be
operated properly.
The lever may be malfunc-
tioning.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehi-
cle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
(To change to optical
mirror mode, press and
hold the menu button for
approximately 10 sec-
onds.)
Symptom Likely cause Solution
162
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
1 To select a mirror to adjust,
turn the switch.
Left
Right
2 To adjust the mirror, operate
the switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted
when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can
be cleared using the mirror defog-
gers. Turn on the rear window
defogger to turn on the outside rear
view mirror defoggers. (P.329,
335)
■ Automatic adjustment of the
mirror angle (if equipped)
A desired mirror face angle can be
entered to memory and recalled
automatically by the driving position
memory. (P.144)
■ Linked mirror function when
reversing (if equipped)
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror
select switch is selected, the outside
rear view mirrors will automatically
angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better
view of the ground.
To disable this function, select nei-
ther “L” nor “R”.
To set the mirror angle used when
Outside rear view mir-
rors
The rear view mirror’s posi-
tion can be adjusted to
enable sufficient confirma-
tion of the rear view.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions
while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss
of control of the vehicle and cause
an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while
driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors
folded.
● Both the driver and passenger
side mirrors must be extended
and properly adjusted before
driving.
Adjustment procedure
163
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
the vehicle is reversing, adjust the
mirror angle at a desired position
with the shift lever in R.
The adjusted angle will be memo-
rized and the mirror will automati-
cally tilt to the memorized angle
whenever the shift lever is shifted to
R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt posi-
tion of the mirror is linked to the nor-
mal position (angle adjusted with
the shift lever in other than R).
Therefore, if the normal position is
changed after adjustment, the tilt
position will also change.
When the normal position is
changed, readjust the angle in
reversing.
Push the mirror back in the
direction of the vehicle’s rear.
WARNING
■ When the mirror defoggers
are
operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces, as they can become
very hot and burn you.
Folding the mirrors
164
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be
opened and closed using the
switches.
Operating the switch moves the
windows as follows:
1 Closing
2 One-touch closing
*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
■ The power windows can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Operating the power windows
af
ter turning the engine off
The power windows can be oper-
ated for approximately 45 seconds
even after the engine switch is
turned to ACC or turned off. They
cannot, however, be operated once
either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed
between the window and the win-
dow frame while the window is clos-
ing, window movement is stopped
and the window is opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught
between the door and window while
the window is opening, window
movement is stopped.
■ When the window cannot be
opened or closed
When the jam protection function or
catch protection function operates
unusually and the door window can-
not be opened or closed, perform
the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine
switch in ON, within 4 seconds
of
the
jam protection function or
catch protection function activat-
ing, continuously oper
ate the
power
window switch
in the
o
ne-touch closing direction
or
one-touch opening direction so
tha
t the door window can be
opened and closed.
● If the door window cannot be
opened and closed even when
performing the above oper
ations,
p
erform the following procedure
for function initialization.
1 Turn the engine switch to ON.
2 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
direction and completely close
the door window.
3 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume
pulling the switch in the
one-touch closing direction, and
hold it there for approximately 6
seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power win-
dow switch in the one-touch
opening direction. After the door
window is completely opened,
continue holding the switch for
an additional 1 second or more.
5 Release the power window
switch for a moment, resume
Power windows
Opening and closing the
power windows
165
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
pushing the switch in the
one-touch opening direction, and
hold it there for approximately 4
seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch closing
direction again. After the door
window is completely closed,
continue holding the switch for a
further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the
window is moving, start again from
the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot
be fully closed or opened, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Door lock linked window opera-
tion
● The power windows can be
opened and closed using the
mechanical key.
*
(P.481)
● The power windows can be
opened using the wireless remote
control.
*
(P.11 5)
*
: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
■ Power windows open warning
buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the engine switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the power windows
open.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all
the power window operations,
including the operation for the
passengers. In order to prevent
accidental operation, especially
by a child, do not let a child
operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other
passengers to have body parts
caught in the power window.
Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the win-
dow lock switch. (
P.166)
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when a window
is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote
control or mechanical key and
operating the power windows,
operate the power window after
checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their
body parts caught in the win-
dow. Also do not let a child
operate window by the wireless
remote control or mechanical
key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get
caught in the power window.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the engine switch off, carry the
key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be
accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
166
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
This function can be used to
prevent children from acciden-
tally opening or closing a pas-
senger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator will come on and
the passenger windows will be
locked.
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the
driver’s switch even if the lock
switch is on.
■ The power windows can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ When the battery is discon-
nected
The window lock switch is disabled.
If necessary, press the window lock
switch after reconnecting the bat-
tery.
WARNING
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
jammed just before the window
is fully closed. Be careful not to
get any part of your body
jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body
or clothing to intentionally acti-
vate the catch protection func-
tion.
● The catch protection function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the window is
fully opened. Be careful not to
get any part of your body or
clothing caught in the window.
Preventing accidental
operation (window lock
switch)
167
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
*
: If equipped
■ Opening and closing
1 Opens the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly before
the fully open position to reduce
wind noise. Press the switch again
to fully open the moon roof.
2 Closes the moon roof
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the
moon roof switch to stop the
moon roof partway.
■ Tilting up and down
1 Tilts the moon roof up
*
2 Tilts the moon roof down
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the
moon roof switch to stop the
moon roof partway.
■ The moon roof can be operated
when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Operating the moon roof after
turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to ACC or
turned off. It cannot, however, be
operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the
moon roof and the frame while the
moon roof is closing or tilting down,
travel is stopped and the moon roof
opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and
closed manually. However, the sun-
shade will open automatically when
the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof
operation
● The moon roof can be opened
and closed using the mechanical
key.
*
(P.481)
● The moon roof can be opened
using the wireless remote control.
*
(P. 11 5 )
*
: These settings must be custom-
ized at your Toyota dealer.
■ When the moon roof does not
close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then
re-opens slightly
1 Stop the vehicle.
Moon roof
*
Use the overhead switches
to open and close the moon
roof and tilt it up and down.
Operating the moon roof
168
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE”
switch.
*1
The moon roof will close, reopen
and pause for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
*2
Then it will close again, tilt
up and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open
and close.
3 Check to make sure that the
moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then
tilts back up
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “UP” switch
*1
until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
3 Release the “UP” switch once
and then press and hold the “UP”
switch again.
*1
The moon roof will pause for
approximately 10 seconds in the tilt
up position.
*2
Then it will adjust
slightly and pause for approximately
1 second. Finally, it will tilt down,
open and close.
4 Check to make sure that the
moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
*1
:If the switch is released at the
incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from
the beginning.
*2
:If the switch is released after the
above mentioned 10 second
pause, automatic operation will
be disabled. In that case, press
and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP”
switch, and the moon roof will tilt
up and pause for approximately 1
second. Then it will tilt down,
open and close. Check to make
sure that the moon roof is com-
pletely closed and then release
the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close
even after performing the above
procedure correctly, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the engine switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the moon roof open.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to
put their hands or heads outside
the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon
roof.
■ Opening and closing the
moon roof
● The driver is responsible for
moon roof opening and closing
operations.
In order to prevent accidental
operation, especially by a child,
do not let a child operate the
moon roof. It is possible for chil-
dren and other passengers to
have body parts caught in the
moon roof.
169
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
WARNING
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the moon
roof is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote
control or mechanical key and
operating the moon roof, oper-
ate the moon roof after checking
to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts
caught in the moon roof. Also,
do not let a child operate moon
roof by the wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key. It is pos-
sible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the
moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the engine switch off, carry the
key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be
accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the moon
roof is fully closed. Also, the jam
protection function is not
designed to operate while the
switch is being pressed. Take
care so that your fingers, etc. do
not get caught.
170
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
■ Opening and closing the
electronic sunshade
1 Opens the electronic sun-
shade
*
2 Closes the electronic sun-
shade
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the
sunshade switch to stop the elec-
tronic sunshade partway.
■ Tilting the panoramic moon
roof up and down
Tilt up (press)
*
If the panoramic moon roof is open,
pressing the switch closes it up to
the tilt-up position.
If the shade is closed past the
half-open position when the switch
is pressed, it will open up to the
half-open position.
To stop operation partway, quickly
slide and release the switch again.
Tilt down (press and hold)
The panoramic moon roof can
be tilted down only when it is in
the tilt-up position.
■ Opening and closing the
panoramic moon roof
Open (slide backward)
*
To stop operation partway, quickly
slide and release the switch again.
Close (slide forward)
*
The panoramic moon roof stops
at the tilt-up position.
Slide and hold the switch again
to fully close the panoramic
moon roof.
To stop operation partway, quickly
slide and release the switch again.
Panoramic moon roof
*
Use the overhead switches
to operate the panoramic
moon roof and electronic
sunshade.
Operating the panoramic
moon roof
171
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
■ The panoramic moon roof can
be operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Operating the panoramic moon
roof after turning the engine off
The panoramic moon roof and elec-
tronic sunshade can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to ACC or
turned off. It cannot, however, be
operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Closing the shade when the
panoramic moon roof is open
1 Slide the shade switch forward.
The shade closes up to its
half-closed position and then the
panoramic moon roof closes up to
the tilt-up position.
2 Slide and hold the shade switch
again.
The panoramic moon roof closes as
long as the switch is being held.
After the panoramic moon roof is
fully closed, the shade will fully
close automatically.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the
panoramic moon roof and the frame
in the following situations, travel is
stopped and the panoramic moon
roof opens slightly:
● The panoramic moon roof is clos-
ing or tilting down.
● The electronic sunshade is clos-
ing.
■ When the panoramic moon roof
does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the panoramic moon roof closes
but then re-opens slightly
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Slide the panoramic moon roof
switch forward and hold it.
*
The panoramic moon roof will close
then reopen and pause for approxi-
mately 10 seconds. Then it will
close up to the tilt-up position.
3 Release the switch and then
slide it forward and hold it again.
The panoramic moon roof will close
as long as the switch is being held.
4 Check to make sure that the pan-
oramic moon roof is completely
closed and then release the
switch.
● If the panoramic moon roof tilts
down but then tilts back up
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Slide the panoramic moon roof
switch forward and hold it.
*
The panoramic moon roof will tilt
down then tilt up and pause for
approximately 10 seconds. Then it
will close.
3 Check to make sure that the pan-
oramic moon roof is completely
closed and then release the
switch.
*
: If the switch is released at the
incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from
the beginning.
If the panoramic moon roof does not
fully close even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ When the shade does not close
normally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Close the panoramic moon roof.
172
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3 Slide the shade switch forward
and hold it.
*
The shade will close then reopen
and pause for approximately10 sec-
onds. Then it will close.
4 Check to make sure that the
shade is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*
: If the switch is released at the
incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from
the beginning.
If the shade continues to close but
then reopens slightly even after per-
forming the above procedure cor-
rectly, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
■ Panoramic moon roof open
warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is
shown on the multi-information dis-
play when the engine switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the panoramic moon
roof open.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
■ Opening and closing the elec-
tronic sunshade
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the elec-
tronic sunshade is being oper-
ated.
● Do not let a child operate the
electronic sunshade. Closing
the electronic sunshade on
someone can cause death or
serious injury.
■ Opening the panoramic moon
roof
● Do not allow any passengers to
put their hands or heads outside
the vehicle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the pan-
oramic moon roof.
■ Opening and closing the pan-
oramic moon roof
● The driver is responsible for
panoramic moon roof opening
and closing operations. In order
to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the panoramic
moon roof. It is possible for chil-
dren and other passengers to
have body parts caught in the
panoramic moon roof.
173
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
3
Before driving
WARNING
● Check to make sure that all pas-
sengers do not have any part of
their body in a position where it
could be caught when the pan-
oramic moon roof is being oper-
ated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn
the engine switch off, carry the
key and exit the vehicle along
with the child. There may be
accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body
to intentionally activate the jam
protection function.
● The jam protection function may
not work if something gets
caught just before the pan-
oramic moon roof or electronic
sunshade is fully closed. Also,
the jam protection function is
not designed to operate while
the switch is being pressed.
Take care so that your fingers,
etc. do not get caught.
■ To prevent burns or injuries
Do not touch the area between
the underside of the panoramic
moon roof and the electronic sun-
shade. Your hand may get caught
and you could injure yourself.
Also, if the vehicle is left in direct
sunlight for a long time, the under-
side of the panoramic moon roof
could become very hot and could
cause burns.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
panoramic moon roof
● Before opening the panoramic
moon roof, make sure that there
are no foreign objects, such as
stones or ice, around the open-
ing.
● Do not hit the surface or edge of
the panoramic moon roof with
hard objects.
■ After the vehicle has been
washed or rained on
Before opening the panoramic
moon roof, wipe any water off the
panoramic moon roof. Otherwise,
water may enter the cabin when
the panoramic moon roof is
opened.
174
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
HIGHLANDER_U
175
HIGHLANDER_U
4
4
Driving
Driving
.
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle....... 177
Cargo and luggage ..... 184
Vehicle load limits ....... 187
Trailer towing............... 188
Dinghy towing ............. 199
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
.................................. 200
Automatic transmission
.................................. 204
Turn signal lever.......... 208
Parking brake.............. 209
Brake Hold.................. 212
4-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.......... 214
Automatic High Beam. 217
Fog light switch........... 220
Windshield wipers and
washer....................... 220
Rear windshield wiper and
washer....................... 223
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
.................................. 225
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
.................................. 227
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
..................................233
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
..................................241
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
..................................251
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
..................................254
Stop & Start system ....264
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
..................................270
Intuitive parking assist. 276
RCTA (Rear cross traffic
alert) function.............284
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)........................289
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects) .... 296
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear-crossing vehi-
cles)...........................302
Driving mode select switch
..................................306
Multi-terrain Select......307
Snow mode switch ...... 310
Downhill assist control sys-
tem ............................311
Driving assist systems
..................................313
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips........319
176
HIGHLANDER_U
Utility vehicle precautions
.................................. 322
4
Driving
177
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
4-1.Before driving
■ Starting the engine
P.200
■ Driving
1 With the brake pedal
depressed, shift the shift
lever to D. (P.204)
2 Release the parking brake.
(P.209)
If the parking brake is in automatic
mode, the parking brake is
released automatically when shift-
ing the shift lever to any position
other than P. (P.209)
3 Gradually release the brake
pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to acceler-
ate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
1 With the shift lever in D,
depress the brake pedal.
Vehicles with a Stop & Start system:
If the Stop & Start system is
enabled, depressing the brake
pedal will stop the engine.
2 If necessary, set the parking
brake. (P.209)
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N. (P.204)
■ Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift lever in D,
depress the brake pedal.
2 Set the parking brake
(P.209), and shift the shift
lever to P (P.204).
3 Press the engine switch to
stop the engine.
4 Lock the door, making sure
that you have the electronic
key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels
as needed.
■ Starting off on a steep
uphill
1 With the brake pedal
depressed, shift the shift
lever to D. (P.205)
2 Pull the parking brake switch
and parking brake is set man-
ually. (P.209)
3 Release the brake pedal and
gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the
vehicle.
4 Push the parking brake
switch and parking brake is
released manually.
■ When starting off on a uphill
The hill-start assist control will acti-
vate. (P.313)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining,
because visibility will be reduced,
the windows may become
fogged-up, and the road will be
slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures
should be observed to
ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure
178
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
rain, because the road surface will
be especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when
driving on an expressway in the
rain, because there may be a
layer of water between the tires
and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from
operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the
engine speed may become high
while driving. This is due to auto-
matic up-shifting control or
down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not
indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving
uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is
released
● When the brake pedal is
depressed while sport mode is
selected
■ Restraining the engine output
(Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake
pedals are depressed at the same
time, the engine output may be
restrained.
● A warning message is displayed
on the multi-information display
and head-up display (if equipped)
while the system is operating.
■ Restraining sudden start
(Drive-Start Control)
● When the following unusual oper-
ation is performed, the engine out-
put may be restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from
R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P
to R (D includes M) with the accel-
erator pedal depressed, a warning
message appears on the
multi-information display and
head-up display (if equipped). If a
warning message is shown on the
multi-information display and
head-up display (if equipped),
read the message and follow the
instructions.
• When the accelerator pedal is
depressed too much while the
vehicle is in reverse.
● While Drive-Start Control is being
activated, your vehicle may have
trouble escaping from the mud or
fresh snow. In such case, deacti-
vate TRAC (P.314) to cancel
Drive-Start Control so that the
vehicle may become able to
escape from the mud or fresh
snow.
● AWD models: Drive-Start Control
does not work when Mud & Sand
or Rock & Dirt mode is selected
for Multi-terrain Select.
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle,
observing the following precautions
is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high
speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low
gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed
for extended periods.
■ Operating your vehicle in a for-
eign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle
registration laws and confirm the
availability of the correct fuel.
(P.495)
■ Eco-friendly driving
P.84, 93
179
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the
brake pedal while stopped with
the engine running. This prevents
the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamil-
iar with the location of the brake
and accelerator pedals to avoid
depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the
accelerator pedal instead of the
brake pedal will result in sudden
acceleration that may lead to an
accident.
• When backing up, you may twist
your body around, leading to a
difficulty in operating the pedals.
Make sure to operate the pedals
properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct
driving posture even when mov-
ing the vehicle only slightly. This
allows you to depress the brake
and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using
your right foot. Depressing the
brake pedal using your left foot
may delay response in an emer-
gency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or
stop the vehicle near flammable
materials.
The exhaust system and
exhaust gases can be
extremely hot. These hot parts
may cause a fire if there is any
flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not
turn off the engine. Turning the
engine off while driving will not
cause loss of steering or brak-
ing control, but the power assist
to these systems will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should
pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an
emergency, such as if it
becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way:
P.442
● Use engine braking (downshift)
to maintain a safe speed when
driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously
may cause the brakes to over-
heat and lose effectiveness.
(
P.204)
● Do not adjust the positions of
the steering wheel, the seat, or
the inside or outside rear view
mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of
vehicle control.
● Always check that all passen-
gers’ arms, heads or other parts
of their body are not outside the
vehicle.
● AWD models: This is not an
AWD vehicle designed for
off-road driving. Proceed with all
due caution if it becomes
unavoidable to drive off-road.
● Do not drive across a river or
through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/elec-
tronic components to short cir-
cuit, damage the engine or
cause other serious damage to
the vehicle.
180
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit. Even if the legal
speed limit permits it, do not
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)
unless your vehicle has
high-speed capability tires. Driv-
ing over 85 mph (140 km/h)
may result in tire failure, loss of
control and possible injury. Be
sure to consult a tire dealer to
determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed
capability tires or not before
driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration
and steering may cause tire
slippage and reduce your ability
to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine
braking due to shifting, or
changes in engine speed could
cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle,
lightly depress the brake pedal
to make sure that the brakes
are functioning properly. Wet
brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning prop-
erly. If the brakes on only one
side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may
be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll back-
ward while the shift lever is in a
driving position, or roll forward
while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine
to stall or lead to poor brake and
steering performance, resulting
in an accident or damage to the
vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R
while the vehicle is moving for-
ward.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a
driving position while the vehicle
is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the trans-
mission and may result in a loss
of vehicle control.
● Shifting the shift lever to N while
the vehicle is moving will disen-
gage the engine. Engine brak-
ing is not available when N is
selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal
depressed. Shifting the shift
lever to any position other than
P or N may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident and
result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or
scraping noise (brake pad
wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and
replaced by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the
pads are not replaced when
needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle
when the wear limits of the brake
pads and/or those of the brake
discs are exceeded.
181
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the shift lever is in any posi-
tion other than P or N, the vehi-
cle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an
accident.
● In order to prevent accidents
due to the vehicle rolling away,
always keep depressing the
brake pedal while the engine is
running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an
incline, in order to prevent acci-
dents caused by the vehicle roll-
ing forward or backward, always
depress the brake pedal and
securely apply the parking
brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the
engine.
Running the engine at high
speed while the vehicle is
stopped may cause the exhaust
system to overheat, which could
result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette
lighters, spray cans, or soft
drink cans in the vehicle when it
is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the fol-
lowing:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette
lighter or spray can, and may
lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the
vehicle may cause the plastic
lenses and plastic material of
glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture,
causing the contents to spray
over the interior of the vehicle,
and may also cause a short cir-
cuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in
the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter
is in a place such as the glove
box or on the floor, it may be lit
accidentally when luggage is
loaded or the seat is adjusted,
causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to
the windshield or windows. Do
not place containers such as air
fresheners on the instrument
panel or dashboard. Adhesive
discs or containers may act as
lenses, causing a fire in the
vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window
open if the curved glass is
coated with a metallized film
such as a silver-colored one.
Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, caus-
ing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake,
shift the shift lever to P, stop the
engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unat-
tended while the engine is run-
ning.
If the vehicle is parked with the
shift lever in P but the parking
brake is not set, the vehicle may
start to move, possibly leading
to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes
while the engine is running or
immediately after turning the
engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
182
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ When taking a nap in the vehi-
cle
Always turn the engine off. Other-
wise, if you accidentally move the
shift lever or depress the acceler-
ator pedal, this could cause an
accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the
vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-
lated area, exhaust gases may
collect and enter the vehicle, lead-
ing to death or a serious health
hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive
more cautiously.
Braking distance increases
when the brakes are wet, and
this may cause one side of the
vehicle to brake differently than
the other side. Also, the parking
brake may not securely hold the
vehicle.
● If the brake booster device does
not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills
or sharp turns that require brak-
ing.
In this case, braking is still pos-
sible, but the brake pedal
should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the brak-
ing distance will increase. Have
your brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if
the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal
uses up the reserve for the
power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2
individual hydraulic systems; if
one of the systems fails, the
other will still operate. In this
case, the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance
will increase. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
(AWD models)
Do not spin the wheels exces-
sively when any of the tires is up
in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, etc. This may damage
the driveline components or pro-
pel the vehicle forward or back-
ward, causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator
and brake pedals at the same
time during driving, as this may
restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator
pedal or depress the accelera-
tor and brake pedals at the
same time to hold the vehicle on
a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake and
shift the shift lever to P. Failure to
do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator
pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle
parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel
fully in either direction and hold
it there for an extended period
of time.
Doing so may damage the
power steering motor.
183
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
NOTICE
● When driving over bumps on
the road, drive as slowly as pos-
sible to avoid damaging the
wheels, underside of the vehi-
cle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driv-
ing
A flat or damaged tire may cause
the following situations. Hold the
steering wheel firmly and gradu-
ally depress the brake pedal to
slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your
vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal
sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnor-
mally.
Information on what to do in case
of a flat tire (
P.464)
■ When encountering flooded
roads
Do not drive on a road that has
flooded after heavy rain etc.
Doing so may cause the following
serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by
water immersion
In the event that you drive on a
flooded road and the vehicle is
flooded, be sure to have your Toy-
ota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality
of oil and fluid used for the
engine, transaxle, transfer
(AWD models), rear differential
(AWD models), etc.
● Lubricant condition for the pro-
peller shaft (AWD models),
bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the func-
tion of all joints, bearings, etc.
184
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
Cargo capacity depends on the
total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load
capacity) — (Total weight of
occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined
weight of the driver and passen-
gers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and passen-
gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passen-
gers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 −
750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehi-
cle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
(P.187)
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P.492)
When 2 people with the com-
bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-
ing in your vehicle, which has a
total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity will
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following
information about storage
precautions, cargo capacity
and load.
Capacity and distribution
Calculation formula for
your vehicle
185
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B
*2
lb. (kg) - A
*1
lb. (kg) = C
*3
lb.
(kg)
*1
:A =Weight of people
*2
:B =Total load capacity
*3
:C =Available cargo and luggage
load
In this condition, if 3 more passen-
gers with the combined weight of D
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo
and luggage load will be reduced E
lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D
*4
lb. (kg) = E
*5
lb.
(kg)
*4
:D =Additional weight of people
*5
:E =Available cargo and luggage
load
As shown in the example above,
if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and lug-
gage load will be reduced by an
amount that equals the
increased weight due to the
additional occupants. In other
words, if an increase in the num-
ber of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity
(combined weight of occupants
plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and
luggage on your vehicle.
WARNING
■ Things that must not be car-
ried in the luggage compart-
ment
The following things may cause a
fire if loaded in the luggage com-
partment:
● Receptacles containing gaso-
line
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
pedals from being depressed
properly, may block the driver’s
vision, or may result in items hit-
ting the driver or passengers, pos-
sibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the
luggage compartment when-
ever possible.
● Do not stack cargo and luggage
in the luggage compartment
higher than the seatbacks.
● When you fold down the rear
seats, long items should not be
placed directly behind the front
seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It is
not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats
with their seat belts properly
fastened.
● Do not place cargo or luggage
in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear
seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant
compartment.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum
axle weight rating or the total
vehicle weight rating.
186
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Even if the total load of occu-
pant’s weight and the cargo
load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load
unevenly. Improper loading may
cause deterioration of steering
or braking control which may
cause death or serious injury.
■ When using a roof luggage
carrier (vehicles with roof
rails)
Observe the following precau-
tions:
● Place the cargo so that its
weight is distributed evenly
between the front and rear
axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo,
never exceed the vehicle overall
length or width. (
P.492)
● Before driving, make sure the
cargo is securely fastened on
the roof luggage carrier.
● Loading cargo on the roof lug-
gage carrier will make the cen-
ter of gravity of the vehicle
higher. Avoid high speeds, sud-
den starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle
correctly and result in death or
serious injury.
● If driving for a long distance, on
rough roads, or at high speeds,
stop the vehicle now and then
during the trip to make sure the
cargo remains in its place.
● Do not exceed 165 lb. (75 kg)
cargo weight on the roof lug-
gage carrier.
NOTICE
■ When loading cargo
Be careful not to scratch the sur-
face of the moon roof or pan-
oramic moon roof.
187
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Total load capacity and seating
capacity
These details are also described on
the tire and loading information
label. (P.423)
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include
total load capacity, seating
capacity, trailer weight rat-
ing and cargo capacity.
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight): P.492
Total load capacity means the
combined weight of occupants,
cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity: P.492
Seating capacity means the max-
imum number of occupants
whose estimated average weight
is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
TWR (Trailer Weight Rat-
ing): P.193, 492
TWR means the maximum gross
trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle
is able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or
decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occu-
pants.
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to
the tires, but also degrade steer-
ing and braking ability, resulting in
an accident.
188
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Matching trailer ball height to
trailer coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safe trailer
hookup, the trailer ball setup must
be the proper height for the coupler
on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions
are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires
are properly inflated. (P.499)
● Trailer tires are inflated according
to the trailer manufacturer’s rec-
ommendation.
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed pri-
marily as a passen-
ger-and-load-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer can
have an adverse impact on
handling, performance,
braking, durability, and fuel
consumption. For your
safety and the safety of oth-
ers, you must not overload
your vehicle or trailer. You
must also ensure that you
are using appropriate tow-
ing equipment, that the tow-
ing equipment has been
installed correctly and used
properly, and that you
employ the requisite driv-
ing habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and
braking performance are
affected by trailer stability,
brake performance and set-
ting, trailer brakes, the hitch
and hitch systems (if
equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use
extreme care and drive the
vehicle in accordance with
your trailer’s characteris-
tics and operating condi-
tions.
Toyota warranties do not
apply to damage or mal-
function caused by towing a
trailer for commercial pur-
poses.
Contact your Toyota dealer
for further information
about additional require-
ments such as a towing kit,
etc.
189
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
● All trailer lights work as required
by law.
● All lights work each time you con-
nect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper
height for the coupler on the
trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is
hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not
level, and check for improper
tongue weight, overloading, worn
suspension, or other possible
causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely
loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to
all applicable federal, state/provin-
cial or local regulations. If they do
not, install rear view mirrors
appropriate for towing purposes.
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped
with any new power train compo-
nents (such as an engine, transaxle,
transfer [AWD models], rear differ-
ential [AWD models] or wheel bear-
ing), Toyota recommends that you
do not tow a trailer until the vehicle
has been driven for over 500 miles
(800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km), you can
start towing. However, for the next
500 miles (800 km), drive the vehi-
cle at a speed of less than 50 mph
(80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and
avoid full throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle
will require more frequent mainte-
nance due to the additional load.
(See “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Sup-
plement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the
towing ball and bracket after
approximately 600 miles (1000
km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds,
passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.)
can adversely affect handling of
your vehicle and trailer, causing
instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel.
Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer sway-
ing by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator
pedal immediately but very gradu-
ally to reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not
apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction
with the steering or brakes, your
vehicle and trailer should stabilize.
(if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can
also help to stabilize the vehicle and
trailer.)
● After the trailer swaying has
stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occu-
pants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and
the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not
shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is
appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not over-
loaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the
speed at which trailer swaying
occurred is beyond the limit of your
particular vehicle-trailer combina-
tion. Drive at a lower speed to pre-
vent instability. Remember that
swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer
increases as speed increases.
190
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use
extreme care and drive the vehi-
cle in accordance with the trailer’s
characteristics and operating con-
ditions. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury. Vehicle
stability and braking performance
are affected by trailer stability,
brake setting and performance,
and the hitch. Your vehicle will
handle differently when towing a
trailer.
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR,
unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR
or GAWR.
● If the gross trailer weight is over
2000 lb. (900 kg), a sway con-
trol device with sufficient capac-
ity is required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over
5000 lb. (2200 kg), a weight dis-
tributing hitch with sufficient
capacity is required.
● Adjust the tongue weight within
the appropriate range. Place
heavier loads as close to the
trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104
km/h), the posted towing speed
limit or the speed limit for your
trailer as set forth in your trailer
owner’s manual, whichever is
lowest. Slow down sufficiently
before making a turn, in cross
winds, on wet or slippery sur-
face, etc. to help avoid an acci-
dent. If you experience a
vehicle-trailer instability from
reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep
your vehicle speed under the
speed of which you experience
the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or
sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes sud-
denly as you may skid, resulting
in jackknifing and loss of vehicle
control. This is especially true
on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch
assembly weight, gross vehicle
weight, gross axle weight and
trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use the following sys-
tems when trailer towing.
• Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if
equipped)
● Slow down and downshift
before descending steep or long
downhill grades. Do not make
sudden downshifts while
descending steep or long down-
hill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more
likely on steep long downhills.
Before descending steep or
long downhill grades, slow
down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts when
descending steep or long down-
hill grades. Avoid holding the
brake pedal down too long or
applying the brakes too fre-
quently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Vehicles with a compact spare
tire: Do not tow a trailer when
the compact spare tire is
installed on your vehicle.
191
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ GCWR (Gross Combination
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum
of the total vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
weight of the trailer being towed
(including the cargo in the
trailer).
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehi-
cle weight is the total weight of
the vehicle. When towing a
trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle
weight (including the occu-
pants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehi-
cle) and the tongue weight.
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).
WARNING
■ When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any appli-
cable federal and state/provincial
regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight
exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer
brakes are required. Toyota rec-
ommends trailers with brakes
that conform to all applicable
federal and state/provincial reg-
ulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic system, as this will
lower the vehicle’s braking
effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using
a safety chain securely attached
to both the trailer and the vehi-
cle. If damage occurs to the
coupling unit or hitch ball, there
is danger of the trailer wander-
ing into another lane.
Towing related terms
192
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming
base vehicle with one driver,
one front passenger, towing
package (if available), hitch and
hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, pas-
sengers and cargo in the vehicle
will reduce the trailer weight rating
so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR
and GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds
3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recom-
mended to use a trailer with 2 or
more axles.
With brakes
■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked
Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for tow-
ing a trailer without a trailer ser-
vice brake system.
Without brakes
■ Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer
hitch ball. (P.193)
193
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
The gross trailer weight must
never exceed 5000 lb. (2200
kg).
The gross combination weight
must never exceed the follow-
ing:
• 2WD models: 10830 lb. (4845 kg)
• AWD models: 10935 lb. (4890 kg)
The gross vehicle weight
must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the Certi-
fication Label. (P.492)
The gross axle weight on
each axle must never exceed
the GAWR indicated on the
Certification Label. (P.492)
If the gross trailer weight is
over the unbraked TWR,
trailer service brakes are
required.
If the gross trailer weight is
over 2000 lb. (900 kg), a sway
control device with sufficient
capacity is required.
If the gross trailer weight is
over 5000 lb. (2200 kg), a
weight distributing hitch with
sufficient capacity is required.
Confirm that the gross trailer
weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and tongue
weight are all within the limits.
■ GCWR
*
2WD models: 10830 lb. (4845
kg)
AWD models: 10935 lb. (4890
kg)
■ TWR
*
5000 lb. (2200 kg)
■ Unbraked TWR
*
1000 lb. (450 kg)
*
: These models meet the tow-vehi-
cle trailering requirement of SAE
International per SAE J2807.
A recommended tongue
weight varies in accordance
with the types of trailers or
towing as described below.
To ensure the recommended
values shown below, the
trailer must be loaded by
referring to the following
instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be
distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%.
(Tongue weight/Gross trailer weight
x 100 = 9% to 11%)
Weight limits
GCWR, TWR and
Unbraked TWR
Trailer Tongue Weight
194
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
If using a weight distributing hitch
when towing, return the front axle to
the same weight as before the
trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be mea-
sured directly, measure the front
fender height above the front axle
before connection. Adjust weight
distributing hitch torque until front
fender is returned to the same
height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle
weight and tongue weight can be
measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing sta-
tion, building supply company,
trucking company, junk yard, etc.
Trailer hitch assemblies have
different weight capacities. Toy-
ota recommends the use of Toy-
ota hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
If you wish to install a trailer
hitch, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Use only a hitch that con-
forms to the gross trailer
weight requirement of your
vehicle.
Follow the directions supplied
by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a
light coating of grease.
Remove the hitch ball when-
ever you are not towing a
trailer. Remove the trailer
hitch if you do not need it.
After removing the hitch, seal
any mounting hole in the vehi-
cle body to prevent entry of
any substances into the vehi-
cle.
Hitch
NOTICE
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have dif-
ferent weight capacities estab-
lished by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be
physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must
determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the
maximum weight rating specified
for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the
trailer-hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious personal injuries.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recom-
mended by your Toyota dealer.
Do not install the trailer hitch on
the bumper; this may cause body
damage.
195
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Use the correct trailer ball for
your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer cou-
pler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of the
lock washer and nut at least 2
threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diame-
ter size.
Weight carrying ball position:
50.7 in. (1289 mm)
Use the wire harness stored in
the rear end under body.
Please consult your dealer
when installing trailer lights, as
incorrect installation may cause
damage to the vehicle’s lights.
Please take care to comply with
your state’s laws when install-
ing trailer lights.
■ Auto current cut-off function
In case of over current, the auto
cut-off function stops the power
flowing to the trailer lights to prevent
damage to the vehicle’s electrical
system.
Selecting trailer ball
Trailer class
Typical trailer ball
size
IV 2 5/16 in.
II and III 2 in.
I 1 7/8 in.
Positions for towing hitch
ball
Connecting trailer lights
196
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
This function is activated when the
rated current of any of the following
trailer light circuit components is
exceeded:
● Tail lights: maximum 4.5 A
● Stop/turn signal light (right): maxi-
mum 7.8 A
● Stop/turn signal light (left): maxi-
mum 4.5 A
■ When the auto current cut func-
tion is activated
If a trailer light does not come on
due to the activation of the auto cur-
rent cut function, the light system
will need to be reset.
Follow the reset procedure shown
below.
● If a tail light does not come on,
turn off the headlight switch.
● If the right-side stop/turn signal
light does not come on, put the
turn signal in the off position or
remove foot from the brake pedal.
● If the left-side stop/turn signal light
does not come on, put the turn
signal in the off position or remove
foot from the brake pedal.
If the emergency flashers do not
operate, press the emergency
flasher switch to turn them off.
After the light system is reset, oper-
ate the light switches again to see if
the lights operate normally.
If the lights do not operate normally,
have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
Your vehicle will handle differ-
ently when towing a trailer. Help
to avoid an accident, death or
serious injury, keep the following
in mind when towing:
Speed limits for towing a
trailer vary by state or prov-
ince. Do not exceed the
posted towing speed limit.
Toyota recommends that the
vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65
mph (104 km/h) on a flat,
straight, dry road. Do not
exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as
set forth in your trailer owner’s
manual, whichever is lowest.
Instability of the towing vehi-
cle-trailer combination (trailer
sway) increases as speed
increases. Exceeding speed
limits may cause loss of con-
trol.
Before starting out, check the
trailer lights, tires and the
vehicle-trailer connections.
Recheck after driving a short
distance.
Practice turning, stopping and
reversing with the trailer
attached in an area away
from traffic until you become
accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
Reversing with a trailer
attached is difficult and
NOTICE
■ Do not directly splice trailer
lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights.
Directly splicing trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction.
Trailer towing tips
197
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
requires practice. Grip the
bottom of the steering wheel
and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the
right to move the trailer to
right. (This is generally oppo-
site to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp
or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when
reversing to reduce the risk of
an accident.
As stopping distance is
increased when towing a
trailer, vehicle-to vehicle dis-
tance should be increased.
For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one
vehicle and trailer length.
Avoid sudden braking as you
may skid, resulting in the
trailer jackknifing and a loss of
vehicle control. This is espe-
cially true on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden
acceleration.
Avoid jerky steering and
sharp turns, and slow down
before making turn.
Note that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be
closer than the vehicle wheels
to the inside of the turn. Com-
pensate by making a wider
than normal turning radius.
Slow down before making a
turn, in cross winds, on wet or
slippery surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can
destabilize the trailer.
Take care when passing other
vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After
passing a vehicle, do not for-
get the length of your trailer,
and be sure you have plenty
of room before changing
lanes.
To maintain engine braking
efficiency and charging sys-
tem performance when using
engine braking, do not put the
transmission in D. If in the M
mode, the transmission shift
range position must be in 6 or
lower. (P.204)
Instability happens more fre-
quently when descending
steep or long downhill grades.
Before descending, slow
down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts
while descending steep or
long downhill grades.
Avoid holding the brake pedal
down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to
overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
Due to the added load of the
trailer, your vehicle’s engine
may overheat on hot days (at
temperatures over 85°F
[30°C]) when driving up a long
198
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
or steep grade. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge
indicates overheating, imme-
diately turn off the air condi-
tioning (if in use), pull your
vehicle off the road and stop
in a safe spot. (P.487)
Always place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle’s and
the trailer’s wheels when
parking. Put the transmission
in P and apply the parking
brake. Avoid parking on a
slope, but if unavoidable, do
so only after performing the
following:
1 Apply the brakes and keep
them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel
blocks under both the vehi-
cle’s and trailer’s wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in
place, release the brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb
the load.
4 Shift into P and apply the
parking brake.
5 Turn off the engine.
When restarting after parking
on a slope:
1 With the transmission in P,
start the engine. Be sure to
keep the brake pedal
depressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If
reversing, shift into R.
3 If the parking brake is in man-
ual mode, release the park-
ing brake. (P.209)
4 Release the brake pedal, and
slowly pull or back away from
the wheel blocks. Stop and
apply the brakes.
5 Have someone retrieve the
blocks.
199
4-1. Before driving
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed
to be dinghy towed (with 4
wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to
your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the 4
wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent causing serious
damage to the transmission
and AWD system
2WD models: Never tow this vehi-
cle from the rear with the front
wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage
to the transmission.
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to
prevent causing serious damage
to the Dynamic Torque Control
AWD system (AWD models) or
Dynamic Torque Vectoring AWD
system (AWD models) and trans-
mission.
200
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4-2.Driving procedures
1 Check that the parking brake
is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is in
P.
3 Firmly depress the brake
pedal.
and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
If it is not displayed, the engine
cannot be started.
4 Press the engine switch
shortly and firmly.
When operating the engine switch,
one short, firm press is enough. It is
not necessary to press and hold the
switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely
started.
The engine can be started from any
engine switch mode.
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system
may not have been deactivated.
(P. 6 9)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
● If a message related to start-up is
shown on the multi-information
display, read the message and fol-
low the instructions.
■ If the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started using
the smart key system. Refer to
P.483to restart the engine.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 112
■ Conditions affecting operation
P.132
■ Note for the entry function
P.133
■ Steering lock function
● After turning the engine switch off
and opening and closing the
doors, the steering wheel will be
locked due to the steering lock
function. Operating the engine
switch again automatically can-
cels the steering lock.
● When the steering lock cannot be
released, “Push Engine Switch
while Turning Steering Wheel in
Either Direction” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Press the engine switch shortly
and firmly while turning the steer-
Engine (ignition)
switch
Performing the following
operations when carrying
the electronic key on your
person starts the engine or
changes engine switch
modes.
Starting the engine
201
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
ing wheel left and right.
● To prevent the steering lock motor
from overheating, operation of the
motor may be suspended if the
engine is turned on and off repeat-
edly in a short period of time. In
this case, refrain from operating
the engine switch. After about 10
seconds, the steering lock motor
will resume functioning.
■ Electronic key battery
P. 42 8
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly
and firmly, the engine switch
mode may not change or the
engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine
immediately after turning the
engine switch off, the engine may
not start in some cases. After turn-
ing the engine switch off, please
wait a few seconds before restart-
ing the engine.
■ Customization
If the smart key system has been
deactivated in a customized setting,
refer to P.481.
1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake
(P.209), and shift the shift
lever to P.
Check the parking brake indicator
is illuminated.
3 Press the engine switch.
The engine will stop, and the meter
display will be extinguished.
4 Release the brake pedal and
check that “ACCESSORY” or
“IGNITION ON” is not shown
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sit-
ting in the driver’s seat. Do not
depress the accelerator pedal
while starting the engine under
any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the
vehicle is moving, do not lock or
open the doors until the vehicle
reaches a safe and complete
stop. Activation of the steering
lock in this circumstance may lead
to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have
your vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a mal-
function with the engine
switch
If the engine switch seems to be
operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch
sticking slightly, there may be a
malfunction. Contact your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Stopping the engine
202
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Automatic engine shut off fea-
ture
● The vehicle is equipped with a
feature that automatically shuts off
the engine when the shift lever is
in P with the engine running for an
extended period.
● The engine will automatically shut
off after approximately 1 hour if it
has been left running while the
shift lever is in P.
● The timer for the automatic engine
shut off feature will reset if the
brake pedal is depressed or if the
shift lever is in a position other
than P.
● After the vehicle is parked, if the
door is locked with the door lock
switch (P.118) from the inside or
the mechanical key from the out-
side, the automatic engine shut off
feature will be disabled. The timer
for the automatic engine shut off
feature will be re-enabled if the
driver’s door is opened.
WARNING
■ Stopping the engine in an
emergency
● If you want to stop the engine in
an emergency while driving the
vehicle, press and hold the
engine switch for more than 2
seconds, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
(
P.442)
However, do not touch the
engine switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turn-
ing the engine off while driving
will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power
assist to these systems will be
lost. This will make it more diffi-
cult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
● If the engine switch is operated
while the vehicle is running, a
warning message will be shown
on the multi-information display
and a buzzer sounds.
● To restart the engine after per-
forming an emergency shut-
down, shift the shift lever to N
and then press the engine
switch.
■ When parking
Exhaust gases include harmful
carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Observe
the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle
and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-
lated area or a closed area,
such as a garage, stop the
engine.
203
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Modes can be changed by
pressing the engine switch with
brake pedal released. (The
mode changes each time the
switch is pressed.)
1 OFF
*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
2 ACC
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
3 ON
All electrical components can be
used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*
: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off the
engine, the engine switch will be
turned to ACC, not to OFF.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACC for more
than 20 minutes or ON (the engine
is not running) for more than an
hour with the shift lever in P, the
engine switch will automatically turn
off. However, this function cannot
entirely prevent battery discharge.
Do not leave the vehicle with the
engine switch in ACC or ON for long
periods of time when the engine is
not running.
WARNING
● Do not leave the vehicle with
the engine running for a long
time. If such a situation cannot
be avoided, park the vehicle in
an open space and ensure that
exhaust fumes do not enter the
vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running
in an area with snow build-up,
or where it is snowing. If snow-
banks build up around the vehi-
cle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle.
Changing engine switch
modes
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch
in ACC or ON for long periods of
time without the engine running.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION
ON” is displayed on the
multi-information display, the
engine switch is not off. Exit the
vehicle after turning the engine
switch off.
204
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
If the engine is stopped with the
shift lever in a position other
than P, the engine switch will not
be turned off but instead be
turned to ACC. Perform the fol-
lowing procedure to turn the
switch off:
1 Check that the parking brake
is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that “ACCESSORY” is
displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display and press the
engine switch shortly and
firmly.
4 Check that “ACCESSORY”
or “IGNITION ON” on the
multi-information display are
off.
*1
:Shifting to the D position allows
the system to select a gear suit-
able for the driving conditions.
Setting the shift lever to the D
position is recommended for nor-
mal driving.
*2
:Selecting gears using M mode
fixes the gear step, controls
engine braking force, and pre-
vents unnecessary upshifting.
■ To protect the automatic trans-
mission
If the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is high, “High Trans-
mission Fluid Temp See Owner's
Manual” will be displayed on the
multi-information display and the
vehicle will go into transmission pro-
tection mode automatically. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
When stopping the engine
with the shift lever in a
position other than P
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not stop the engine when the
shift lever is in a position other
than P. If the engine is stopped in
another shift lever position, the
engine switch will not be turned
off but instead be turned to ACC.
If the vehicle is left in ACC, bat-
tery discharge may occur.
Automatic transmis-
sion
Select the shift position
depending on your purpose
and situation.
Shift position purpose
Shift posi-
tion
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehi-
cle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D
Normal driving
*1
M
M mode driving
*2
(P.206)
205
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ When driving with dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range activated
Even when switching the driving
mode to sport mode with the intent
of enabling engine braking, engine
braking will not activate because
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range will not be can-
celed.
■ Restraining sudden start
(Drive-Start Control)
P. 17 8
■ AI-SHIFT
● The AI-SHIFT automatically
selects the suitable gear accord-
ing to driver performance and driv-
ing conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically oper-
ates when the shift lever is in D.
(Shifting the shift lever to the M posi-
tion cancels the function.)
● G AI-SHIFT automatically selects
a suitable gear for sporty driving
according to driver’s input and
driving conditions. G AI-SHIFT
operates automatically when the
shift lever is in D and sport mode
is selected for the driving mode.
(Selecting normal mode with the
driving mode select switch or shift-
ing the shift lever to the M position
cancels this function.)
: While the engine switch is in
ON and the brake pedal
depressed
*
, shift the shift lever
while pushing the shift release
button on the shift knob.
: Shift the shift lever while
pushing the shift release button
on the shift knob.
: Shift the shift lever normally.
When shifting the shift lever
between P and D, make sure that
the vehicle is completely stopped.
*
: For the vehicle to be able to be
shifted from P, the brake pedal
must be depressed before the
shift release button is pushed. If
the shift release button is pushed
first, the shift lock will not be
released.
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to
prevent accidental operation of the
shift lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P
only when the engine switch is in
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery
road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and
sudden acceleration, as this could
result in the vehicle skidding to
the side or spinning.
Shifting the shift lever
206
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
ON and the brake pedal is being
depressed.
■ If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal
is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the
shift lock system. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as
an emergency measure to ensure
that the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1 Turn the engine switch to ON
and check that the parking brake
is set. (P.203, 209)
2 Turn the engine switch to off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
5 Press and hold the shift lock
override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while
both buttons are pressed.
P.306, 310
To enter M mode, shift the shift
lever to M. Gears can then be
selected by operating the shift
lever, allowing you to drive in the
gear of your choosing.
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident when
releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock
override button, make sure to set
the parking brake and depress the
brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed instead of the
brake pedal when the shift lock
override button is pressed and the
shift lever is shifted out of P, the
vehicle may suddenly start, possi-
bly leading to an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
Selecting the driving
mode and snow mode
Selecting gears in the M
position
207
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The gear changes once every time
the shift lever or paddle shift switch
is operated.
The selected gear, from M1 to M8,
will be fixed and displayed on the
meters.
When in the M position, the gear
will not change unless the shift
lever is operated.
However, even when in the M
position, the gears will be auto-
matically changed in the follow-
ing situation:
When vehicle speed drops
(downshift only).
When the automatic transmis-
sion fluid or engine coolant
temperature is low.
When automatic transmis-
sion fluid temperature is high
(upshift only).
When the needle of the
tachometer is in the red zone
(the range which exceeds the
allowable revs of the engine).
In the following situations, the
gear will not shift even if the shift
lever is operated.
The vehicle speed is low
(upshift only).
■ Downshifting restriction warn-
ing buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving
performance, downshifting opera-
tion may sometimes be restricted. In
some circumstances, downshifting
may not be possible even when the
paddle shift switch is operated. (A
buzzer will sound twice.)
208
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
3 Lane change to the left
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
4 Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated
when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ If the indicator flashes faster
than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or
rear turn signal lights has not
burned out.
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
209
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Using the manual mode
The parking brake can be set
and released manually.
U.S.A.
Canada
1 Pull the switch to set the
parking brake
The parking brake indicator light
and parking brake light will turn on.
Pull and hold the parking brake
switch if an emergency occurs and
it is necessary to operate the park-
ing brake while driving.
2 Push the switch to release
the parking brake
• Operate the parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
• Parking brake automatic release
function (P.210)
Make sure that the parking brake
indicator light and parking brake
light turn off.
If the parking brake indicator light
and parking brake light flashes,
operate the switch again. (P.457)
■ Turns automatic mode on
While the vehicle is stopped,
pull and hold the parking brake
switch until a “EPB Shift Inter-
lock Function Activated” is
shown on the multi-information
display.
When the automatic mode is
turned on, the parking brake
operates as follows.
When the shift lever is moved
out of P, the parking brake will
be released, and the parking
brake indicator light and park-
ing brake light turn off.
Parking brake
The parking brake can be
set or released automati-
cally or manually.
In automatic mode, the
parking brake can be set or
released automatically
according to the shift lever
operation. Also, even in
automatic mode, the park-
ing brake can be set or
released manually.
Operating instructions
210
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
When the shift lever is moved
into P, the parking brake will
be set, and the parking brake
indicator light and parking
brake light turn on.
Operate the shift lever with the
brake pedal depressed.
■ Turns automatic mode off
While the vehicle is stopped,
press and hold the parking
brake switch until a “EPB Shift
Interlock Function Deactivated”
is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
■ Parking brake operation
● When the engine switch is not in
ON, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake
switch.
● When the engine switch is not in
ON, automatic mode (automatic
brake setting and releasing) is not
available.
■ Parking brake automatic
release function
The parking brake will be released
automatically when the accelerator
pedal is slowly depressed under the
following conditions:
● The driver’s door is closed
● The driver is wearing the seat belt
● The shift lever is in a forward or
reverse position.
● The malfunction indicator lamp or
brake system warning light is not
illuminated
If the automatic release function
does not operate, release the park-
ing brake manually.
■ If “Parking Brake Temporarily
Unavailable” is displayed on
the multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated
repeatedly over a short period of
time, the system may restrict opera-
tion to prevent overheating. If this
happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will
return after about 1 minute.
■ If “Parking Brake Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
Operate the parking brake switch. If
the message does not disappear
after operating the switch several
times, the system may be malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a
motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light
and parking brake light
● Depending on the engine switch
mode, the parking brake indicator
light and parking brake light will
turn on and stay on as described
below:
ON: Comes on until the parking
brake is released.
Not in ON: Stays on for approxi-
mately 15 seconds.
● When the engine switch is turned
off with the parking brake set, the
parking brake indicator light and
parking brake light will stay on for
about 15 seconds. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
211
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ When the parking brake switch
malfunctions
Automatic mode (automatic brake
setting and releasing) will be turned
on automatically.
■ Parking the vehicle
P. 17 7
■ Parking brake engaged warning
buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is
driven with the parking brake
engaged. “Parking Brake ON” is dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunc-
tion or to inform the driver of the
need for caution. If a warning mes-
sage is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, read the message and
follow the instructions.
■ If the brake system warning
light comes on
P. 45 0
■ Usage in winter time
P. 31 9
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle
alone. The parking brake may be
released unintentionally and there
is the danger of the vehicle mov-
ing that may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Parking brake switch
Do not set any objects near the
parking brake switch. Objects
may interfere with the switch and
may lead the parking brake to
unexpectedly operate.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, shift
the shift lever to P, set the parking
brake and make sure that the
vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunc-
tions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place
and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake can-
not be released due to a mal-
function
Driving the vehicle with the park-
ing brake set will lead to brake
components overheating, which
may affect braking performance
and increase brake wear.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer immediately if
this occurs.
212
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the
system is holding the brake, the
brake hold operated indicator (yel-
low) comes on.
■ Brake hold system operating
conditions
The brake hold system cannot be
turned on in the following condi-
tions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat
belt.
● The parking brake is engaged.
If any of the conditions above are
detected when the brake hold sys-
tem is enabled, the system will turn
off and the brake hold standby indi-
cator light will go off. In addition, if
any of the conditions are detected
while the system is holding the
brake, a warning buzzer will sound
and a message will be shown on the
multi-information display. The park-
ing brake will then be set automati-
cally.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released
for a period of about 3 minutes
after the system has started hold-
ing the brake, the parking brake
will be set automatically. In this
case, a warning buzzer sounds
and a message is shown on the
multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the
system is holding the brake, firmly
depress the brake pedal and
press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not
hold the vehicle when the vehicle
is on a steep incline. In this situa-
tion, it may be necessary for the
driver to apply the brakes. A warn-
ing buzzer will sound and the
multi-information display will
inform the driver of this situation. If
a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the
instructions.
■ When the parking brake is set
automatically while the system
is holding the brakes
Perform any of the following opera-
tions to release the parking brake.
● Depress the accelerator pedal.
(The parking brake will not be
released automatically if the seat
belt is not fastened.)
● Operate the parking brake switch
with the brake pedal depressed.
Make sure that the parking brake
Brake Hold
The brake hold system
keeps the brake applied
when the shift lever is in D,
M or N with the system on
and the brake pedal has
been depressed to stop the
vehicle. The system
releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is
depressed with the shift
lever in D or M to allow
smooth start off.
Enabling the system
213
4-2. Driving procedures
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
indicator light goes off. (P.209)
■ When an inspection at your
Toyota dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indi-
cator (green) does not illuminate
even when the brake hold switch is
pressed with the brake hold system
operating conditions met, the sys-
tem may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer.
■ If “Brake Hold Malfunction
Press Brake to Deactivate Visit
Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold
Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunc-
tion or to inform the driver of the
need for caution. If a warning mes-
sage is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, read the message and
follow the instructions.
■ If the brake hold operated indi-
cator flashes
P. 45 7
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a
steep incline
When using the brake hold sys-
tem on a steep incline, exercise
caution. The brake hold function
may not hold the vehicle in such a
situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery
road
The system cannot stop the vehi-
cle when the gripping ability of the
tires has been exceeded. Do not
use the system when stopped on
a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not
designed for use when parking
the vehicle for a long period of
time. Turning the engine switch off
while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake,
which would cause the vehicle to
move. When operating the engine
switch, depress the brake pedal,
shift the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake.
214
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4-3.Operating the lights and wipers
Operating the switch
turns on the lights as follows:
U.S.A.
Canada
1 The headlights, daytime
running lights (P.214) and
all the lights listed below turn
on and off automatically.
(When the engine switch is in
ON.)
2 The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate, instru-
ment panel lights, and
daytime running lights
(P.214) turn on.
3 The headlights and all
lights listed above (except
daytime running lights) turn
on.
4 (U.S.A.) Off
■ Daytime running light system
● Vehicles without projector head-
lights: The daytime running lights
illuminate using the same lights as
the low beam headlights and illu-
minate dimmer than the low beam
headlights.
● Vehicles with projector head-
lights: The daytime running lights
illuminate using the same lights as
the parking lights and illuminate
brighter than the parking lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers during daytime
driving, the daytime running lights
turn on automatically when all of
the following conditions are met.
(The daytime running lights are
not designed for use at night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the
or
*
position
*
: When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain
on after they illuminate, even if the
parking brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running
lights can be turned off by operat-
ing the switch.
● Compared to turning on the head-
lights, the daytime running light
system offers greater durability
and consumes less electricity, so
it can help improve fuel economy.
Headlight switch
The headlights can be oper-
ated manually or automati-
cally.
Operating instructions
215
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function prop-
erly if an object is placed on the sen-
sor, or anything that blocks the
sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light
and may cause the automatic head-
light system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The
headlights and tail lights turn off
30 seconds after the driver’s door
is opened and closed if the engine
switch is turned to ACC or OFF.
(The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed after all
the doors are closed.)
● When only the tail lights are on:
The tail lights turn off automati-
cally if the engine switch is turned
to ACC or OFF and the driver’s
door is opened.
Except for Canada: To turn the lights
on again, turn the engine switch to
ON, or turn the light switch off once
and then back to or .
For Canada: To turn the lights on
again, turn the engine switch to ON,
or turn the light switch to once
and then back to or .
■ Automatic headlight leveling
system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is auto-
matically adjusted according to the
number of passengers and the load-
ing condition of the vehicle to
ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine
switch is turned off or turned to ACC
and the driver’s door is opened
while the lights are turned on.
■ Welcome lighting
The parking lights and tail lights
automatically turn on at night when
the doors are unlocked using the
entry function or wireless remote
control if the light switch is in the
position.
■ Windshield wiper linked head-
light illumination
When driving during daytime with
the headlight switch turned to , if
the windshield wipers are used, the
headlights will turn on automatically
after several seconds to help
enhance the visibility of your vehi-
cle.
■ Battery-saving function
In order to prevent the battery of the
vehicle from discharging, if the
headlights and/or tail lights are on
when the engine switch is turned off
the battery saving function will oper-
ate and automatically turn off all the
lights after approximately 20 min-
utes. When the engine switch is
turned to ON, the battery-saving
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are per-
formed, the battery-saving function
is canceled once and then reacti-
vated. All the lights will turn off auto-
matically 20 minutes after the
battery-saving function has been
reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is oper-
ated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
216
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
1 With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) secures excellent visi-
bility at intersections and on
curves by automatically adjust-
ing the direction of the light axis
of the headlights according to
vehicle speed and the degree of
the tire’s angle as controlled by
steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer
than necessary when the engine
is off.
Turning on the high beam
headlights
AFS (Adaptive Front-light-
ing System) (if equipped)
217
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
1 Press the Automatic High
Beam switch.
2 Push the lever away from
you with the headlight switch
in the or position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will come on when the system is
operating.
■ Conditions to turn the high
beams on/off automatically
● When all of the following condi-
tions are met, the high beams will
be turned on automatically (after
approximately 1 second):
• The vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with
headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the
road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions is
met, the high beams will turn off
automatically:
• The vehicle speed is below
approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is
not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have their head-
lights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the
road ahead.
■ Camera sensor detection infor-
mation
● The high beams may not be auto-
matically turned off in the following
situations:
• When a vehicle suddenly appears
Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam
uses a camera sensor
located behind the upper
portion of the windshield to
assess the brightness of the
lights of vehicles ahead,
streetlights, etc., and auto-
matically turns the high
beams on or off as neces-
sary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic
High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Auto-
matic High Beam. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe your
surroundings and turning the high
beams on or off manually if nec-
essary.
■ To prevent incorrect opera-
tion of the Automatic High
Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic
High Beam
218
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
from around a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of
by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead cannot be
detected due to repeated curves,
road dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear in a
faraway lane on a wide road
• When the lights of vehicles ahead
are not on
● The high beams may be turned off
if a vehicle ahead that is using fog
lights without its headlights turned
on is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic
signals, and illuminated billboards
or signs and other reflective
objects may cause the high
beams to change to the low
beams, or the low beams to
remain on.
● The following factors may affect
the amount of time taken for the
high beams to turn on or off:
• The brightness of the headlights,
fog lights, and tail lights of vehi-
cles ahead
• The movement and direction of
vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has
operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a
two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradi-
ent, curve, condition of the road
surface, etc.)
• The number of passengers and
amount of luggage in the vehicle
● The high beams may turn on or off
unexpectedly.
● Bicycles or similar vehicles may
not be detected.
● In the following situations the sys-
tem may not be able to correctly
detect the surrounding brightness
level. This may cause the low
beams to remain on or the high
beams to flash or dazzle pedestri-
ans or vehicles ahead. In such a
case, it is necessary to manually
switch between the high and low
beams.
• When driving in inclement weather
(heavy rain, snow, fog, sand-
storms, etc.)
• When the windshield is obscured
by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• When the windshield is cracked or
damaged
• When the camera sensor is
deformed or dirty
• When the temperature of the cam-
era sensor is extremely high
• When the surrounding brightness
level is equal to that of headlights,
tail lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of
vehicles ahead are turned off,
dirty, changing color, or not aimed
properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water,
snow, dust, etc. from a preceding
vehicle
• When driving through an area of
intermittently changing brightness
and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly
driving ascending/descending
roads, or roads with rough, bumpy
or uneven surfaces (such as
stone-paved roads, gravel roads,
etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly
taking curves or driving on a wind-
ing road
• When there is a highly reflective
object ahead of the vehicle, such
as a sign or mirror
• When the back of a preceding
vehicle is highly reflective, such as
a container on a truck
• When the vehicle’s headlights are
damaged or dirty, or are not aimed
properly
• When the vehicle is listing or titling
due to a flat tire, a trailer being
towed, etc.
• When the headlights are changed
between the high beams and low
beams repeatedly in an abnormal
manner
• When the driver believes that the
high beams may be flashing or
dazzling pedestrians or other driv-
ers
219
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Temporarily lowering sensor
sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be
temporarily lowered.
1 Turn the engine switch off while
the following conditions are met.
● The headlight switch is in or
.
● The headlight switch lever is in
high beam position.
● Automatic High Beam switch is
on.
2 Turn the engine switch to ON.
3 Within 60 seconds after step 2,
repeat pulling the headlight
switch lever to the original posi-
tion then pushing it to the high
beam position quickly 10 times,
then leave the lever in high beam
position.
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the
Automatic High Beam indicator
is turn on and off 3 times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights)
may turn on even when the vehicle
is stopped.
■ Switching to the low beams
Pull the lever to its original posi-
tion.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to
activate the Automatic High Beam
system again.
■ Switching to the high
beams
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off and the high beam indi-
cator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the
Automatic High Beam system
again.
Turning the high beams
on/off manually
220
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Turns the fog lights off
2 Turns the fog lights on
■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
Operate the lever oper-
ates the wipers or washer as fol-
lows.
Intermittent windshield wip-
ers with interval adjuster
1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Off
2 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Intermittent operation
Fog light switch
*
The fog lights secure excel-
lent visibility in difficult driv-
ing conditions, such as in
rain and fog.
Operating instructions
Windshield wipers and
washer
Operating the lever can
switch between automatic
operation and manual oper-
ation, or can use the
washer.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they
may damage the windshield.
Operating the wiper lever
221
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Low speed operation
4 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
High speed operation
5 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Temporary operation
Wiper intervals can be adjusted
when intermittent operation is
selected.
6 Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
8 Washer/wiper dual
operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
ers and washer.
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
Rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers
When “AUTO” is selected, the
wipers will operate automatically
when the sensor detects falling
rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accor-
dance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.
The sensor sensitivity can be
adjusted when “AUTO” is
selected.
1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Off
2 Rain-sensing wiper oper-
ation
3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Low speed operation
4 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
High speed operation
5 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Temporary operation
When AUTO mode is selected,
222
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
the sensor sensitivity can be
adjusted by turning the switch
ring.
6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity
8 Washer/wiper dual
operation
Pulling the lever operates the wip-
ers and washer.
The wipers will automatically oper-
ate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
■ The windshield wipers and
washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Dripping prevention wiper
sweep
After washing and wiping operation
several times, the wipers operate
one more time after a short delay to
prevent dripping. However, this
function will not operate while driv-
ing.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on
wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the intermit-
tent wiper interval.
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● The raindrop sensor judges the
amount of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It
may not operate properly when
sunlight from the rising or setting
of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs, etc. are
present on the windshield
● If the wiper switch is turned to the
“AUTO” position while the engine
switch is in ON, the wipers will
operate once to show that AUTO
mode is activated.
● When the sensor sensitivity ring is
turned toward high while in
“AUTO” position, the wipers will
operate once to indicate that the
sensor sensitivity is enhanced.
● If the temperature of the raindrop
sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher,
or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, automatic
operation may not occur. In this
case, operate the wipers in any
mode other than AUTO mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid
sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are
not blocked, if there is washer fluid
in the washer fluid tank.
■ Front door opening linked wind-
shield wiper stop function
(vehicles with rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
When “AUTO” is selected and the
223
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
windshield wipers are operating, if a
front door is opened, the operation
of the windshield wipers will be
stopped to prevent anyone enter-
ing/exiting the vehicle from being
sprayed by water from the wipers,
provided the vehicle is stopped with
the parking brake applied or the shift
lever in P. When the front door is
closed, wiper operation will resume.
Operating the switch
operates the rear wiper as fol-
lows.
1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Off
2 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Intermittent operation
3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Normal operation
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of
windshield wipers in AUTO
mode (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers)
The windshield wipers may oper-
ate unexpectedly if the sensor is
touched or the windshield is sub-
ject to vibration in AUTO mode.
Take care that your fingers, etc.
do not become caught in the
windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of
washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the
washer fluid until the windshield
becomes warm. The fluid may
freeze on the windshield and
cause low visibility. This may lead
to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is
empty
Do not operate the switch continu-
ally as the washer fluid pump may
overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes
blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or
other object. The nozzle will be
damaged.
Rear windshield wiper
and washer
NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may
damage the rear window.
Operating the wiper lever
224
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HIGHLANDER_U
4 Washer/wiper dual
operation
Pushing the lever operates the
wiper and washer.
The wiper will automatically operate
a couple of times after the washer
squirts.
The washer will automatically oper-
ate and clean the camera for the
Digital Rearview Mirror
*1
(P.157)
and rear camera
*2
.
*1
:If equipped
*2
:Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ The rear window wiper and
washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in ON.
■ If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzle is not
blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid tank.
■ Reverse-linked rear window
wiper function
When the shift lever is shifted to R
when the front wipers are operating,
the rear window wiper will operate
once.
■ Customization
Setting of the reverse-linked func-
tion can be changed. (P.515)
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is
empty
Do not operate the switch continu-
ally as the washer fluid pump may
overheat.
225
4-4. Refueling
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
4-4.Refueling
Close all the doors and win-
dows, and turn the engine
switch off.
Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
P. 50 3
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded
gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling,
your vehicle has a fuel tank opening
that only accommodates the spe-
cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If the malfunction indicator
lamp illuminates
The malfunction indicator lamp may
illuminate erroneously if refueling is
performed repeatedly when the fuel
tank is nearly full.
Opening the fuel tank
cap
Perform the following steps
to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehi-
cle
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions
while refueling the vehicle. Failure
to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and
before opening the fuel door,
touch an unpainted metal sur-
face to discharge any static
electricity. It is important to dis-
charge static electricity before
refueling because sparks result-
ing from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while
refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the
fuel tank cap and turn it slowly
to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be
heard when the fuel tank cap is
loosened. Wait until the sound
cannot be heard before fully
removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may
spray out of the filler neck and
cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has
not discharged static electricity
from their body to come close to
an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that
are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling
the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to
ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or
touch any person or object that
is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity
to build up, resulting in a possi-
ble ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions
to prevent fuel overflowing from
the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle
into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off.
226
4-4. Refueling
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Press the switch to open the
fuel filler door.
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to remove it and hang it on
the back of the fuel filler door.
■ If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened
P. 48 0
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
WARNING
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehi-
cle, such as causing the emission
control system to operate abnor-
mally or damaging fuel system
components or the vehicle’s
painted surface.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Closing the fuel tank cap
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank
cap
Do not use anything but a genu-
ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed
for your vehicle. Doing so may
cause a fire or other incident
which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
227
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
4-5.Using the driving support systems
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.233
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
P.241
■ AHB (Automatic High
Beam)
P.217
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
P.251
*
: If equipped
■ Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
P.254
Two types of sensors, located
behind the front grille and wind-
shield, detect information neces-
sary to operate the drive assist
systems.
Radar sensor
Front camera
Toyota Safety Sense
2.0
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
consists of the following
drive assist systems and
contributes to a safe and
comfortable driving experi-
ence:
Driving assist system
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
The Toyota Safety Sense 2.0 is
designed to operate under the
assumption that the driver will
drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the
occupants and the vehicle in the
case of a collision or assist the
driver in normal driving condi-
tions.
As there is a limit to the degree of
recognition accuracy and control
performance that this system can
provide, do not overly rely on this
system. The driver is always
responsible for paying attention to
the vehicle’s surroundings and
driving safely.
Sensors
228
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the
radar sensor
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may
not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and the
radar sensor cover clean at all
times.
Radar sensor
Radar sensor cover
If the front of the radar sensor or
the front or back of the radar sen-
sor cover is dirty or covered with
water droplets, snow, etc., clean
it.
Clean the radar sensor and radar
sensor cover with a soft cloth to
avoid damaging them.
● Do not attach accessories,
stickers (including transparent
stickers) or other items to the
radar sensor, radar sensor
cover or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor
or its surrounding area to a
strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille,
or front bumper has been sub-
jected to a strong impact, have
the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar
sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar
sensor or radar sensor cover.
● In the following cases, the radar
sensor must be recalibrated.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
details.
• When the radar sensor or front
grille are removed and installed,
or replaced
• When the front bumper is
replaced
■ To avoid malfunction of the
front camera
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Otherwise, the front camera may
not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all
times.
• If the windshield is dirty or cov-
ered with an oily film, water
droplets, snow, etc., clean the
windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is
applied to the windshield, it will
still be necessary to use the
windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc. from the
area of the windshield in front of
the front camera.
• If the inner side of the wind-
shield where the front camera is
installed is dirty, contact your
Toyota dealer.
229
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
WARNING
● Do not attach objects, such as
stickers, transparent stickers,
etc., to the outer side of the
windshield in front of the front
camera (shaded area in the
illustration).
From the top of the windshield
to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm)
below the bottom of the front
camera
Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm]
to the right and left from the
center of the front camera)
● If the part of the windshield in
front of the front camera is
fogged up or covered with con-
densation, or ice, use the wind-
shield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation, or ice.
(
P.329, 335)
● If water droplets cannot be
properly removed from the area
of the windshield in front of the
front camera by the windshield
wipers, replace the wiper insert
or wiper blade.
● Do not attach window tint to the
windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is
damaged or cracked.
After replacing the windshield,
the front camera must be recali-
brated. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
● Do not allow liquids to contact
the front camera.
● Do not allow bright lights to
shine into the front camera.
● Do not dirty or damage the front
camera.
When cleaning the inside of the
windshield, do not allow glass
cleaner to contact the lens of
the front camera. Also, do not
touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not subject the front camera
to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation
position or direction of the front
camera or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the front
camera.
● Do not modify any components
of the vehicle around the front
camera (inside rear view mirror,
etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories
to the hood, front grille or front
bumper that may obstruct the
front camera. Contact your Toy-
ota dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long
object is to be mounted on the
roof, make sure that it will not
obstruct the front camera.
● Do not modify the headlights or
other lights.
230
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Certification
Except for vehicles sold in Canada
For vehicles sold in Canada
231
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in
the system.
● In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When
the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear
and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.
Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is
covered with dirt, moisture (fogged
up, covered with condensation, ice,
etc.), or other foreign matter
To clean the part of the windshield in
front of the front camera , use the
windshield wipers or the windshield
defogger of the air conditioning sys-
tem (P.329, 335).
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
● In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has
been driven for some time) and the normal operating conditions are
detected, the message will disappear and the system will become opera-
tional.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Toyota dealer.
• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the opera-
tional range, such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold
environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such
as when driving in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining
into the front camera
When the temperature around the
front camera is outside of the opera-
tional range, such as when the vehi-
cle is in the sun or in an extremely
cold environment
If the front camera is hot, such as
after the vehicle had been parked in
the sun, use the air conditioning sys-
tem to decrease the temperature
around the front camera.
If a sunshade was used when the
vehicle was parked, depending on its
type, the sunlight reflected from the
surface of the sunshade may cause
the temperature of the front camera
to become excessively high.
If the front camera is cold, such after
the vehicle is parked in an extremely
cold environment, use the air condi-
tioning system to increase the tem-
perature around the front camera.
The area in front of the front camera
is obstructed, such as when the
hood is open or a sticker is attached
to the part of the windshield in front
of the front camera.
Close the hood, remove the sticker,
etc. to clear the obstruction.
Situation Actions
233
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
The system can detect the fol-
lowing:
Vehicles
Bicyclists
Pedestrians
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge
the driver to take evasive action.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, the system
applies greater braking force in
relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that
the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is extremely high, the
brakes are automatically applied
to help avoid the collision or
reduce the impact of the colli-
sion.
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)
The pre-collision system
uses a radar sensor and
front camera to detect
objects (P.233) in front of
the vehicle. When the sys-
tem determines that the
possibility of a frontal colli-
sion with an object is high, a
warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive
action and the potential
brake pressure is increased
to help the driver avoid the
collision. If the system
determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision
with an object is extremely
high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help
avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the col-
lision.
The pre-collision system can
be disabled/enabled and the
warning timing can be
changed. (P.235)
Detectable objects
System functions
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-colli-
sion system
● The driver is solely responsible
for safe driving. Always drive
safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision sys-
tem instead of normal braking
operations under any circum-
stances. This system will not
prevent collisions or lessen col-
lision damage or injury in every
situation. Do not overly rely on
this system. Failure to do so
may lead to an accident, result-
ing in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is
designed to help avoid a colli-
sion or help reduce the impact
of the collision, its effectiveness
may change according to vari-
ous conditions, therefore the
system may not always be able
to achieve the same level of
performance.
Read the following conditions
carefully. Do not overly rely on
this system and always drive
carefully.
• Conditions under which the sys-
tem may operate even if there is
no possibility of a collision:
P. 23 7
• Conditions under which the sys-
tem may not operate properly:
P. 23 8
● Do not attempt to test the oper-
ation of the pre-collision system
yourself.
Depending on the objects used
for testing (dummies, card-
board objects imitating detect-
able objects, etc.), the system
may not operate properly, possi-
bly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking
function is operating, a large
amount of braking force will be
applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of the pre-collision
braking function, the pre-colli-
sion braking function operation
will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking func-
tion may not operate if certain
operations are performed by the
driver. If the accelerator pedal is
being depressed strongly or the
steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that
the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the
pre-collision braking function
from operating.
● In some situations, while the
pre-collision braking function is
operating, operation of the func-
tion may be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is
turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking
evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being
depressed, the system may
determine that the driver is tak-
ing evasive action and possibly
delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.
■ When to disable the pre-colli-
sion system
In the following situations, disable
the system, as it may not operate
properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Enabling/disabling the
pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be
enabled/disabled on (P.87,
96) of the multi-information dis-
play.
The system is automatically
enabled each time the engine
switch is turned to ON.
If the system is disabled, the
PCS warning light will turn on
and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
■ Changing the pre-collision
warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing
can be changed on (P.87,
96) of the multi-information dis-
play.
The warning timing setting is
retained when the engine switch is
turned OFF. However, if the pre-col-
lision system is disabled and
re-enabled, the operation timing will
return to the default setting (mid-
dle).
WARNING
● When your vehicle is towing
another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle
via truck, boat, train or similar
means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a
lift with the engine running and
the tires are allowed to rotate
freely
● When inspecting the vehicle
using a drum tester such as a
chassis dynamometer or speed-
ometer tester, or when using an
on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied
to the front bumper or front
grille, due to an accident or
other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in
a stable manner, such as when
the vehicle has been in an acci-
dent or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a
sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly
inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or
an emergency tire puncture
repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.)
that may obstruct the radar sen-
sor or front camera is temporar-
ily installed to the vehicle
Changing settings of the
pre-collision system
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Early
2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Late
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-
sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.
Each function is operational at the following speed
● Pre-collision warning
● Pre-collision brake assist
● Pre-collision braking
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ans
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 20 to 110 mph
(30 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 110 mph
(30 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ans
Approx. 20 to 50 mph
(30 to 80 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 50 mph
(30 to 80 km/h)
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning
function will be operational)
■ Object detection function
The system detects objects based
on their size, profile, motion, etc.
However, an object may not be
detected depending on the sur-
rounding brightness and the motion,
posture, and angle of the detected
object, preventing the system from
operating properly. (P.238)
The illustration shows an image of
detectable objects.
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision
braking
If either of the following occur while
the pre-collision braking function is
operating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned
sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the
system may operate even if
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, the system may determine
that there is a possibility of a fron-
tal collision and operate.
• When passing a detectable object,
etc.
• When changing lanes while over-
taking a detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable
object in an adjacent lane or on
the roadside, such as when
changing the course of travel or
driving on a winding road
• When rapidly closing on a detect-
able object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the
roadside, such as detectable
objects, guardrails, utility poles,
trees, or walls
• When there is a detectable object
or other object by the roadside at
the entrance of a curve
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between
your vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph
(10 to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestri-
ans
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10
to 80 km/h)
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
• When there are patterns or paint
in front of your vehicle that may be
mistaken for a detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When overtaking a detectable
object that is changing lanes or
making a right/left turn
• When passing a detectable object
in an oncoming lane that is
stopped to make a right/left turn
• When a detectable object
approaches very close and then
stops before entering the path of
your vehicle
• If the front of your vehicle is raised
or lowered, such as when on an
uneven or undulating road surface
• When driving on a road sur-
rounded by a structure, such as in
a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.),
steps, or a protrusion in front of
your vehicle
• When passing under an object
(road sign, billboard, etc.)
• When approaching an electric toll
gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and
closes
• When using an automatic car
wash
• When driving through or under
objects that may contact your
vehicle, such as thick grass, tree
branches, or a banner
• When driving through steam or
smoke
• When driving near an object that
reflects radio waves, such as a
large truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower,
broadcasting station, electric
power plant, or other location
where strong radio waves or elec-
trical noise may be present
■ Situations in which the system
may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, an object may not be
detected by the radar sensor and
front camera, preventing the sys-
tem from operating properly:
• When a detectable object is
approaching your vehicle
• When your vehicle or a detectable
object is wobbling
• If a detectable object makes an
abrupt maneuver (such as sudden
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
swerving, acceleration or deceler-
ation)
• When your vehicle approaches a
detectable object rapidly
• When a detectable object is not
directly in front of your vehicle
• When a detectable object is near
a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole
cover, vehicle, steel plate on the
road, etc.
• When a detectable object is under
a structure
• When part of a detectable object
is hidden by an object, such as
large baggage, an umbrella, or
guardrail
• When multiple detectable objects
are close together
• If the sun or other light is shining
directly on a detectable object
• When a detectable object is a
shade of white and looks
extremely bright
• When a detectable object appears
to be nearly the same color or
brightness as its surroundings
• If a detectable object cuts or sud-
denly emerges in front of your
vehicle
• When the front of your vehicle is
hit by water, snow, dust, etc.
• When a very bright light ahead,
such as the sun or the headlights
of oncoming traffic, shines directly
into the front camera
• When approaching the side or
front of a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such
as a personal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small
rear end, such as an unloaded
truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low
rear end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely
high ground clearance
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a
load which protrudes past its rear
bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly
shaped, such as a tractor or side
car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized
bicycle, a bicycle that is carrying a
large load, a bicycle ridden by
more than one person, or a
uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle
with a child seat, tandem bicycle,
etc.)
• If a pedestrian/or the riding height
of a bicyclist ahead is shorter than
approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller
than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing
oversized clothing (a rain coat,
long skirt, etc.), making their sil-
houette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward
or squatting or bicyclist is bending
forward
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving
fast
• If a pedestrian is pushing a
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or
other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather
such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
• When driving through steam or
smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim,
such as at dawn or dusk, or while
at night or in a tunnel, making a
detectable object appear to be
nearly the same color as its sur-
roundings
• When driving in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes
suddenly, such as at the entrance
or exit of a tunnel
• After the engine has started the
vehicle has not been driven for a
certain amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and
for a few seconds after making a
left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a
few seconds after driving on a
curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the
front camera
• The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or front camera
is misaligned
● In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, sufficient braking force
may not be obtained, preventing
the system from performing prop-
erly:
• If the braking functions cannot
operate to their full extent, such as
when the brake parts are
extremely cold, extremely hot, or
wet
• If the vehicle is not properly main-
tained (brakes or tires are exces-
sively worn, improper tire inflation
pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven
on a gravel road or other slippery
surface
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (P.315), the
pre-collision brake assist and
pre-collision braking functions are
also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on
and “VSC Turned OFF Pre-Colli-
sion Brake System Unavailable”
will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
241
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
LTA (Lane Tracing
Assist)
When driving on highways
and freeways with white
(yellow) lane lines, this
function alerts the driver
when the vehicle might
depart from its lane or
course
*
and provides assis-
tance by operating the
steering wheel to keep the
vehicle in its lane or
course
*
. Furthermore, the
system provides steering
assistance when dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range is operat-
ing to keep the vehicle in its
lane.
The LTA system recognizes
white (yellow) lane lines or a
course
*
using the front cam-
era. Additionally, it detects
preceding vehicles using
the front camera and radar.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
WARNING
■ Before using LTA system
● Do not rely solely upon the LTA
system. The LTA system does
not automatically drive the vehi-
cle or reduce the amount of
attention that must be paid to
the area in front of the vehicle.
The driver must always assume
full responsibility for driving
safely by paying careful atten-
tion to the surrounding condi-
tions and operating the steering
wheel to correct the path of the
vehicle. Also, the driver must
take adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as from driving
for a long period of time.
● Failure to perform appropriate
driving operations and pay care-
ful attention may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● When not using the LTA system,
use the LTA switch to turn the
system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LTA
system
In the following situations, use the
LTA switch to turn the system off.
Failure to do so may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Vehicle is driven on a road sur-
face which is slippery due to
rainy weather, fallen snow,
freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-cov-
ered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult
to see due to rain, snow, fog,
dust, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary
lane or restricted lane due to
construction work.
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Vehicle is driven in a construc-
tion zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are
equipped.
● When the tires have been
excessively worn, or when the
tire inflation pressure is low.
● When tires of a size other than
specified are installed.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes
other than that highways and
freeways.
● When your vehicle is towing a
trailer or during emergency tow-
ing.
■ Preventing LTA system mal-
functions and operations per-
formed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or
place stickers, etc. on the sur-
face of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension
etc. If the suspension etc. needs
to be replaced, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not install or place anything
on the hood or grille. Also, do
not install a grille guard (bull
bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs
repairs, contact your Toyota
dealer.
■ Conditions in which functions
may not operate properly
In the following situations, the
functions may not operate prop-
erly and the vehicle may depart
from its lane. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to
your surroundings and operate
the steering wheel to correct the
path of the vehicle without relying
solely on the functions.
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.246) and
the preceding vehicle changes
lanes. (Your vehicle may follow
the preceding vehicle and also
change lanes.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (
P.246) and
the preceding vehicle is sway-
ing. (Your vehicle may sway
accordingly and depart from the
lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (P.246) and
the preceding vehicle departs
from its lane. (Your vehicle may
follow the preceding vehicle and
depart from the lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising dis-
play is displayed (
P.246) and
the preceding vehicle is being
driven extremely close to the
left/right lane line. (Your vehicle
may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)
● Vehicle is being driven around a
sharp curve.
243
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
WARNING
● Objects or patterns that could
be mistaken for white (yellow)
lines are present on the side of
the road (guardrails, reflective
poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
● Repair marks of asphalt, white
(yellow) lines, etc. are present
due to road repair.
● There are shadows on the road
that run parallel with, or cover,
the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area
without white (yellow) lines,
such as in front of a tollgate or
checkpoint, or at an intersec-
tion, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are
cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised
pavement marker” or stones are
present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot
be seen or are difficult to see
due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road
surface that is wet due to rain,
puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow
(which may be more difficult to
recognize than lines that are
white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross
over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright
surface, such as concrete.
● If the edge of the road is not
clear or straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a sur-
face that is bright due to
reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area
where the brightness changes
suddenly, such as at the
entrances and exits of tunnels,
etc.
● Light from the headlights of an
oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc.
enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road
which tilts left or right, or a wind-
ing road.
● The vehicle is driven on an
unpaved or rough road.
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Lane departure alert func-
tion
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane or course
*
, a warn-
ing is displayed on the
multi-information display, and a
warning buzzer will sound to
alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds,
check the area around your vehicle
and carefully operate the steering
wheel to move the vehicle back to
the center of the lane.
Vehicle with BSM: When the sys-
tem determines that the vehicle
might depart from its lane and that
the possibility of a collision with an
overtaking vehicle in the adjacent
lane is high, the lane departure
alert will operate even if the turn
signals are operating.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane or course
*
, the sys-
WARNING
● The traffic lane is excessively
narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted
due to carrying heavy luggage
or having improper tire pres-
sure.
● The distance to the preceding
vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and
down a large amount due to
road conditions during driving
(poor roads or road seams).
● When driving in a tunnel or at
night with the headlights off or
when a headlight is dim due to
its lens being dirty or it being
misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a cross-
wind.
● The vehicle is affected by wind
from a vehicle driven in a
nearby lane.
● The vehicle has just changed
lanes or crossed an intersec-
tion.
● Tires which differ by structure,
manufacturer, brand or tread
pattern are used.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds.
Functions included in LTA
system
245
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
tem provides assistance as nec-
essary by operating the steering
wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the
vehicle in its lane.
If the system detects that the steer-
ing wheel has not been operated
for a fixed amount of time or the
steering wheel is not being firmly
gripped, a warning is displayed on
the multi-information display and
the function is temporarily can-
celed.
Vehicle with BSM: When the sys-
tem determines that the vehicle
might depart from its lane and that
the possibility of a collision with an
overtaking vehicle in the adjacent
lane is high, the steering assist
function will operate even if the turn
signals are operating.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
When the vehicle is swaying
within a lane, the warning
buzzer will sound and a mes-
sage will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.
■ Lane centering function
This function is linked with
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range and pro-
vides the required assistance by
operating the steering wheel to
keep the vehicle in its current
lane.
When dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is not operat-
ing, the lane centering function
does not operate.
In situations where the white (yel-
low) lane lines are difficult to see or
are not visible, such as when in a
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
traffic jam, this function will operate
to help follow a preceding vehicle
by monitoring the position of the
preceding vehicle.
If the system detects that the steer-
ing wheel has not been operated
for a fixed amount of time or the
steering wheel is not being firmly
gripped, a warning is displayed on
the multi-information display and
the function is temporarily can-
celed.
Press the LTA switch to turn the
LTA system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the LTA switch again to turn
the LTA system off.
When the LTA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LTA system
continues in the same condition the
next time the engine is started.
LTA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of the
system operation status.
Illuminated in white: LTA system is
operating.
Illuminated in green: Steering wheel
assistance of the steering assist
function or lane centering function
is operating.
Flashing in orange: Lane departure
alert function is operating.
Operation display of steering
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-informa-
Turning LTA system on
Indications on multi-infor-
mation display
247
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing assist system information
display.
Indicates that steering wheel assis-
tance of the steering assist function
or lane centering function is operat-
ing.
Both outer sides of the lane are dis-
played: Indicates that steering
wheel assist of the lane centering
function is operating.
One outer side of the lane is dis-
played: Indicates that steering
wheel assist of the steering assist
function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are
flashing: Alerts the driver that their
input is necessary to stay in the
center of the lane (lane centering
function).
Lane departure alert function
display
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing assist system information
display.
Inside of displayed lines is
white
Indicates that the system is rec-
ognizing white (yellow) lines or a
course
*
. When the vehicle
departs from its lane, the white
line displayed on the side the
vehicle departs from flashes
orange.
Inside of displayed lines is
black
Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines or a course
*
or is temporar-
ily canceled.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
Follow-up cruising display
Displayed when the multi-informa-
tion display is switched to the driv-
ing assist system information
display.
Indicates that steering assist of the
lane centering function is operating
by monitoring the position of a pre-
ceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display
is displayed, if the preceding vehi-
cle moves, your vehicle may move
in the same way. Always pay care-
ful attention to your surroundings
and operate the steering wheel as
necessary to correct the path of the
vehicle and ensure safety.
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Operation conditions of each
function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32
mph (50 km/h) or more.
*1
• System recognizes white (yellow)
lane lines or a course
*2
. (When a
white [yellow] line or course
*2
is
recognized on only one side, the
system will operate only for the
recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
(Vehicle with BSM: Except when
another vehicle is in the lane on
the side where the turn signal was
operated)
• Vehicle is not being driven around
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.250)
*1
:The function operates even if the
vehicle speed is less than
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h)
when the lane centering function
is operating.
*2
:Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met in
addition to the operation conditions
for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in
of the multi-information display is
set to “ON”. (P.87, 96)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or
decelerated by a fixed amount or
more.
• Steering wheel is not operated
with a steering force level suitable
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning
is not displayed. (P.249)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in
of the multi-information display is
set to “ON”. (P.87, 96)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32
mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.250)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of
the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and
“Lane Center” in of the
multi-information display are set to
“ON”. (P.87, 96)
• This function recognizes white
(yellow) lane lines or the position
of a preceding vehicle (except
when the preceding vehicle is
small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is operating
in vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approxi-
mately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around
a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are
detected. (P.250)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or
decelerate by a fixed amount or
more.
• Steering wheel is not operated
with a steering force level suitable
for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are
not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning
is not displayed. (P.249)
249
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
• The vehicle is being driven in the
center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not
operating.
■ Temporary cancelation of func-
tions
● When operation conditions are no
longer met, a function may be
temporarily canceled. However,
when the operation conditions are
met again, operation of the func-
tion is automatically restored.
(P.248)
● If the operation conditions
(P.248) are no longer met while
the lane centering function is
operating, the buzzer may sound
to indicate that the function has
been temporarily canceled.
■ Steering assist function/lane
centering function
● Depending on the vehicle speed,
lane departure situation, road con-
ditions, etc., the driver may not
feel the function is operating or
the function may not operate at
all.
● The steering control of the func-
tion is overridden by the driver’s
steering wheel operation.
● Do not attempt to test the opera-
tion of the steering assist function.
■ Lane departure alert function
● The warning buzzer may be diffi-
cult to hear due to external noise,
audio playback, etc.
● If the edge of the course
*
is not
clear or straight, the lane depar-
ture alert function may not oper-
ate.
● Vehicle with BSM: It may not be
possible for the system to deter-
mine if there is a danger of a colli-
sion with a vehicle in an adjacent
lane.
● Do not attempt to test the opera-
tion of the lane departure alert
function.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and
the side of the road, such as
grass, soil, or a curb
■ Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing
In the following situations, a warning
message urging the driver to hold
the steering wheel and the symbol
shown in the illustration are dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play to warn the driver. The warning
stops when the system determines
that the driver holds the steering
wheel. Always keep your hands on
the steering wheel when using this
system, regardless of warnings.
● When the system determines that
the driver is driving without hold-
ing the steering wheel while the
system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their
hands off of the steering wheel, the
buzzer sounds, the driver is warned
and the function is temporarily can-
celed. This warning also operates in
the same way when the driver con-
tinuously operates the steering
wheel only a small amount.
● When the system determines that
the vehicle may not turn and
instead depart from its lane while
driving around a curve
Depending on the vehicle condition
and road conditions, the warning
may not operate. Also, if the system
determines that the vehicle is driv-
ing around a curve, warnings will
occur earlier than during
straight-lane driving.
● When the system determines that
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
the driver is driving without hold-
ing the steering wheel while the
steering wheel assist of the steer-
ing assist function is operating.
If the driver continues to keep their
hands off of the steering wheel and
the steering wheel assist is operat-
ing, the buzzer sounds and the
driver is warned. Each time the
buzzer sounds, the continuing time
of the buzzer becomes longer.
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that
the vehicle is swaying while the
vehicle sway warning function is
operating, a buzzer sounds and a
warning message urging the driver
to rest and the symbol shown in the
illustration are simultaneously dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play.
Depending on the vehicle and road
conditions, the warning may not
operate.
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is
displayed on the multi-information
display and the LTA indicator illumi-
nates in orange, follow the appropri-
ate troubleshooting procedure. Also,
if a different warning message is
displayed, follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
● “LTA Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer”
The system may not be operating
properly. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
● “LTA Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled
due to a malfunction in a sensor
other than the front camera. Turn
the LTA system off, wait for a little
while, and then turn the LTA system
back on.
● “LTA Unavailable at Current
Speed”
The function cannot be used as the
vehicle speed exceeds the LTA
operation range. Drive slower.
■ Customization
Function settings can be changed.
(Customizable features:P.515)
251
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
*
: If equipped
When the front camera recog-
nizes a sign and/or information
of a sign is available from the
navigation system, the sign will
be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
When the driving assist sys-
tem information is selected, a
maximum of 3 signs can be
displayed. (P.82, 91)
When a tab other than the
driving assist system informa-
tion is selected, the following
types of road signs will be dis-
played. (P.82, 91)
• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign (when notifica-
tion is necessary)
If signs other than speed limit signs
RSA (Road Sign
Assist)
*
The RSA system recognizes
specific road signs using
the front camera and/or nav-
igation system (when speed
limit information is avail-
able) to provide information
to the driver via the display.
If the system judges that the
vehicle is being driven over
the speed limit, performing
prohibited actions, etc. in
relation to the recognized
road signs, it notifies the
driver using a notification
display and notification
buzzer.
WARNING
■ Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA
system. RSA is a system which
supports the driver by providing
information, but it is not a replace-
ment for a driver’s own vision and
awareness. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to
the traffic rules.
Indication on the
multi-information display
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
are recognized, they will be dis-
played in an overlapping stack
under the current speed limit sign.
The following types of road
signs, including electronic signs
and blinking signs, are recog-
nized.
A non-official or a recently intro-
duced traffic sign may not be recog-
nized.
In the following situations, the
RSA system will notify the
driver.
When the vehicle speed
exceeds the speed notifica-
tion threshold of the speed
limit sign displayed, the sign
display will be emphasized
and a buzzer will sound.
When the RSA system recog-
nizes a do not enter sign and
determines that your vehicle
has entered a no-entry area,
the displayed sign will flash
and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, a
notification function may not
operate properly.
■ Setting procedure
4.2-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switches and select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switches and select ,
then press .
7-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switches and select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switches and select ,
then press .
■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign
display
In the following situations, displayed
speed limit and do not enter signs
will stop being displayed automati-
cally:
● A new sign is not recognized for a
certain distance.
● The road changes due to a left or
right turn, etc.
In the following situations, stop and
yield signs will stop being displayed
automatically:
● The system determines that your
vehicle has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or
right turn, etc.
Supported types of road
signs
Speed limit
Do Not Enter
Stop
Yield
Notification function
253
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Conditions in which the func-
tion may not operate or detect
correctly
In the following situations, RSA
does not operate normally and may
not recognize signs, display the
incorrect sign, etc. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
● The front camera is misaligned
due to a strong impact being
applied to the sensor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the
windshield near the front camera.
● In inclement weather such as
heavy rain, fog, snow or sand
storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle,
the sun, etc. enters the front cam-
era.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or
bent.
● The contrast of electronic sign is
low.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by
the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
● The sign is only visible to the front
camera for a short amount of time.
● The driving scene (turning, lane
change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
● Even if it is a sign not appropriate
for the currently traveled lane,
such a sign exists directly after a
freeway branches, or in an adja-
cent lane just before merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear of
the preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system com-
patible sign is recognized.
● Side road speed signs may be
detected and displayed (if posi-
tioned in sight of the front camera)
while the vehicle is traveling on
the main road.
● Roundabout exit road speed signs
may be detected and displayed (if
positioned in sight of the front
camera) while traveling on a
roundabout.
● The front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered due to the carried load
● The surrounding brightness is not
sufficient or changes suddenly.
● When a sign intended for trucks,
etc. is recognized.
● The speed information displayed
on the meter and that displayed
on the navigation system may be
different due to the navigation sys-
tem using map data.
■ Speed limit sign display
If the engine switch was last turned
off while a speed limit sign was dis-
played on the multi-information dis-
play, the same sign displays again
when the engine switch is turned to
ON.
■ If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is shown
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features:P.515)
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Meter display
Multi-information display
Set speed
Indicators
■ Operation switches
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch
“+RES” switch
Cruise control main switch
Cancel switch
“-SET” switch
Dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed
range
In vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the
vehicle automatically accel-
erates, decelerates and
stops to match the speed
changes of the preceding
vehicle even if the accelera-
tor pedal is not depressed.
In constant speed control
mode, the vehicle runs at a
fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar
cruise control with
full-speed range on free-
ways and highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode (P.257)
Constant speed control
mode (P.261)
System Components
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed
range
● Driving safely is the sole
responsibility of the driver. Do
not rely solely on the system,
and drive safely by always pay-
ing careful attention to your sur-
roundings.
● The dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range pro-
vides driving assistance to
reduce the driver’s burden.
However, there are limitations to
the assistance provided.
Read the following conditions
carefully. Do not overly rely on
this system and always drive
carefully.
• When the sensor may not be
correctly detecting the vehicle
ahead:
P.2 63
255
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
WARNING
• Conditions under which the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-
rectly:
P.2 63
● Set the speed appropriately
depending on the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc. The
driver is responsible for check-
ing the set speed.
● Even when the system is func-
tioning normally, the condition of
the preceding vehicle as
detected by the system may dif-
fer from the condition observed
by the driver. Therefore, the
driver must always remain alert,
assess the danger of each situ-
ation and drive safely. Relying
solely on this system or assum-
ing the system ensures safety
while driving can lead to an
accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Switch the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
setting to off, using the cruise
control main switch when not in
use.
■ Cautions regarding the driv-
ing assist systems
Observe the following precau-
tions, as there are limitations to
the assistance provided by the
system. Failure to do so may
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure
following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is only
intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle
and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead. It is not a mechanism that
allows careless or inattentive driv-
ing, and it is not a system that can
assist the driver in low-visibility
conditions.
It is still necessary for driver to
pay close attention to the vehi-
cle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge
proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range determines
whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle
and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is
not capable of making any other
type of judgement. Therefore, it is
absolutely necessary for the
driver to remain vigilant and to
determine whether or not there is
a possibility of danger in any
given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate
the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range does not
include functions which will pre-
vent or avoid collisions with vehi-
cles ahead of your vehicle.
Therefore, if there is ever any
possibility of danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct
control of the vehicle and act
appropriately in order to ensure
the safety of all involved.
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range in
any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropri-
ate speed control and could
cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedes-
trians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as
those covered with rain, ice or
snow
● On steep downhills, or where
there are sudden changes
between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the
set speed when driving down a
steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and
highways
● When weather conditions are
bad enough that they may pre-
vent the sensors from detecting
correctly (fog, snow, sand-
storm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc.
on the front surface of the radar
or front camera
● In traffic conditions that require
frequent repeated acceleration
and deceleration
● When your vehicle is towing a
trailer or during emergency tow-
ing
● When an approach warning
buzzer is heard often
257
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehi-
cle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable
following distance from the vehicle ahead. The desired vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance switch.
When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may
become shorter.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed
appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is nec-
essary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this
time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate suffi-
ciently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is
stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the
“+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will
resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off operation is not performed, system
control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to a left lane
while driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will quickly acceler-
ate to help to overtake a passing vehicle.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
1 Press the cruise control main
switch to activate the cruise
control.
Dynamic radar cruise control indi-
cator will come on and a message
will be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. Press the switch
again to deactivate the cruise con-
trol.
If the cruise control main switch is
pressed and held for 1.5 seconds
or more, the system turns on in
constant speed control mode.
(P.261)
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal opera-
tion, to the desired vehicle
speed (at or above approxi-
mately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and press the “-SET” switch
to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
set speed.
Adjusting the set speed by the
switch
To change the set speed, press
the “+RES” or “-SET” switch
until the desired set speed is
displayed.
1 Increases the speed (Except
Setting the vehicle speed
(vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
Adjusting the set speed
259
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in
vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold
the switch to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the set
speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or
decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or
1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
increments for
as long as the switch is held
For Canada, Guam, Saipan,
Puerto Rico and A.Samoa
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or
decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)
*1
or 5
km/h (3.1 mph)
*2
increments for as
long as the switch is held
In the constant speed control
mode (P.261), the set speed
will be increased or decreased
as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6
km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each
time the switch is pressed
Large adjustment: The speed will
continue to change while the switch
is held.
*1
:When the set speed is shown in
“MPH”
*2
:When the set speed is shown in
“km/h”
Increasing the set speed by
the accelerator pedal
1 Accelerate with accelerator
pedal operation to the
desired vehicle speed
2 Press the “-SET” switch
Pressing the switch changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
set automatically to long mode
when the engine switch is turned to
ON.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you,
Changing the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
(vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
the preceding vehicle mark will
also be displayed.
Select a distance from the table
below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accor-
dance with vehicle speed. When
the vehicle is stopped by system
control, the vehicle stops at a
certain vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance depending on the situa-
tion.
After the vehicle ahead of you
starts off, press the “+RES”
switch.
Your vehicle will also resume
follow-up cruising if the acceler-
ator pedal is depressed after the
vehicle ahead of you starts off.
1 Pressing the cancel switch
cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled
when the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been
stopped by system control,
depressing the brake pedal does
not cancel the setting.)
2 Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the cruise control
and returns vehicle speed to
the set speed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance settings (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Distance
options
Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance
Long
Approximately 160 ft.
(50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft.
(40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft.
(30 m)
Resuming follow-up
cruising when the vehicle
has been stopped by sys-
tem control (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Canceling and resuming
the speed control
261
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
When your vehicle is too close
to a vehicle ahead, and suffi-
cient automatic deceleration via
the cruise control is not possi-
ble, the display will flash and the
buzzer will sound to alert the
driver. An example of this would
be if another driver cuts in front
of you while you are following a
vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate
vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur
when
In the following instances, warn-
ings may not occur even when
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
small.
When the speed of the pre-
ceding vehicle matches or
exceeds your vehicle speed
When the preceding vehicle is
traveling at an extremely slow
speed
Immediately after the cruise
control speed was set
When depressing the acceler-
ator pedal
When constant speed control
mode is selected, your vehicle
will maintain a set speed without
controlling the vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance. Select this mode
only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode does not
function correctly due to a dirty
radar, etc.
1 With the cruise control off,
press and hold the cruise
control main switch for 1.5
seconds or more.
Immediately after the switch is
pressed, the dynamic radar cruise
control indicator will come on. After-
wards, it switches to the cruise con-
trol indicator.
Switching to constant speed control
mode is only possible when operat-
ing the switch with the cruise con-
trol off.
2 Accelerate or decelerate,
with accelerator pedal opera-
tion, to the desired vehicle
speed (at or above approxi-
mately 20 mph [30 km/h])
Approach warning (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Selecting constant speed
control mode
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
and press the “-SET” switch
to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will
come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the switch is released becomes the
set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 2 58
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P.2 60
■ Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range can be set
when
● The shift lever is in D.
● The desired set speed can be set
when the vehicle speed is approx-
imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
(However, when the vehicle speed
is set while driving at below
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h],
the set speed will be set to
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h].)
■ Accelerating after setting the
vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by oper-
ating the accelerator pedal. After
accelerating, the set speed
resumes. However, during vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in
order to maintain the distance to the
preceding vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while
follow-up cruising
● Pressing the “+RES” switch while
the vehicle ahead stops will
resume follow-up cruising if the
vehicle ahead starts off within
approximately 3 seconds after the
switch is pressed.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off
within 3 seconds after your vehicle
stops, follow-up cruising will be
resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is automatically canceled in
the following situations.
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● When snow mode is set.
● The sensor cannot detect cor-
rectly because it is covered in
some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system
control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when
the vehicle has been stopped by
system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat
belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for
about 3 minutes
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is automatically canceled for
any reasons other than the above,
there may be a malfunction in the
system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of con-
stant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is
263
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
automatically canceled in the follow-
ing situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of
time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
If constant speed control mode is
automatically canceled for any rea-
sons other than the above, there
may be a malfunction in the system.
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Brake operation
A brake operation sound may be
heard and the brake pedal response
may change, but these are not mal-
functions.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
for dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are
used to indicate a system malfunc-
tion or to inform the driver of the
need for caution while driving. If a
warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instruc-
tions.(P.231, 460)
■ When the sensor may not be
correctly detecting the vehicle
ahead
In the case of the following and
depending on the conditions, oper-
ate the brake pedal when decelera-
tion of the system is insufficient or
operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to
correctly detect these types of vehi-
cles, the approach warning
(P.261) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the
same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends
(trailers with no load on board,
etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same
lane
● When water or snow thrown up by
the surrounding vehicles hinders
the detecting of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing
upwards (caused by a heavy load
in the luggage compartment, etc.)
● Preceding vehicle has an
extremely high ground clearance
■ Conditions under which the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode may not function cor-
rectly
In the case of the following condi-
tions, operate the brake pedal (or
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
accelerator pedal, depending on the
situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to
correctly detect vehicles ahead, the
system may not operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the
lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or
your position in the lane is unsta-
ble
● When the vehicle ahead of you
decelerates suddenly
● When driving on a road sur-
rounded by a structure, such as in
a tunnel or on a bridge
● While the vehicle speed is
decreasing to the set speed after
the vehicle accelerates by
depressing the accelerator pedal
*
: If equipped
■ Stopping the engine
While driving with the D shift
position selected, depress the
brake pedal and stop the vehi-
cle. The engine will stop auto-
matically.
When the engine stops, the Stop &
Start indicator will illuminate.
■ Restarting the engine
Release the brake pedal. The
engine will start automatically.
When the engine starts, the Stop &
Start indicator will turn off.
Stop & Start system
*
The Stop & Start system
stops and starts the engine
according to brake pedal or
shift lever operation when
the vehicle is stopped, such
as at a stoplight, intersec-
tion, etc., in order to
improve fuel economy and
reduce noise pollution
caused by the engine idling.
Stop & Start system oper-
ation
265
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ When the brake hold sys-
tem is operating
When the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system, if
the brake pedal is released
the engine will remain
stopped.
If the accelerator pedal is
depressed while the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start
system, the engine will
restart.
While the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system, if
the engine is restarted, the
brake hold system will con-
tinue to apply the brakes,
unless the operation condi-
tions of the brake hold system
are no longer met. (P.212)
■ When the dynamic radar
cruise control with
full-speed range is operat-
ing
When the vehicle is stopped
by the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range,
the engine will stop automati-
cally even though the brake
pedal is not depressed.
When the preceding vehicle
starts off, the engine will
restart automatically.
If the engine is restarted by
the Stop & Start system while
the vehicle is stopped by the
dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range, the
vehicle will remain stopped.
Press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to disable the Stop &
Start system.
The Stop & Start cancel indicator
will illuminate.
Pressing the switch again will
enable the Stop & Start system and
the Stop & Start cancel indicator will
turn off.
■ Automatic enabling of the Stop
& Start system
If the Stop & Start system is dis-
abled using the Stop & Start cancel
switch, it will be automatically
re-enabled once the engine switch
is turned off and then the engine is
started.
When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system when
the vehicle is on an incline,
when the brake pedal is
released, brake force is tempo-
rarily maintained to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards
before the engine is restarted
Disabling the Stop & Start
system
Hill-start assist control
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
and drive force is generated.
When drive force is generated,
the maintained brake force is
automatically canceled.
This function operates on flat
surfaces as well as steep
inclines.
Sound may be generated
from the brake system, but
this does not indicate a mal-
function.
Brake pedal response may
change and vibration may
occur, but this does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
■ Points for use
● If the engine switch is pressed
when the engine is stopped by the
Stop & Start system, the engine
will not be able to be restarted by
the automatic engine start func-
tion. In this case, restart the
engine using the normal engine
starting procedure. (P.200)
● When the engine is being
restarted by the Stop & Start sys-
tem, the power outlets may be
temporarily unusable, but this
does not indicate a malfunction.
● Installation and removal of electri-
cal components and wireless
devices may affect the Stop &
Start system. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
● When stopping the vehicle for a
longer period of time, turn the
engine switch off to stop the
engine completely.
● When the engine is restarted by
the Stop & Start system, the steer-
ing wheel may temporarily feel
heavy.
■ Operating conditions
● The Stop & Start system is opera-
tional when all of the following
conditions are met:
• The vehicle has been driven a cer-
tain amount of time.
• The brake pedal is being
depressed firmly. (Except when
the vehicle is stopped by the
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range when in vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
• The D shift position is selected.
• The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
• The driver’s door is closed.
• The selected driving mode is
NORMAL or ECO mode.
• The selected driving mode is not
SNOW mode.
• The windshield defogger is off.
(vehicles without a manual air
conditioning system)
• The accelerator pedal is not being
depressed.
• The engine is adequately warmed
up.
• The outside temperature is 23°F
(-5°C ) or higher.
• The hood is closed. (P.267)
● In the following situations the
engine may not be stopped by the
Stop & Start system. This is not a
malfunction of the Stop & Start
system.
• When the air conditioning system
is being used.
• When the battery is undergoing a
periodic recharge.
• When the battery is not sufficiently
charged, such as if the vehicle
has been parked for a long time
and the battery charge has
decreased, the electric load is
large, the battery fluid tempera-
ture is excessively low or the bat-
tery has deteriorated.
• When the brake booster vacuum
is low.
• When the elapsed time since the
engine was restarted is short.
• When the vehicle is stopped fre-
quently, such as when in a traffic
267
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
jam.
• When the engine coolant tem-
perature or transmission fluid tem-
perature is extremely low or high.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a
steep incline.
• When the steering wheel is being
operated.
• When the vehicle is being driven
in a high altitude area.
• When the battery fluid tempera-
ture is extremely low or high.
• For a while after the battery termi-
nals have been disconnected and
reconnected.
● When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system, the
engine will be restarted automati-
cally if any of the following condi-
tions are met: (To enable the
engine to be stopped by the Stop
& Start system again, drive the
vehicle.)
• The air conditioning system is
turned on. (vehicles without a
manual air conditioning system)
• The windshield defogger is turned
on. (vehicles without a manual air
conditioning system)
• The shift lever is shifted from D or
P.
• The shift lever is shifted from P.
(When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system when the
shift lever is in P.)
• The driver’s seat belt is unfas-
tened.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The driving mode is changed from
NORMAL or ECO mode to
another mode.
• The driving mode is changed to
SNOW mode.
• The Stop & Start cancel switch is
pressed.
• The steering wheel is operated.
• The accelerator pedal is
depressed.
• The vehicle starts to roll on an
incline.
● When the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system, the
engine may restart automatically
in the following situations: (To
enable the engine to be stopped
by the Stop & Start system again,
drive the vehicle.)
• When the brake pedal is pumped
or strongly depressed.
• When the air conditioning system
is being used.
• When a switch of the air condition-
ing system is operated (windshield
defogger switch, etc.).
• If the battery charge becomes low.
■ When the hood is opened
● If the hood is opened while the
engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system, the engine will stall
and will not be able to be restarted
by the automatic engine start
function. In this case, restart the
engine using the normal engine
starting procedure. (P.200)
● If the hood is closed after the
engine is started with the hood
open, the Stop & Start system will
not operate. Close the hood, turn
the engine switch off, wait 30 sec-
onds or more, and then start the
engine.
■ Air conditioning system opera-
tion while the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system
Vehicles with an automatic air con-
ditioning system: When the air con-
ditioning is in automatic mode and
the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system, the fan may operate at
a low speed in order to prevent the
temperature in the cabin from
increasing or decreasing or may be
stopped.
To prioritize air conditioning system
performance when the vehicle is
stopped, disable the Stop & Start
system by pressing the Stop & Start
cancel switch.
● If the windshield is fogged up
Turn the windshield defogger on.
(P.333)
If the windshield fogs up frequently,
press the Stop & Start cancel switch
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
to disable the Stop & Start system.
● If an odor is emitted from the air
conditioning system
• Vehicles with a manual air condi-
tioning system
If the idling stop time setting is set to
“Extended” change it to “Standard”.
If an odor is emitted when the idling
stop time setting is set to “Stan-
dard”, press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to deactivate the Stop & Start
system.
• Vehicles with an automatic air
conditioning system
Press the Stop & Start cancel switch
to deactivate the Stop & Start sys-
tem.
■ Changing the idling stop time
with the air conditioning system
on
The length of time the Stop & Start
system will operate when the air
conditioning system is on can be
changed in of the multi-informa-
tion display (P.87, 96). (The length
of time the Stop & Start system will
operate when the air conditioning
system is off cannot be changed.)
■ Displaying the Stop & Start sys-
tem status
P.87, 96
■ Multi-information display mes-
sages
If the following situations, and a
message may be displayed on the
multi-information display.
● When the engine cannot be
stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem
“Press brake more to activate”
• The brake pedal is not sufficiently
depressed.
If the brake pedal is depressed
further, the system will operate.
“Non-Dedicated Battery”
• A battery not designed for use
with a Stop & Start system may
have been installed.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
“Battery Charging”
• The battery charge may be low.
Stopping of the engine is tempo-
rarily prohibited to prioritize charging
of the battery. After the engine runs
for a certain amount of time, the sys-
tem will be enabled.
• A refresh charge may be occur-
ring
After a refresh charge for up to
an hour completes, the system can
be operated.
• If displayed continuously for a
long time (more than an hour)
The battery may be deteriorated.
Contact your Toyota dealer for
details.
“Stop & Start system Unavail-
able”
• The Stop & Start system is tempo-
rarily disabled.
Allow the engine to run for some
time.
• The engine may have been
started with the hood open.
Close the hood, turn the engine
switch off, wait for 30 seconds or
more, and then start the engine.
“In Preparation”
• The vehicle is being driven in a
high altitude area.
• The brake booster vacuum is low.
When the brake booster vacuum
reaches a predetermined level, the
system will be enabled.
269
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
“For Climate Control”
• The air conditioning system is
being used when the ambient
temperature is high or low.
If the difference between the set
temperature and cabin temperature
becomes small, the system will be
enabled.
• The windshield defogger is on.
● When the engine automatically
restarts while stopped by the Stop
& Start system
“In Preparation”
• The brake pedal has been
depressed further or pumped.
The system will be enabled after
the engine runs and the brake
booster vacuum reaches a predeter-
mined level.
“For Climate Control”
• The air conditioning system has
been turned on or is being used.
• The windshield defogger has
been turned on.
“Battery Charging”
• The battery charge may be low.
The system will be enabled after
the engine runs to sufficiently
charge the battery.
■ When the buzzer sounds
If the driver's door is opened when
the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system and the shift lever is in
D, a buzzer will sound and the Stop
& Start system indicator will flash. To
stop the buzzer, close the driver's
door.
■ The Stop & Start system protec-
tion function
● When the volume of the audio
system is excessively high, sound
output from the audio system may
suddenly be cut off in order to
reduce battery consumption. To
prevent the audio system from
being cut off, keep the volume of
audio system at a moderate level.
If the audio system has been cut
off, turn the engine switch off, wait
for 3 seconds or more and then
turn it to ACC or ON to re-enable
the audio system.
● The audio system may not be acti-
vated if the battery terminals are
disconnected and then recon-
nected. If this occurs, turn the
engine switch off and then repeat
the following operation twice to
activate the audio system nor-
mally.
• Turn the engine switch to ON and
then to OFF.
■ Replacing the battery
P.485
■ If the Stop & Start cancel indica-
tor flashes continuously
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If “Stop & Start System Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is
displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display
The system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When the Stop & Start system
is operating
Make sure to disable the Stop &
Start system while the vehicle is in
a poorly ventilated area. If not dis-
abled, the engine may be auto-
matically restarted unexpectedly,
causing exhaust gases to collect
and enter the vehicle, possibly
resulting in death or a serious
health hazard.
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
WARNING
● Do not leave the vehicle while
the engine is stopped by the
Stop & Start system (while the
Stop & Start indicator is on). An
accident may occur due to the
automatic engine start function.
● Depress the brake pedal and
apply the parking brake when
necessary while the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem (while the Stop & Start indi-
cator is on).
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system oper-
ates correctly
If any of the following situations
occur, the Stop & Start system
may not operate correctly. Have
your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
● While the driver’s seat belt is
fastened, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt reminder
light flashes.
● Even though the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened, the driver’s
and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light does not illumi-
nate.
● Even though the driver’s door is
closed, the open door warning
light is illuminated or the interior
light is illuminated when the
interior light switch is in the door
position.
● Even though the driver’s door is
open, the open door warning
light does not illuminate or the
interior light does not illuminate
when the interior light switch is
in the door position.
BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor)
*
The Blind Spot Monitor is a
system that uses rear side
radar sensors installed on
the inner side of the rear
bumper on the left and right
side to assist the driver in
confirming safety when
changing lanes.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the system
The driver is solely responsible for
safe driving. Always drive safely,
taking care to observe your sur-
roundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a sup-
plementary function which alerts
the driver that a vehicle is in a
blind spot of the outside rear view
mirrors or is approaching rapidly
from behind into a blind spot. Do
not overly rely on the Blind Spot
Monitor. As the function cannot
judge if it is safe to change lanes,
over reliance could lead to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
As the system may not function
correctly under certain condi-
tions, the driver’s own visual con-
firmation of safety is necessary.
271
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Meter control switches
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor
on/off.
When the BSM function is disabled,
the BSM OFF indicator illuminates.
Outside rear view mirror indi-
cators
When a vehicle is detected in a
blind spot of the outside rear view
mirrors or approaching rapidly from
behind into a blind spot, the outside
rear view mirror indicator on the
detected side will illuminate. If the
turn signal lever is operated toward
the detected side, the outside rear
view mirror indicator flashes.
■ Outside rear view mirror indica-
tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor
Unavailable” is shown on the
multi-information display
Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be
attached to the rear bumper around
the sensors. (P.272) The system
should return to normal operation
after removing the ice, snow, mud,
etc. from the rear bumper. Addition-
ally, the sensors may not operate
normally when driving in extremely
hot or cold environments.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is
shown on the multi-information
display
There may be a sensor malfunction
of misaligned. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
System components
272
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
For vehicles sold in Canada
WARNING
■ Handling the rear side radar
sensor
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are
installed behind the left and right
sides of the rear bumper respec-
tively. Observe the following to
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
operate correctly.
● Keep the sensors and the sur-
rounding areas on the rear
bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area
on the rear bumper is dirty or cov-
ered with snow, the Blind Spot
Monitor may not operate and a
warning message (P.271) will
be displayed. In this situation,
clear off the dirt or snow and drive
the vehicle with the operation con-
ditions of the BSM function
(P.274) satisfied for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. If the warning
message does not disappear,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
273
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Use the meter control switches
to turn on/off the function.
4.2-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
and then press .
7-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switches and select
.
2 Press or of the meter
control switches to select
and then press .
■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the fol-
lowing vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of
the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear
view mirrors.
WARNING
● Do not attach stickers to the
sensor or surrounding area on
the rear bumper.
● Do not subject a sensor or its
surrounding area on the rear
bumper to a strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even
slightly off position, the system
may malfunction and vehicles
may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have
your vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area
is subject to a strong impact.
• If the surrounding area of a sen-
sor is scratched or dented, or
part of them has become dis-
connected.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not modify the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear
bumper.
● If a sensor or the rear bumper
needs to be removed/installed
or replaced, contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Do not paint the rear bumper
any color other than an official
Toyota color.
Turning the Blind Spot
Monitor on/off
Blind Spot Monitor operation
274
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the
outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that
are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
■ The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of
the vehicle
*1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear
bumper
*2
*1
:The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side
of the vehicle cannot be detected.
*2
:The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the
detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing
the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.
■ The Blind Spot Monitor is oper-
ational when
The Blind Spot Monitor is opera-
275
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
tional when all of the following con-
ditions are met:
● The Blind Spot Monitor is on.
● The shift lever is in a position
other than R.
● The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor will
detect a vehicle when
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a
vehicle present in the detection area
in the following situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane over-
takes your vehicle.
● You overtake a vehicle in an adja-
cent lane slowly.
● Another vehicle enters the detec-
tion area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the
Blind Spot Monitor will not
detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not
designed to detect the following
types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite
direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects
*
● Following vehicles that are in the
same lane
*
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away
from your vehicle
*
● Vehicles which are being over-
taken rapidly by your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the
Blind Spot Monitor may not
function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor may not
detect vehicles correctly in the fol-
lowing situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sen-
sor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
etc. is covering the sensor or sur-
rounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface
that is wet with standing water
during bad weather, such as
heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is
short
• When there is a significant differ-
ence in speed between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• When the difference in speed
between your vehicle and another
vehicle is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection
area traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop,
a vehicle remains in the detection
area
• When driving up and down con-
secutive steep inclines, such as
hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or
uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and the vehicle in an adja-
cent lane is far away from your
vehicle
• When towing a trailer
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
• When there is a significant differ-
ence in height between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle that enters the
detection area
• Immediately after the Blind Spot
Monitor is turned on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Moni-
tor unnecessarily detecting a vehi-
276
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
cle and/or object may increase in
the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned
due to a strong impact to the sen-
sor or its surrounding area
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.
that enters the detection area is
short
• When driving up and down con-
secutive steep inclines, such as
hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or
when driving on the edge of a
lane, and a vehicle traveling in a
lane other than the adjacent lanes
enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp
bends, consecutive curves, or
uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or
spinning
• When the distance between your
vehicle and a following vehicle is
short
• When an accessory (such as a
bicycle carrier) is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
*
: If equipped
■ Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
■ Display
When the sensors detect an
object, such as a wall, a graphic
is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, head-up display (if
Intuitive parking
assist
*
The distance from your
vehicle to objects, such as a
wall, when parallel parking
or maneuvering into a
garage is measured by the
sensors and communicated
via the multi-information
display, head-up display (if
equipped), audio system
screen and a buzzer. Always
check the surrounding area
when using this system.
System components
277
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
equipped) and audio system
screen depending on the posi-
tion and distance to the object.
Multi-information display and
head-up display
Front corner sensor detection
Front center sensor detection
Rear corner sensor detection
Rear center sensor detection
Audio system screen (vehi-
cles with a Toyota parking
assist monitor)
When the R shift lever is selected,
a simplified image is displayed on
the audio system screen.
Audio system screen (vehi-
cles with a Panoramic view
monitor)
A graphic will be displayed on the
audio system screen.
Use the meter control switches
to enable/disable the intuitive
parking assist. (P.96)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select
and then press .
When the intuitive parking assist
function is disabled, the intuitive
parking assist OFF indicator
(P.76) illuminates.
To re-enable the system, select
on the multi-information dis-
play, select and turn it on. If
the system is disabled, it will
remain off even if the engine
switch is turned to ON after the
engine switch has been turned
off.
Turning intuitive parking
assist on/off
278
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ When using the intuitive park-
ing assist
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely and possibly cause an acci-
dent.
● Do not use the sensor at
speeds in excess of 6 mph (10
km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas
and reaction times are limited.
When moving forward or revers-
ing, check the areas surround-
ing the vehicle (especially the
sides of the vehicle) for safety,
and drive slowly, using the
brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
● Do not install accessories within
the sensors’ detection areas.
● The area directly under the
bumpers is not detected.
Thin posts or objects lower than
the sensor may not be detected
when approached, even if they
have been detected once.
■ When to disable the function
In the following situations, disable
the function as it may operate
even though there is no possibility
of a collision.
● The vehicle is equipped with a
fender pole, wireless antenna or
fog lights.
● The front or rear bumper or a
sensor receives a strong
impact.
● A non-genuine Toyota suspen-
sion (lowered suspension, etc.)
is installed.
● Towing eyelets are installed.
● A backlit licence plate is
installed.
■ When using intuitive parking
assist
In the following situations, the
system may not function correctly
due to a sensor malfunction, etc.
Have the vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer.
● The intuitive parking assist
operation display flashes or
shows continuously, and a
buzzer sounds when no objects
are detected.
● If the area around a sensor col-
lides with something, or is sub-
jected to strong impact.
● If the bumper or grille collides
with something.
● If the display flashes or is dis-
played continuously and a
buzzer does not sound, except
when the mute function has
been turned on.
● If a display error occurs, first
check the sensor.
If the error occurs even when
there is no ice, snow or mud on
the sensor, it is likely that the
sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
Do not apply intensive bursts of
water or steam to the sensor
area.
Doing so may result in the sensor
malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not spray the sensors directly,
as doing so may cause a sensor
to malfunction.
279
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ The system can be operated
when
● The engine switch is in ON.
● Intuitive parking assist function is
on.
● The vehicle speed is less than
about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● A shift lever other than P.
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
● Water may be continuously flow-
ing over the sensor surface, such
as in a heavy rain. When the sys-
tem determines that it is normal,
the system will return to normal.
● Initialization may not have been
performed after a battery terminal
was disconnected and recon-
nected. Initialize the system.
(P.279) If this message contin-
ues to be displayed even after ini-
tialization, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable
Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is
displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display
A sensor may be covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice,
snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to
return the system to normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor
at low temperatures, a warning
message may be displayed or the
sensor may not be able to detect an
object. Once the ice melts, the sys-
tem will return to normal.
■ If a battery terminal has been
disconnected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized.
To initialize the system, drive the
vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds
or more at a speed of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h) or more.
■ Sensor detection information
● The following situations may occur
during use.
• The sensor's detection areas are
limited to the areas around the
vehicle front and rear bumpers.
• Depending on the shape of the
object and other factors, the
detection distance may shorten, or
detection may be impossible.
• If an object is extremely close to a
sensor, it may not be detected.
• There will be a short delay
between object detection and dis-
play. Even at low speeds, there is
a possibility that the object will
come within the sensor’s detec-
tion areas before the display is
shown and the warning beep
sounds.
• It might be difficult to hear the
buzzer due to the volume of the
audio system or air flow noise of
the air conditioning system.
• It may be difficult to hear the
buzzer if buzzers for other sys-
tems are sounding.
■ Conditions under which the
function may not function cor-
rectly
Certain vehicle conditions and the
surrounding environment may affect
the ability of a sensor to correctly
detect objects. Particular instances
where this may occur are listed
below.
● There is dirt, snow or ice on a sen-
sor. (Cleaning the sensors will
resolve this problem.)
● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the
area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a
sensor is frozen the sensor dis-
play may be displayed abnormally,
WARNING
● When using steam to clean the
vehicle, do not direct steam too
close to the sensors as doing so
may cause a sensor to malfunc-
tion.
280
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
or objects, such as a wall, may not
be detected.
● A sensor is covered in any way.
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold.
● On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy
due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehi-
cles, or other loud noises produc-
ing ultrasonic waves.
● There is another vehicle equipped
with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
● A sensor is coated with a sheet of
spray or heavy rain.
● If a sensor is hit by a large amount
of water, such as when driving on
a flooded road.
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted.
● The vehicle is approaching a tall
or curved curb.
● If objects draw too close to the
sensor.
■ Objects which may not be prop-
erly detected
The shape of the object may pre-
vent the sensor from detecting it.
Pay particular attention to the follow-
ing objects:
● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
● Cotton, snow and other materials
that absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
● Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections
projecting outwards in the direc-
tion of your vehicle
People may not be detected if they
are wearing certain types of cloth-
ing.
■ Adjusting the buzzer vol-
ume
The buzzer volume can be
adjusted on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Use the meter control switches
to change settings. (P.96)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select and
then press and hold .
3 Select the volume and then
press .
Each time the switch is pressed,
the volume level will change
between 1, 2, and 3.
■ Muting a buzzer temporarily
A mute button will be displayed
on the multi-information display
when an object is detected. To
mute the buzzer, press .
Mute will be canceled automati-
cally in the following situations:
When the shift lever is
changed.
When the vehicle speed
exceeds a certain speed.
When there is malfunction in
a sensor or the system is tem-
porarily unavailable.
When the operating function
is disabled manually.
When the engine switch is
turned off.
Setting the buzzer volume
281
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Detection range of the sen-
sors
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100
cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150
cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect objects that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object, etc.
■ Multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and
audio system screen
When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to
the object will be displayed on the multi-information display, audio
system screen, and head-up display (if equipped). (As the distance
to the object becomes short, the distance segments may blink.)
Approximate distance to object: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60
cm)
*
(Rear center sensor)
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.283)
Approximate distance to object: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
*
(Front center sensor)
Sensor detection display,
object distance
Multi-information dis-
play
Audio system screen Head-up display
282
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.283)
Approximate distance to object: 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)
*
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.283)
Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
*
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.283)
Approximate distance to object: 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*1
*1
:Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (P.283)
*2
:The distance segments will blink slowly.
Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*1
Multi-information dis-
play
Audio system screen Head-up display
Multi-information dis-
play
Audio system screen Head-up display
Multi-information dis-
play
Audio system screen Head-up display
Multi-information dis-
play
*2
Audio system screen
*2
Head-up display
283
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
*1
:Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (P.283)
*2
:The distance segments will blink rapidly.
■ Buzzer operation and dis-
tance to an object
A buzzer sounds when the sen-
sors are operating.
The buzzer beeps faster as
the vehicle approaches an
object. When the vehicle
comes within approximately
1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the object,
the buzzer sounds continu-
ously.
When 2 or more objects are
detected simultaneously, the
buzzer sounds for the nearest
object. If one or more objects
come within approximately
1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the vehicle,
the buzzer will repeat a long
tone, followed by fast beeps.
Automatic buzzer mute func-
tion: After a buzzer begins
sounding, if the distance
between the vehicle and the
detected object does not
become shorter, the buzzer
will be muted automatically.
(However, if the distance
between the vehicle and
object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or
less, this function will not
operate.)
The buzzer sounds volume can
be adjusted. (P.280)
Multi-information dis-
play
*2
Audio system screen
*2
Head-up display
284
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
Meter control switches
Turning the RCTA function on/off.
When the RCTA function is dis-
abled, the RCTA OFF indicator illu-
minates.
Outside rear view mirror indi-
cators
When a vehicle approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the
vehicle is detected, both outside
rear view mirror indicators will flash.
Audio system screen
If a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle
is detected, the RCTA icon
(P.286) for the detected side will
be displayed on the audio system
screen. This illustration shows an
example of a vehicle approaching
from both sides of the vehicle.
RCTA buzzer
If a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle
is detected, a buzzer will sound.
4.2-inch display
Use the meter control switches
to enable/disable the RCTA
function. (P.87)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select
“RCTA” and then press .
7-inch display
Use the meter control switches
to enable/disable the RCTA
function. (P.96)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select
“RCTA” and then press .
When the RCTA function is dis-
abled, the RCTA OFF indicator
(P.76) illuminates on the
RCTA (Rear cross traf-
fic alert) function
*
The RCTA function uses the
BSM rear side radar sensors
installed behind the rear
bumper. This function is
intended to assist the driver
in checking areas that are
not easily visible when
backing up.
System components
Turning the RCTA func-
tion on/off
285
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
multi-information display. (Each
time the engine switch is turned off
then changed to ON, the RCTA
function will be enabled automati-
cally.)
■ Outside rear view mirror indica-
tor visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear
view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to
hear over loud noises, such as if the
audio system volume is high.
■ When “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Unavailable” is shown on the
multi-information display
Water, ice, snow, mud, etc., may be
attached to the rear bumper around
the sensors. (P.272) Removing
the water, ice, snow, mud, etc., from
the attached to the rear bumper
around the sensors to return the
function to normal.
Additionally, the function may not
operate normally when driving in
extremely hot or cold environments.
■ Rear side radar sensors
P.272
■ Adjusting the buzzer vol-
ume
The buzzer volume can be
adjusted on the multi-informa-
tion display.
4.2-inch display
Use the meter control switches
to change settings. (P.87)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select
“RCTA” and then press and
hold .
3 Select the volume and then
press .
Each time the switch is pressed,
the volume level will change
between 1, 2, and 3.
7-inch display
Use the meter control switches
to change settings. (P.96)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select and
“RCTA” then press and hold
.
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of
the function
The driver is solely responsible for
safe driving. Always drive safely,
taking care to observe your sur-
roundings.
The RCTA function is only a sup-
plementary function which alerts
the driver that a vehicle is
approaching from the right or left
at the rear of the vehicle. As the
RCTA function may not function
correctly under certain condi-
tions, the driver’s own visual con-
firmation of safety is necessary.
Over reliance on this function may
lead to an accident resulting
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Before using the RCTA func-
tion
Do not place objects near the sen-
sors.
Setting the buzzer volume
286
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
3 Select the volume and then
press .
Each time the switch is pressed,
the volume level will change
between 1, 2, and 3.
■ Muting a buzzer temporarily
A mute button will be displayed
on the multi-information display
when an object is detected. To
mute the buzzer, press .
Mute will be canceled automati-
cally in the following situations:
When the shift lever is
changed.
When the vehicle speed
exceeds a certain speed.
When the operating function
is temporarily canceled.
When the operating function
is disabled manually.
When the engine switch is
turned off.
■ Operation of the RCTA function
The RCTA function uses rear side radar sensors to detect vehicles
approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts
the driver of the presence of such vehicles by flashing the outside
rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
Approaching vehicles
Detection areas of approaching vehicles
■ RCTA icon display
When a vehicle approaching
from the right or left at the rear
of the vehicle is detected, the
following will be displayed on
the audio system screen.
Example (Toyota parking
assist monitor) (if equipped):
Vehicles are approaching
from both sides of the vehicle
RCTA function
287
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Example (Panoramic view
monitor) (if equipped): Vehi-
cles are approaching from
both sides of the vehicle
■ RCTA function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The buzzer can alert the driver
of faster vehicles approaching
from farther away.
Example:
■ The RCTA function is opera-
tional when
The RCTA function operates when
all of the following conditions are
met:
● The engine switch is in ON.
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The approaching vehicle speed is
between approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).
■ Conditions under which the
RCTA function will not detect a
vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed
to detect the following types of vehi-
cles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking
space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot
detect due to obstructions
Approaching
vehicle speed
Approximate
alert distance
18 mph (28
km/h) (fast)
65 ft. (20 m)
5 mph (8 km/h)
(slow)
18 ft. (5.5 m)
A
288
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects
*
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles moving away from your
vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the
parking spaces next to your vehi-
cle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the
RCTA function may not function
correctly
● The RCTA function may not detect
vehicles correctly in the following
situations:
• When a sensor is misaligned due
to a strong impact to the sensor or
its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,
etc. is covering a sensor or its sur-
rounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface
that is wet with standing water
during bad weather, such as
heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
• If a vehicle is approaching the rear
of your vehicle rapidly
• When a towing eyelet is installed
to the rear of the vehicle.
• When backing up on a slope with
a sharp change in grade
• When backing out of a shallow
angle parking spot
• Immediately after the RCTA func-
tion is turned on
• Immediately after the engine is
started with the RCTA function on
• When the sensors cannot detect a
vehicle due to obstructions
● Instances of the RCTA function
unnecessarily detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the
following situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the
side of your vehicle
• When the parking space faces a
street and vehicles are being
driven on the street
289
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
• When the distance between your
vehicle and metal objects, such as
a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked
vehicle, which may reflect electri-
cal waves toward the rear of the
vehicle, is short
• When a towing eyelet is installed
to the rear of the vehicle
*
: If equipped
■ Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) (if
equipped)
Ultrasonic sensors are used to
detect static objects, such as a
wall, in the detection area when
driving at a low speed or back-
ing up. (P.296)
PKSB (Parking Sup-
port Brake)
*
The Parking Support Brake
system consists of the fol-
lowing functions that oper-
ate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such
as when parking. When the
system determines that the
possibility of a collision
with a detected object is
high, a warning operates to
urge the driver to take eva-
sive action. If the system
determines that the possi-
bility of a collision with a
detected object is extremely
high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help
avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the col-
lision.
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) system
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing
vehicles) (if equipped)
Rear radar sensors are used to
detect approaching vehicles in
the detection area behind the
vehicle when backing up.
(P.302)
The Parking Support Brake can
be enabled/disabled on the
multi-information display. All of
the Parking Support Brake func-
tions (static objects and
rear-crossing vehicles) are
enabled/disabled simultane-
ously.
Use the meter control switches
to enable/disable the parking
support brake. (P.96)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select
and then press .
When the Parking Support Brake is
disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator
(P.76) illuminates on the instru-
ment cluster.
To re-enable the system when it
was disabled, select on the
multi-information display, select
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Parking
Support Brake system
Do not overly rely on the system,
as doing so may lead to an acci-
dent.
● The driver is solely responsible
for safe driving. Always drive
carefully, taking care to observe
your surroundings. The Parking
Support Brake system is
designed to provide support to
lessen the severity of collisions.
However, it may not operate in
some situations.
● The Parking Support Brake sys-
tem is not designed to stop the
vehicle completely. Additionally,
even if the system has stopped
the vehicle, it is necessary to
depress the brake pedal imme-
diately as brake control will be
canceled after approximately 2
seconds.
NOTICE
■ If “PKSB Unavailable” is dis-
played on the multi-informa-
tion display and the PKSB
OFF indicator is flashing
If this message is displayed
immediately after the engine
switch is changed to ON, operate
the vehicle carefully, paying atten-
tion to your surroundings. It may
be necessary to drive the vehicle
for a certain amount of time
before the system returns to nor-
mal. (If the system is not return to
normal after driving for a while,
clean the sensors and their sur-
rounding area on the bumpers.)
Enabling/Disabling the
Parking Support Brake
291
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
and turn it on. If the system is dis-
abled, it will remain off even if the
engine switch is turned to ON after
the engine switch has been turned
off.
If the engine output restriction con-
trol or brake control operates, a
buzzer will sound and a message
will be displayed on the audio sys-
tem screen and multi-information
display, to alert the driver.
Depending on the situation, engine
output restriction control will oper-
ate to either limit acceleration or
restrict output as much as possible.
Engine output restriction con-
trol is operating (acceleration
restriction)
Acceleration greater than a certain
amount is restricted by the system.
Audio system screen (Panoramic
view monitor) (If equipped): No
warning displayed
Multi-information display: “Object
Detected Acceleration Reduced”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-
nated
Buzzer: Does not sound
Engine output restriction con-
trol is operating (output
restricted as much as possi-
ble)
The system has determined that
stronger-than-normal brake opera-
tion is necessary.
Audio system screen (Panoramic
view monitor) (If equipped):
“BRAKE!”
Multi-information display/Head-up
display (if equipped): “Brake!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-
nated
Buzzer: Short beep
Brake control is operating
The system determined that emer-
gency braking is necessary.
Audio system screen (Panoramic
view monitor) (If equipped):
“BRAKE!”
Multi-information display/Head-up
display (if equipped): “Brake!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illumi-
nated
Buzzer: Short beep
Vehicle stopped by system
operation
The vehicle has been stopped by
brake control operation.
Audio system screen (Panoramic
view monitor) (If equipped): “Press
Brake Pedal”
Multi-information display/Head-up
display (if equipped): “Switch to
Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is
not depressed, “Press Brake Pedal”
will be displayed.)
PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Displays and buzzers for
engine output restriction
control and brake control
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a
detected object is possible, the engine output will be restricted to
restrain any increase in the vehicle speed. (Engine output restriction
control: See figure 2.)
Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the
brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed.
(Brake control: See figure 3.)
Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is disabled
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Figure 2 When engine output restriction control operates
System overview
293
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Engine output restriction control begins operating
System determines that possibility of collision with detected
object is high
Engine output reduced
Example: Multi-information display: “Brake!”
Figure 3 When brake control operates
Engine output
Braking force
Time
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
Engine output restriction control begins operating
System determines that possibility of collision with detected
object is high
Engine output reduced
System determines that possibility of collision with detected
object is extremely high
Brake control begins operating
Brake control strength increased
Example: Multi-information display: “Brake!”
Example: Multi-information display: “Switch to Brake”
■ If the Parking Support Brake
has operated
If the vehicle is stopped due to oper-
ation of the Parking Support Brake,
the Parking Support Brake will be
disabled and the PKSB OFF indica-
tor will illuminate. If the Parking Sup-
port Brake operates unnecessarily,
brake control can be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal or wait-
ing for approximately 2 seconds for
it to automatically be canceled.
Then, the vehicle can be operated
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-
port Brake
To re-enable the Parking Support
Brake when it has been disabled
due to system operation perform
any of the following operations.
At this time, the PKSB OFF indicator
will turn off. (P.7 6)
● Turn the PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) on (P.290)
● The shift lever is in P.
● Drive with no operation targets in
the traveling direction of the vehi-
cle
● Change the traveling direction of
the vehicle
■ If “PKSB Unavailable” is dis-
played on the multi-information
display and the PKSB OFF indi-
cator is flashing
● If this message is displayed only
when the shift lever is in any posi-
tion other than R, a sensor on the
front or rear bumper may be dirty.
Clean the sensors and their sur-
rounding area on the bumpers.
● Initialization may not have been
performed after a battery terminal
was disconnected and recon-
nected. Initialize the system.
(P.295)
If this message continues to be
displayed even after initialization,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable”
and “Parking Assist Unavail-
able Clean Parking Assist Sen-
sor” is displayed on the
multi-information display and
the PKSB OFF indicator is
flashing
● A sensor may be covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice,
snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to
return the system to normal.
If this message is shown even
after removing dirt from the sen-
sor, or shown when the sensor
was not dirty to begin with, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toy-
295
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
ota dealer.
● A sensor may be frozen. Once the
ice melts, the system will return to
normal.
● Water may be continuously flow-
ing over the sensor surface, such
as in a heavy rain. When the sys-
tem determines that it is normal,
the system will return to normal.
■ If a battery terminal has been
disconnected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized.
To initialize the system, drive the
vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds
or more at a speed of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h) or more.
296
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
This function will operate in situations such as the following if an
object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not
depressed, or is depressed late
Parking Support Brake function (static objects)
*
If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the trav-
elling direction of the vehicle and the system determines that
a collision may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving for-
ward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the
vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong
shift lever position, or while parking or traveling at low
speeds, the system will operate to lessen the impact with the
detected static object and reduce the resulting damage.
Examples of function operation
297
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively
■ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to
the wrong shift lever position
P.276
Types of sensors
WARNING
■ To ensure the Parking Sup-
port Brake can operate prop-
erly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the sensors (
P.276).
Failure to do so may cause a sen-
sor to not operate properly, and
may cause an accident.
● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Do not replace a sensor with a
part other than a genuine part.
● Do not subject a sensor or its
surrounding area to a strong
impact.
● Do not damage the sensors,
and always keep them clean.
● If the area around a radar sen-
sor is subjected to an impact,
the system may not operate
properly due to a sensor mal-
function. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Handling the suspension
Do not modify the suspension, as
changes to the height or inclina-
tion of the vehicle may prevent
the sensors from detecting
objects correctly or cause the sys-
tem to not operate or operate
unnecessarily.
■ If the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) oper-
ates unnecessarily, such as
at a railroad crossing
In the event that the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (static objects)
operates unnecessarily, such as
at a railroad crossing, brake con-
trol will be canceled after approxi-
mately 2 seconds, allowing you to
proceed forward and leave the
area, brake control can also be
canceled by depressing the brake
pedal. Depressing the accelera-
tor pedal after brake control is
canceled will allow you to proceed
forward and leave the area.
■ Notes when washing the vehi-
cle
Do not apply intensive bursts of
water or steam to the sensor
area.
Doing so may result in the sensor
malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure
washer to wash the vehicle, do
not spray the sensors directly,
as doing so may cause a sensor
to malfunction.
● When using steam to clean the
vehicle, do not direct steam too
close to the sensors as doing so
may cause a sensor to malfunc-
tion.
■ When to disable the Parking
Support Brake
In the following situations, disable
the Parking Support Brake as the
system may operate even though
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion.
● When inspecting the vehicle
using a chassis roller, chassis
dynamo or free roller
● When loading the vehicle onto a
boat, truck or other transport
vessel
● If the suspension has been
modified or tires of a size other
than specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is
raised or lowered due to the
carried load
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed,
such as a towing eyelet, bumper
protector (an additional trim
strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or
snow plow
● When using an automatic car
wash
299
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (static object) will
operate when
The function will operate when the
PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-
nated or flashing (P.75, 76) and all
of the following conditions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15
km/h) or less.
• There is a static object in the trav-
eling direction of the vehicle and 6
to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that a stronger-than-nor-
mal brake operation is necessary
to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is
operating.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that an immediate brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision.
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) will
stop operating when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• The system determines that the
collision has become avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• The static object is no longer 6 to
13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the
vehicle or in the traveling direction
of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• The static object is no longer 6 to
13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the
vehicle or in the traveling direction
of the vehicle.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (static
objects)
P.294
■ Detection range of the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects)
The detection range of the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) differs from the detection
range of the intuitive parking assist.
(P.281) Therefore, even if the intu-
itive parking assist detects an object
and provides a warning, the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may not start operating.
■ Objects that the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (static
objects) may not detect
The sensors may not be able to
detect certain objects, such as the
following:
● Pedestrian
● Cotton cloth, snow, and other
materials that are poor reflectors
of ultrasonic waves
● Objects which are not perpendicu-
lar to the ground, are not perpen-
dicular to the traveling direction of
the vehicle, are uneven or are
waving
● Low objects
● Thin objects such as wires,
fences, ropes and signposts
● Objects that are extremely close
to the bumper
● Sharply-angled objects
● Tall objects with upper sections
projecting outwards in the direc-
tion of your vehicle
300
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Situation in which the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may not operate
When driving with the shift lever in
N.
■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer
Regardless of whether the intuitive
parking assist system is enabled or
not (P.277), if the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) is
enabled (P.290), the front or rear
sensors detect an object and brake
control is performed, the intuitive
parking assist buzzer will sound to
notify the driver of the approximate
distance to the object.
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may operate even if
there is no possibility of a colli-
sion
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) may operate
even though there is no possibility of
a collision.
● Vehicle surroundings
• When driving on a narrow road
• When driving on a gravel road or
in an area with tall grass
• When driving toward a banner,
flag, low-hanging branch or boom
barrier (such as those used at rail-
road crossings, toll gates and
parking lots)
• When driving on a narrow path
surrounded by a structure, such
as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When parallel parking
• When there is a rut or hole in the
surface of the road
• When driving on a metal cover
(grating), such as those used for
drainage ditches
• When driving on a steep slope
• If a sensor is hit by a large amount
of water, such as when driving on
a flooded road
● Weather
• If a sensor is covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the
system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a
sensor
• When driving in inclement weather
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When strong winds are blowing
● Other ultrasonic wave sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle
detectors, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, the clear-
ance sonar of other vehicles or
other devices which produce ultra-
sonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic compo-
nent, such as a backlit license
plate (especially fluorescent type),
fog lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna is installed near a sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or
other impact
• If a sensor has been painted or
covered with a sticker, etc.
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function (static
objects) may not operate prop-
erly
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, this function may not oper-
301
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
ate properly.
● Weather
• When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold
• When strong winds are blowing
• If a sensor is covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the
system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a
sensor
• When driving in inclement weather
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When the sensor is frozen (Once
the sensor thaws, the system will
return to normal)
● Vehicle surroundings
• When an object that cannot be
detected is between the vehicle
and a detected object
• If an object such as a vehicle,
motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian
cuts in front of the vehicle or runs
out from the side of the vehicle
• The vehicle is approaching a tall
or curved curb.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• If objects draw too close to the
sensor.
● Other ultrasonic waves sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle
detectors, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, the clear-
ance sonar of other vehicles or
other devices which produce ultra-
sonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic compo-
nent, such as a backlit license
plate (especially fluorescent type),
fog lights, fender pole or wireless
antenna is installed near a sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has
been changed due to a collision or
other impact
• When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a bumper protector (an addi-
tional trim strip, etc.), bicycle car-
rier, or snow plow
• If the suspension has been modi-
fied or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
• If a sensor has been painted or
covered with a sticker, etc.
302
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehi-
cle is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal
is not depressed, or is depressed late
P.272
Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing
vehicles)
*
If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system deter-
mines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function
will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an
impact with the approaching vehicle.
Examples of function operation
Types of sensors
WARNING
■ To ensure the Parking Sup-
port Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) can
operate properly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the rear radar sensors
(P.272). Failure to do so may
cause a sensor to not operate
properly, and may cause an acci-
dent.
303
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehi-
cles) will operate when
The function will operate when the
PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-
nated or flashing (P.75, 76) and all
of the following conditions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is
enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15
km/h) or less.
• Vehicles which are approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle at a traveling speed of
less than approximately 5 mph (8
km/h)
• The shift lever is in R.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that a stronger than normal
brake operation is necessary to
avoid a collision with an approach-
ing vehicle.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is
operating.
• The Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that an emergency brake
operation is necessary to avoid a
collision with an approaching vehi-
cle.
■ The Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehi-
cles) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if
any of the following conditions are
met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• The collision becomes avoidable
with normal brake operation.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-
abled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have
elapsed since the vehicle was
stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed
after the vehicle is stopped by
brake control.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (rear-cross-
ing vehicles)
P.294
■ Detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)
The detection area of the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-cross-
ing vehicles) differs from the detec-
tion area of the RCTA function
(P.287). Therefore, even if the
RCTA function detects a vehicle and
provides an alert, the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (rear-crossing
vehicles) may not start operating.
WARNING
● Do not modify, disassemble or
paint the sensors.
● Do not replace a rear radar sen-
sor with a part other than a gen-
uine part.
● Do not damage the rear radar
sensors, and always keep the
radar sensors and their sur-
rounding area on the bumper
clean.
● If the area around a rear radar
sensor is subjected to an
impact, the system may not
operate properly due to a sen-
sor malfunction. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● Observe the rear radar sensor
handling precautions. (
P.272)
304
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Conditions under which the
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear-crossing vehicles)
will not detect a vehicle
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) is not
designed to detect the following
types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking
space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot
detect due to obstructions
● Vehicles which suddenly acceler-
ate or decelerate near your vehi-
cle
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked
vehicles and similar stationary
objects
● Small motorcycles, bicycles,
pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles moving away from your
vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the
parking spaces next to your vehi-
cle
*
● Objects which are extremely close
to a radar sensor
*
● Vehicles which are approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle at a traveling speed of
less than approximately 5 mph (8
km/h)
● Vehicles which are approaching
from the right or left at the rear of
the vehicle at a traveling speed of
more than approximately 15 mph
(24 km/h)
*
: Depending on the conditions,
detection of a vehicle and/or
object may occur.
■ PKSB buzzer
If the Parking Support Brake is
enabled and brake control is per-
formed, a buzzer will sound to notify
the driver.
■ Situations in which the system
may operate even though there
is no possibility of a collision
In some situations such as the fol-
lowing, the Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles)
may operate even though there is
no possibility of a collision.
● When the parking space faces a
street and vehicles are being
driven on the street
● When a detected vehicle turns
while approaching the vehicle
● When a vehicle passes by the
side of your vehicle
305
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
● When the distance between your
vehicle and metal objects, such as
a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked
vehicle, which may reflect electri-
cal waves toward the rear of the
vehicle, is short
● When there are spinning objects
near your vehicle such as the fan
of an air conditioning unit
● When water is splashed or
sprayed toward the rear bumper,
such as from a sprinkler
■ Situations in which the Parking
Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) may
not operate properly
In some situations, such as the fol-
lowing, the radar sensors may not
detect an object and this function
may not operate properly
● Stationary objects
● When a sensor or the area around
a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the rear bumper is covered with
ice, snow, dirt, etc.
● If a sensor has been painted or
covered with a sticker, etc.
● When it is raining heavily or water
strikes the vehicle
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted
● When equipment that may
obstruct a sensor is installed, such
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-
tector (an additional trim strip,
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● If the suspension has been modi-
fied or tires of a size other than
specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised
or lowered due to the carried load
● If an electronic component, such
as a backlit license plate (espe-
cially fluorescent type), fog lights,
fender pole or wireless antenna is
installed near a radar sensor
● If the orientation of a radar sensor
has been changed
● When multiple vehicles are
approaching with only a small gap
between each vehicle
● If a vehicle is approaching the rear
of your vehicle rapidly
● Situations in which the radar sen-
sor may not detect a vehicle
• When a vehicle approaches from
the right or left at the rear of the
vehicle while you are turning while
backing up
• When turning while backing up
• When backing out of a shallow
angle parking spot
• When backing up on a slope with
a sharp change in grade
306
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
• When a vehicle turns into the
detection area
Multi-information display
Driving mode select switch
Operate the driving mode select
switch forward or backward to
select the desired driving mode on
the multi-information display.
1 Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel
economy, quietness, and dynamic
performance. Suitable for normal
driving.
2 Sport mode
Controls the transmission and
engine to provide quick, powerful
acceleration. This mode also
changes the steering feel, making it
suitable for when agile driving
response is desired, such as when
Driving mode select
switch
The driving modes can be
selected to suit the driving
and usage conditions.
Selecting a driving mode
307
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
driving on roads with many curves.
When Sport mode is selected,
Sport mode indicator comes on.
3 Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco-friendly manner and improve
fuel economy through moderate
throttle characteristics and by con-
trolling the operation of the air con-
ditioning system (heating/cooling).
When Eco drive mode is selected,
Eco drive mode indicator comes
on.
■ When changing to a driving
mode other than normal mode
Switches to AWD control suitable for
the selected mode. (for Dynamic
Torque Vectoring AWD vehicles
only)
■ Air conditioning system opera-
tion in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, heating/cooling
operations and the fan speed is con-
trolled to improve fuel efficiency.
Perform the following procedures to
increase the air conditioning perfor-
mance.
● Vehicle with a 12.3-inch display:
Turn eco air conditioning mode off
(P.341)
● Adjust the fan speed (P.328,
334)
● Cancel Eco drive mode
■ Canceling a driving mode
● Sport mode is automatically can-
celed and the driving mode
returns to normal mode when the
engine switch is turned off.
● Normal mode and Eco drive mode
are not canceled until another
driving mode is selected. (Even if
the engine switch is turned off,
normal mode and Eco drive mode
will not be automatically can-
celed.)
Multi-terrain Select
(AWD vehicles)
Multi-terrain Select is a sys-
tem that improves drivabil-
ity in off-road situations.
When driving over muddy,
sandy or rough road sur-
faces, the system selects a
suitable driving mode to
switch AWD, brake and
drive force control to per-
form control suitable for the
road condition.
WARNING
■ Before using Multi-terrain
Select
Make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions. Failure to
observe these precautions may
result in an unexpected accident.
● Check that the Mud & Sand and
Rock & Dirt indicators are illumi-
nated before driving. Multi-ter-
rain Select will not operate
when the indicators are off.
● Do not rely solely upon the
Multi-terrain Select. This func-
tion is not intended to expand
the limits of the vehicle. If the
system is continuously used for
a long period of time, the load
on related parts increases and
the system may be unable to
operate normally, which may
lead to an accident. Thoroughly
check the road conditions and
driving route before driving, and
drive with caution.
308
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
Control that is suitable for the
following road conditions can be
performed by switching to either
of the two modes. Select a
mode that is appropriate for the
road condition.
■ Mud & Sand mode
Suitable for driving on roads
with increased driving resis-
tance such as sandy roads,
muddy roads, etc.
■ Rock & Dirt mode
Suitable for driving in bumpy
road conditions, such as on
unpaved forest roads.
■ Dynamic Torque Control
AWD vehicles
1 Mud & Sand mode
When the switch is pressed while
not in Mud & Sand mode, the sys-
tem switches to Mud & Sand mode
and the Mud & Sand mode indica-
tor, VSC OFF indicator and PCS
warning light illuminate on the
multi-information display.
2 Normal mode
Mode that performs AWD, brake
and drive force control suitable for
driving on general roads. Use nor-
mal mode when not driving
off-road.
The driving mode returns to normal
mode if the switch is pressed while
in Mud & Sand mode or Rock & Dirt
mode.
3 Rock & Dirt mode
When the switch is pressed while
not in Rock & Dirt mode, the sys-
tem switches to Rock & Dirt mode
and the Rock & Dirt mode indicator
illuminates on the multi-information
display.
WARNING
● The road conditions listed
(Guidelines for selecting each
mode:P.308) are for reference
only. There is a chance that the
function may not be the most
appropriate in terms of road
conditions such as pitch, slip-
periness, undulation, etc. Thor-
oughly check the road
conditions before driving.
Guidelines for selecting
each mode
Changing the mode
309
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring
AWD vehicles
1 Mud & Sand mode
When the switch is turned to the left
while not in Mud & Sand mode, the
system switches to Mud & Sand
mode and the Mud & Sand mode
indicator, VSC OFF indicator and
PCS warning light illuminate on the
multi-information display.
2 Normal mode
Mode that performs AWD, brake
and drive force control suitable for
driving on general roads. Use nor-
mal mode when not driving
off-road.
The driving mode returns to normal
mode if the switch is pressed while
in Mud & Sand mode or Rock & Dirt
mode.
3 Rock & Dirt mode
When the switch is turned to the
right while not in Rock & Dirt mode,
the system switches to Rock & Dirt
mode and the Rock & Dirt mode
indicator illuminates on the
multi-information display.
■ Multi-terrain Select
● Multi-terrain Select is intended for
use when driving on rough roads.
Drive in normal mode during nor-
mal driving.
● The Mud & Sand and Rock & Dirt
modes control the vehicle so that
it can maximize the drive force
and improve drivability on rough
roads. As a result, fuel efficiency
may diminish when compared to
driving in normal mode.
■ If Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt
mode is selected
● The background of the multi-infor-
mation display will change follow-
ing the Multi-terrain Select mode.
● The AWD operation status display
will automatically switch on the
multi-information display.
■ AWD control for Mud & Sand
and Rock & Dirt modes
If the vehicle speed exceeds the
speeds listed below, AWD control is
performed similar to that performed
in Normal mode, even if Mud &
Sand or Rock & Dirt mode is
selected.
● Mud & Sand mode: Vehicle speed
is approximately 25 mph (40
km/h) or more
● Rock & Dirt mode: Vehicle speed
is approximately 16 mph (25
km/h) or more
If the vehicle speed drops below the
above speeds, the system automati-
cally switches to the AWD control
suitable for each mode.
■ When Multi-terrain Select brake
control temporarily stops oper-
ating
If Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt mode
is continuously used for a long
period of time, the brakes may over-
heat, and Multi-terrain Select brake
control may temporarily stop operat-
ing.
● At this time, the buzzer sounds
intermittently and “Traction Con-
trol Turned OFF” is displayed on
the multi-information display.
● If Multi-terrain Select brake control
stops operating, stop the vehicle
in a safe location as soon as pos-
sible
*
and wait until the system
310
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
temperature decreases. Once the
display message on the
multi-information display turns off,
the brake control returns to nor-
mal. Note that normal driving is
still possible even when Multi-ter-
rain Select brake control is not
operating.
*
: After stopping the vehicle, do not
stop the engine until the display
message has turned off.
■ When Mud & Sand or Rock &
Dirt mode is canceled
In the following situations, Mud &
Sand mode or Rock & Dirt mode are
automatically canceled even if they
are selected.
● When the driving mode is
changed (P.306)
● When the engine switch is turned
off
■ Driving in Mud & Sand or Rock
& Dirt mode
The following types of situations
may occur, but they are not malfunc-
tions.
● Vibrations may be felt throughout
the vehicle or steering wheel
● Operating noise may be heard
from the engine compartment
■ When an inspection at your
Toyota dealer is necessary
In the following situations, the sys-
tem may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
● When the slip indicator light illumi-
nates while Mud & Sand or Rock
& Dirt mode is selected
● When the indicator for each mode
does not illuminate even though
Mud & Sand or Rock & Dirt mode
is selected
Press the snow mode switch.
When the switch is pressed, the
system switches to snow mode and
the snow mode indicator illuminates
on the multi-information display.
When the switch is pressed again,
the snow mode indicator turns off.
■ When changing to snow mode
The background of the multi-infor-
mation display changes.
■ Canceling the snow mode
Snow mode is automatically can-
celed when the engine switch is
turned OFF or Mud & Sand or Rock
& Dirt mode is selected for Multi-ter-
rain Select.
Snow mode switch
Snow mode can be selected
to suit the conditions when
driving on slippery road sur-
faces, such as on snow.
System operation
311
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
*
: If equipped
Press the “DAC” switch.
The downhill assist control system
indicator will comes on and the sys-
tem will operate.
When the system is in operation,
the slip indicator will flash, and the
stop lights/high mounted stop lights
will be lit. A sound may also occur
during the operation. This does not
indicated a malfunction.
Press the “DAC” switch while
the system is in operation.
The downhill assist control system
indicator will flash as the system
gradually ceases operation, and will
turn off when the system is fully off.
Press the “DAC” switch while the
downhill assist control system indi-
cator is flashing to start the system
again.
■ Operating tips
The system will operate when the
shift lever is in a position other than
P, however to make effective use of
the system it is recommended to
select a lower shift range.
■ If the downhill assist control
system indicator flashes
● In the following situations, the indi-
cator flashes and the system will
not operate:
• The shift lever is in a position P.
• The vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake system overheats.
● In the following situation, the indi-
cator flashes to alert the driver,
but the system will operate:
• The “DAC” switch is turned off
while the system is operating.
The system will gradually ceases
operation. The indicator will flash
during operation, and then go off
Downhill assist con-
trol system
*
The downhill assist control
system helps to prevent
excessive speed on steep
downhill slopes.
The system will operate
when the vehicle is traveling
under 18 mph (30 km/h).
WARNING
■ When using downhill assist
control system
Do not rely overmuch on the
downhill assist control system.
This function does not extend the
vehicle’s performance limitations.
Always thoroughly check the road
conditions, and drive safely.
System operation
Turning off the system
312
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
when the system is fully off.
■ When the downhill assist con-
trol system is operated continu-
ously
This may cause the brake actuator
to overheat. In this case, the down-
hill assist control system will stop
operating, a buzzer will sound and
the downhill assist control system
indicator will start flashing, and
“Traction Control Turned OFF” will
be shown on the multi-information
display. Refrain from using the sys-
tem until the downhill assist control
system indicator stays on and the
message goes off. (The vehicle can
be driven normally during this time.)
■ Sounds and vibrations caused
by the downhill assist control
system
● A sound may be heard from the
engine compartment when the
engine is started or just after the
vehicle begins to move. This
sound does not indicate that a
malfunction has occurred in down-
hill assist control system.
● Either of the following conditions
may occur when the downhill
assist control system is operating.
None of these are indicators that a
malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after
the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ System malfunction
In the following cases, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer.
● The downhill assist control system
indicator does not come on when
the engine switch is turned to ON.
● The downhill assist control system
indicator does not come on when
the “DAC” switch is pressed.
● The slip indicator comes on.
WARNING
■ The system may not operate
on the following surfaces,
which may lead to an acci-
dent causing death or serious
injury
● Slippery surfaces such as wet
or muddy roads
● Icy surface
● Unpaved roads
313
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
Helps to prevent wheel lock
when the brakes are applied
suddenly, or if the brakes are
applied while driving on a slip-
pery road surface
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of
braking force after the brake
pedal is depressed when the
system detects a panic stop sit-
uation
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-
trol)
Helps the driver to control skid-
ding when swerving suddenly or
turning on slippery road sur-
faces
■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced
Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of
the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional
stability when swerving on slip-
pery road surfaces by con-
trolling steering performance.
■ Trailer Sway Control
Helps the driver to control trailer
sway by selectively applying
brake pressure for individual
wheels and reducing driving
torque when trailer sway is
detected.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power
and prevent the drive wheels
from spinning when starting the
vehicle or accelerating on slip-
pery roads
■ Active Cornering Assist
(ACA)
Helps to prevent the vehicle
from drifting to the outer side by
performing inner wheel brake
control when attempting to
accelerate while turning
■ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward
movement of the vehicle when
starting on an uphill
■ EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing)
Employs an electric motor to
reduce the amount of effort
needed to turn the steering
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and
performance, the following
systems operate automati-
cally in response to various
driving situations. Be
aware, however, that these
systems are supplementary
and should not be relied
upon too heavily when oper-
ating the vehicle.
Summary of the driving
assist systems
314
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
wheel
■ Dynamic Torque Control
AWD system (AWD models)
Automatically switches from
front-wheel drive to all-wheel
drive (AWD) according to the
driving conditions, helping to
ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of conditions
where the system will switch to
AWD are when cornering, going
uphill, starting off or accelerat-
ing, and when the road surface
is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.
■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring
AWD system (AWD models)
Automatically switches from
front-wheel drive to all-wheel
drive (AWD) according to the
driving conditions, helping to
ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of conditions
where the system will switch to
AWD are when cornering, going
uphill, starting off or accelerat-
ing, and when the road surface
is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.
Also, when the vehicle is corner-
ing, the drive torque distribution
between the front and rear
wheels and between the rear left
and right wheels is precisely
controlled to improve drivability
and stability.
■ The Secondary Collision
Brake
When the SRS airbag sensor
detects a collision and the sys-
tem operates, the brakes and
brake lights are automatically
controlled to reduce the vehicle
speed and help reduce the pos-
sibility of further damage due to
a secondary collision.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems are oper-
ating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway
Control systems are operating.
■ Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt
or snow, the TRAC system may
reduce power from the engine to the
wheels. Pressing the switch to
turn the system off may make it eas-
ier for you to rock the vehicle in
order to free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly
press and release the switch.
The “Traction Control Turned OFF”
will be shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
315
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
■ Turning off both TRAC, VSC
and Trailer Sway Control sys-
tems
To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer
Sway Control systems off, press
and hold the switch for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “Traction Control
Turned OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display.
*
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
*
: On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Colli-
sion System), PCS will also be
disabled (only Pre-Collision warn-
ing is available). The PCS warning
light will come on and a message
will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
(P.233)
■ When the message is dis-
played on the multi-information
display showing that TRAC has
been disabled even if the
switch has not been pressed
TRAC is temporary deactivated. If
the information continues to show,
contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Operating conditions of
hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions
are met, the hill-start assist control
will operate:
● The shift lever is in a position
other than P or N (when starting
off forward/backward on an
upward incline)
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not
depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
■ Automatic system cancelation
of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn
off in any of the following situations:
● The shift lever is shifted to P or N
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed
after the brake pedal is released
■ Sounds and vibrations caused
by the ABS, brake assist, VSC,
Trailer Sway Control, TRAC and
hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the
engine compartment when the
brake pedal is depressed repeat-
edly, when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to
move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions
may occur when the above sys-
tems are operating. None of these
indicates that a malfunction has
occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the
vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also
after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate
slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down
slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ Active Cornering Assist opera-
tion sounds and vibrations
When the Active Cornering Assist is
operated, operation sounds and
vibrations may be generated from
the brake system, but this is not a
malfunction.
■ AWD system operation sounds
and vibrations when switching
between AWD and front wheel
drive
When the vehicle switches from
AWD to front wheel drive and vice
versa, operation sounds and vibra-
316
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
tions may be generated, but this is
not a malfunction.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is oper-
ated, a motor sound (whirring
sound) may be heard. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the
EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS sys-
tem is reduced to prevent the sys-
tem from overheating when there is
frequent steering input over an
extended period of time. The steer-
ing wheel may feel heavy as a
result. Should this occur, refrain
from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the engine
off. The EPS system should return
to normal within 10 minutes.
■ Automatic reactivation of
TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and
VSC systems
After turning the TRAC, Trailer
Sway Control and VSC systems off,
the systems will be automatically
re-enabled in the following situa-
tions:
● When the engine switch is turned
OFF
● If only the TRAC system is turned
off, the TRAC will turn on when
vehicle speed increases
If both the TRAC and VSC sys-
tems are turned off, automatic
re-enabling will not occur when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Operating conditions of Active
Cornering Assist
The system operates when the fol-
lowing occurs.
● TRAC/VSC can operate
● The driver is attempting to accel-
erate while turning
● The system detects that the vehi-
cle is drifting to the outer side
● The brake pedal is released
■ Secondary Collision Brake
operating conditions
The system operates when the SRS
airbag sensor detects a collision
while the vehicle is in motion.
However, the system does not oper-
ate in any of the following situations.
● The vehicle speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h)
● Components are damaged
■ Secondary Collision Brake
automatic cancellation
The system is automatically can-
celed in any of the following situa-
tions.
● The vehicle speed drops below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
● A certain amount of time elapses
during operation
● The accelerator pedal is
depressed a large amount
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate
effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping perfor-
mance have been exceeded
(such as excessively worn tires
on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while
driving at high speed on wet or
slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the
ABS is operating may exceed
that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to
shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-
tance. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front of
you, especially in the following sit-
uations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or
snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
317
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
WARNING
● When driving over bumps in the
road
● When driving over roads with
potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate
effectively when
Directional control and power may
not be achievable while driving on
slippery road surfaces, even if the
TRAC/VSC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in con-
ditions where stability and power
may be lost.
■ Active Cornering Assist does
not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on Active
Cornering Assist. Active Corner-
ing Assist may not operate
effectively when accelerating
down slopes or driving on slip-
pery road surfaces.
● When Active Cornering Assist
frequently operates, Active Cor-
nering Assist may temporarily
stop operating to ensure proper
operation of the brakes, TRAC
and VSC.
■ Hill-start assist control does
not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start
assist control. Hill-start assist
control may not operate effec-
tively on steep inclines and
roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake,
hill-start assist control is not
intended to hold the vehicle sta-
tionary for an extended period
of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold
the vehicle on an incline, as
doing so may lead to an acci-
dent.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control is activated
The slip indicator light flashes.
Always drive carefully. Reckless
driving may cause an accident.
Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control systems are
turned off
● Be especially careful and drive
at a speed appropriate to the
road conditions. As these are
the systems to help ensure
vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the
TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-
trol systems off unless neces-
sary.
● Trailer Sway Control is part of
the VSC system and will not
operate if VSC is turned off or
experiences a malfunction.
■ Dynamic Torque Vectoring
AWD system
The cornering performance of the
AWD system has been improved.
However, do not overly rely on the
system and drive with caution.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the
specified size, brand, tread pat-
tern and total load capacity. In
addition, make sure that the tires
are inflated to the recommended
tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC, Trailer Sway
Control and VSC systems will not
function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther information when replacing
tires or wheels.
318
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Handling of tires and the sus-
pension
Using tires with any kind of prob-
lem or modifying the suspension
will affect the driving assist sys-
tems, and may cause a system to
malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precau-
tion
The Trailer Sway Control system
is not able to reduce trailer sway
in all situations. Depending on
many factors such as the condi-
tions of the vehicle, trailer, road
surface and driving environment,
the Trailer Sway Control system
may not be effective. Refer to
your trailer owner’s manual for
information on how to tow your
trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failing to do so may cause death
or serious injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel.
Steer straight ahead. Do not try
to control trailer sway by turning
the steering wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator
pedal immediately but very
gradually to reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not
apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction
with the steering or brakes, your
vehicle and trailer should stabi-
lize. (
P.189)
■ Secondary Collision Brake
Do not rely solely upon the Sec-
ondary Collision Brake. This sys-
tem is designed to help reduce
the possibility of further damage
due to a secondary collision, how-
ever, that effect changes accord-
ing to various conditions. Overly
relying on the system may result
in death or serious injury.
319
4-6. Driving tips
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
4-6.Driving tips
Use fluids that are appropriate
to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
Have a service technician
inspect the condition of the
battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with
four snow tires or purchase a
set of tire chains for the front
tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same
size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
Perform the following according
to the driving conditions:
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary
preparations and inspec-
tions before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always
drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the pre-
vailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a
loss of vehicle control and cause
death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended
level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75
mph (120 km/h), regardless of
the type of snow tires being
used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just
some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the
vehicle being unable to be driven
safely, and may cause death or
serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the
speed limit specified for the tire
chains being used, or 30 mph
(50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road
surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
abrupt steering, sudden brak-
ing and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before
entering a curve to ensure that
vehicle control is maintained.
● Do not use the LTA (Lane Trac-
ing Assist) system.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow
tires
Request repairs or replacement of
snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and
attachment of snow tires affects
the operation of the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters.
Before driving the vehicle
320
4-6. Driving tips
HIGHLANDER_U
Do not try to forcibly open a
window or move a wiper that
is frozen. Pour warm water
over the frozen area to melt
the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from
freezing.
To ensure proper operation of
the climate control system
fan, remove any snow that
has accumulated on the air
inlet vents in front of the wind-
shield.
Check for and remove any
excess ice or snow that may
have accumulated on the
exterior lights, vehicle’s roof,
chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud
from the bottom of your shoes
before getting in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly,
keep a safe distance between
you and the vehicle ahead, and
drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
Park the vehicle and move
the shift lever to P without set-
ting the parking brake. The
parking brake may freeze up,
preventing it from being
released. If the vehicle is
parked without setting the
parking brake, make sure to
block the wheels. Failure to
do so may be dangerous
because it may cause the
vehicle to move unexpectedly,
possibly leading to an acci-
dent.
When the parking brake is in auto-
matic mode, release the parking
brake after shifting the shift lever to
P. (P.209)
If the vehicle is parked without
setting the parking brake,
confirm that the shift lever
cannot be moved out of P
*
.
*
: The shift lever will be locked if it is
attempted to be shifted from P to
any other position without
depressing the brake pedal. If the
shift lever can be shifted from P,
there may be a problem with the
shift lock system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
Use the correct tire chain size
when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each
tire size.
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle
Selecting tire chains
321
4-6. Driving tips
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in
diameter)
Side chain (0.39 in. [10 mm]
in width)
Side chain (1.18 in. [30 mm]
in length)
Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm]
in diameter)
Cross chain (0.55 in. [14 mm]
in width)
Cross chain (0.98 in. [25 mm]
in length)
Regulations regarding the use
of tire chains vary depending on
location and type of road.
Always check local regulations
before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions
when installing and removing
chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a
safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires
only. Do not install tire chains on
the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as
tightly as possible. Retighten
chains after driving 1/41/2 mile
(0.51.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the
instructions provided with the tire
chains.
Regulations on the use of
tire chains
NOTICE
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not function
correctly when tire chains are fit-
ted.
322
4-6. Driving tips
HIGHLANDER_U
Specific design characteris-
tics give it a higher center of
gravity than ordinary passen-
ger cars. This vehicle design
feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems.
It is not designed for corner-
ing at the same speeds as
ordinary passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds
may cause the vehicle to roll-
over.
Utility vehicle precau-
tions
This vehicle belongs to the
utility vehicle class, which
has higher ground clear-
ance and narrower tread in
relation to the height of its
center of gravity.
Utility vehicle feature
WARNING
■ Utility vehicle precautions
Always observe the following pre-
cautions to minimize the risk of
death, serious injury or damage to
your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. Therefore, the
driver and all passengers
should always fasten their seat
belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover caus-
ing death or serious injury.
● Loading cargo on the roof lug-
gage carrier (if equipped) will
make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp
turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may
result in loss of control or vehi-
cle rollover due to failure to
operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty
crosswinds. Because of its pro-
file and higher center of gravity,
your vehicle is more sensitive to
side winds than an ordinary
passenger car. Slowing down
will allow you to have better
control.
● Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up
or straight down is preferred.
Your vehicle (or any similar
off-road vehicle) can tip over
sideways much more easily
than forward or backward.
323
4-6. Driving tips
HIGHLANDER_U
4
Driving
When driving your vehicle
off-road, please observe the fol-
lowing precautions to ensure
your driving enjoyment and to
help prevent the closure of
areas to off-road vehicles:
Drive your vehicle only in
areas where off-road vehicles
are permitted to travel.
Respect private property. Get
owner’s permission before
entering private property.
Do not enter areas that are
closed. Honor gates, barriers
and signs that restrict travel.
Stay on established roads.
When conditions are wet,
driving techniques should be
changed or travel delayed to
prevent damage to roads.
■ Additional information for
off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland,
Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information per-
taining to driving your vehicle
off-road, consult the following orga-
nizations.
● State and Local Parks and Recre-
ation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
Land Management
Off-road driving
WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following pre-
cautions to minimize the risk of
death, serious injury or damage to
your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the
road. Do not take unnecessary
risks by driving in dangerous
places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel
spokes when driving off-road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel
and injure your hands. Keep
both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the
rim.
● Always check your brakes for
effectiveness immediately after
driving in sand, mud, water or
snow.
● After driving through tall grass,
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc.,
check that there is no grass,
bush, paper, rags, stone, sand,
etc. adhering or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such
matter from the underbody. If
the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to
the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.
● When driving off-road or in rug-
ged terrain, do not drive at
excessive speeds, jump, make
sharp turns, strike objects, etc.
This may cause loss of control
or vehicle rollover causing
death or serious injury. You are
also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension
and chassis.
324
4-6. Driving tips
HIGHLANDER_U
NOTICE
■ To prevent water damage
Take all necessary safety mea-
sures to ensure that water dam-
age to the engine or other
components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air
intake will cause severe engine
damage.
● Water entering the automatic
transmission will cause deterio-
ration in shift quality, locking up
of your transmission accompa-
nied by vibration, and ultimately
damage.
● Water can wash the grease
from wheel bearings, causing
rusting and premature failure,
and may also enter the differen-
tial, transmission and transfer
case, reducing the gear oil’s
lubricating qualities.
■ When you drive through
water
If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the riverbed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driv-
ing
● Sand and mud that has accu-
mulated in brake drums and
around brake discs may affect
braking efficiency and may
damage brake system compo-
nents.
● Always perform a maintenance
inspection after each day of
off-road driving that has taken
you through rough terrain, sand,
mud, or water. For scheduled
maintenance information, refer
to the “Warranty and Services
Guide”.
325
HIGHLANDER_U
5
5
Interior features
Interior features
.
5-1. Toyota multi-operation
touch
Toyota multi-operation touch
.................................. 326
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front manual air condition-
ing system................. 328
Front automatic air condi-
tioning system........... 333
Rear manual air condition-
ing system................. 346
Rear automatic air condi-
tioning system........... 348
Heated steering wheel/seat
heaters/seat ventilators
.................................. 352
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.......... 355
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
.................................. 358
Luggage compartment fea-
tures.......................... 363
5-5. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features. 367
Garage door opener.... 379
326
5-1. Toyota multi-operation touch
HIGHLANDER_U
5-1.Toyota multi-operation touch
*
: Vehicle with the 12.3-inch display
The following functions can be
displayed and operated on the
toyota multi-operation touch.
Operate a switch to change the dis-
played function screen.
The displayed function can also be
changed by performing an up or
down flick operation on the Toyota
multi-operation touch.
Select to display the air con-
ditioning control screen.
(P.340, 350)
Select to display the seat
control screen. (P.353,
354)
Select to display the audio
control screen.
*
Select to display the fuel con-
sumption screen. (P.106)
2WD models: Select to dis-
play the setting screen.
(P.327)
AWD models: Select to dis-
play the vehicle information
screen. (P.87)
*
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Moving screens on the Toy-
ota multi-operation touch
Selecting or to change
its displayed position on the Toy-
ota multi-operation touch.
The screen position can also be
changed by perform a left or right
flick operation on a screen.
■ Displaying a screen in full
screen
Selecting or on the
energy monitor/consumption
screen or vehicle information
screen will display that screen in
full screen.
Select or to return to the
Toyota multi-opera-
tion touch
*
The Toyota multi-operation
touch allows a screen, such
as the air conditioning con-
trol screen, and the naviga-
tion screen to be displayed
and operated simultane-
ously.
Toyota multi-operation
touch overview
Toyota multi-operation
touch operation
327
5-1. Toyota multi-operation touch
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
split-screen display.
AWD models: Select “Setting”
on the vehicle information
screen to display the setting
screen.
Select slide operation on/off
Display the software informa-
tion
©1982-2013, QNX Software
Systems Limited. All rights
reserved.
Toyota multi-operation
touch settings
Copyright
328
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5-2.Using the air condition ing system and defogger
*
: If equipped
Fan speed control switch
On/off switch
Windshield defogger switch
“A/C” switch
Outside/recirculated air mode switch
Temperature control switch
“MAX A/C” switch
“REAR” switch
Press the switch to turn the rear air conditioning system on/off. (P.346)
When the rear air conditioning system is on, the indicator illuminates on the
“REAR” switch.
Airflow mode control switch
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
■ Adjusting the temperature
setting
To adjust the temperature set-
ting, turn the temperature con-
trol switch clockwise (warm) or
counterclockwise (cool).
If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the
system will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air.
■ Fan speed setting
To adjust the fan speed, turn the
fan speed control switch clock-
wise (increase) or counterclock-
wise (decrease).
Front manual air conditioning system
*
Air conditioning controls
329
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Pressing the on/off switch turns off
the fan.
When the fan is off, pressing the
on/off switch or turning the fan
speed control switch will turn on the
fan.
■ Change the airflow mode
Press the airflow mode control
switch.
1 Upper body
2 Upper body and feet
3 Feet
4 Feet and the windshield
defogger operates
■ Switching between outside
air and recirculated air
modes
Press the outside/recirculated
air mode switch.
The mode switches between
outside air mode and recircu-
lated air mode each time the
switch is operated.
When recirculated air mode is
selected, the indicator illuminates
on the outside/recirculated air
mode switch.
■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
Press the “A/C” switch.
When the function is on, the indica-
tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the
windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press the windshield defogger
switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode switch to outside air mode if
the recirculated air mode is used.
To defog the windshield and the
side windows quickly, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press the windshield defogger
switch again when the windshield is
defogged.
When the windshield defogger
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield defogger
switch.
■ Defogging the rear window
and outside rear view mir-
rors
Defoggers are used to defog the
rear window, and to remove
raindrops, dew and frost from
the outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror
defoggers switch.
When the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror defog-
gers switch is on, the indicator illu-
330
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
minates on the rear window
defogger and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after a while.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent
ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Press the windshield wiper
de-icer switch.
When the windshield wiper de-icer
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield wiper
de-icer switch.
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after a period
of time.
■ For quick cooling
Press the “MAX A/C” switch.
The air conditioning will automati-
cally turn on.
At this time, the following will occur:
● The recirculated air mode will be
set
● The windshield defogger will turn
off
● The air flow mode will change to
the upper body mode
● The fan speed will be set to high.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up
when the humidity in the vehicle is
high. Turning the “A/C” switch on
will dehumidify the air from the
outlets and defog the windshield
effectively.
● If you turn the “A/C” switch off, the
windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the
recirculated air mode is used.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up
by the vehicle is still drawn into the
vehicle after closing the windows, it
is recommended that the air intake
mode be set to outside air mode and
the fan speed to any setting except
off.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
Setting to the recirculated air mode
temporarily is recommended in pre-
venting dirty air from entering the
vehicle interior and helping to cool
the vehicle when the outside air
temperature is high.
■ Operation of the air condition-
ing system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air condition-
ing system is controlled to prioritize
fuel efficiency by regulating the
engine speed and compressor oper-
ation to restrict the heating/cooling
capacity.
To improve air conditioning perfor-
mance, perform the following opera-
tions:
● Adjust the fan speed
● Adjust the temperature setting
● Turn off Eco drive mode (P.306)
■ When the outside temperature
is low
The dehumidification function may
not operate even when the “A/C”
switch is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning
odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-
tioning system to the outside air
mode.
● During use, various odors from
inside and outside the vehicle may
enter into and accumulate in the
air conditioning system. This may
then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from
occurring: It is recommended that
the air conditioning system be set
331
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
to outside air mode prior to turning
the vehicle off.
● When parking, the system auto-
matically switches to outside air
mode to encourage better air cir-
culation throughout the vehicle,
helping to reduce odors that occur
when starting the vehicle.
■ Air conditioning filter
P. 42 6
■ Air conditioning system refrig-
erant
● A label regarding the refrigerant of
the air conditioning system is
attached to the hood at the loca-
tion shown in the following illustra-
tion.
● The meaning of each symbol on
the label are as follows:
Caution
Air conditioning sys-
tem
Air conditioning sys-
tem lubricant type
Requires registered
technician to service
air conditioning sys-
tem
Flammable refrigerant
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield
from fogging up
Do not use the windshield defog-
ger switch during cool air opera-
tion in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
■ When the outside rear view
mirror defoggers are operat-
ing
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces when the outside rear
view mirror defoggers are on.
■ When the windshield wiper
de-icer is operating
Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the
side of the front pillars when the
windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
■ When repairing/replacing
parts of the air conditioning
system
Have repair/replacement per-
formed by your Toyota dealer.
When a part of the air conditioning
system, such as the evaporator, is
to be replaced, it must be
replaced with a new one.
332
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
change according to the
selected airflow mode.
■ Adjusting the air flow direc-
tion and opening/closing
the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
Front side outlets
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down
2 Open the vent
3 Close the vent
Air outlet layout and oper-
ations
WARNING
■ To not interrupt the wind-
shield defogger from operat-
ing
Do not place anything on the
instrument panel which may cover
the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow
may be obstructed, preventing the
windshield defoggers from defog-
ging.
333
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
*
: If equipped
Automatic mode switch (P.342)
Left-hand side temperature control switch
“OFF” switch
Windshield defogger switch
Rear air conditioning system on/off switch (P.349)
S-FLOW mode switch (P.342)
Right-hand side temperature control switch
“A/C” switch
Outside/recirculated air mode switch
“REAR CLIMATE” switch (P.349)
Rear seat temperature contorl knob (P.349)
Airflow mode control knob
Fan speed control knob
“SYNC” control knob
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Front automatic air conditioning system
*
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the temperature setting.
Vehicles with a 12.3-inch display: The air conditioning system
can be displayed and operated on the toyota multi-operation
touch.
Air conditioning controls (vehicle with a 8-inch display)
334
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
switch
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
■ Adjusting the temperature
setting
Turn driver’s side temperature
control switch clockwise to
increases the temperature and
turn the switch counterclockwise
to decreases the temperature.
If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the
system will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air.
The temperature for the driver,
front passenger and rear seats
can be adjusted separately
when:
“SYNC” control knob is
moved upward or downward.
(The “PASS” and “REAR” dis-
plays disappear)
The passenger’s side tem-
perature control switch is
turned. (The “PASS” display
disappears)
The rear seat temperature
contorl knob is moved upward
or downward. (The “REAR”
display disappears)
To the air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes move “SYNC”
control knob upward or downward.
■ Setting the fan speed
To set the fan speed, move the
fan speed control knob upward
or downward.
Upward: Increases the fan speed
Downward: Decreases the fan
speed
Pressing the “OFF” switch to turns
off the fan.
■ Change the airflow mode
To change the airflow mode,
move the airflow mode control
knob upward or downward.
1 Upper body
2 Upper body and feet
3 Feet
4 Feet and the windshield
defogger operates
■ Switching between outside
air and recirculated air
modes
Press the outside/recirculated
air mode switch.
The mode switches between out-
side air mode and recirculated air
mode each time the switch is oper-
ated.
When recirculated air mode is
335
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
selected, the indicator illuminates
on the outside/recirculated air
mode switch.
■ Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
Press the “A/C” switch.
When the function is on, the indica-
tor illuminates on the “A/C” switch.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the
windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press the windshield defogger
switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode switch to outside air mode if
the recirculated air mode is used. (It
may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows quickly, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press the windshield defogger
switch again when the windshield is
defogged.
When the windshield defogger
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield defogger
switch.
■ Defogging the rear window
and outside rear view mir-
rors
Defoggers are used to defog the
rear window and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the
outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror
defoggers switch.
When the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror defog-
gers switch is on, the indicator illu-
minates on the rear window
defogger and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after a while.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent
ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Press the windshield wiper
de-icer switch.
When the windshield wiper de-icer
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield wiper
de-icer switch.
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after a period
of time.
■ When the outside temperature
exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air
conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air condi-
tioning power consumption, the air
conditioning system may switch to
recirculated air mode automati-
cally. This may also reduce fuel
consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected
as a default mode when the
engine switch is turned to ON.
● It is possible to switch to outside
air mode at any time by pressing
the outside air mode switch.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up
when the humidity in the vehicle is
high. Turning “A/C” on will dehu-
midify the air from the outlets and
336
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows
may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the
recirculated air mode is used.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up
by the vehicle is still drawn into the
vehicle after closing the windows, it
is recommended that the air intake
mode be set to outside air mode and
the fan speed to any setting except
off.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● Setting to the recirculated air
mode temporarily is recom-
mended in preventing dirty air
from entering the vehicle interior
and helping to cool the vehicle
when the outside air temperature
is high.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may
automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the
inside temperature.
■ Operation of the air condition-
ing system in Eco drive mode
● In Eco drive mode, the air condi-
tioning system is controlled as fol-
lows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
• Engine speed and compressor
operation controlled to restrict
heating/cooling capacity
• Fan speed restricted when auto-
matic mode is selected
● To improve air conditioning perfor-
mance, perform the following
operations:
• Adjust the fan speed
• Turn off Eco drive mode (P.306)
■ When the outside temperature
is low
The dehumidification function may
not operate even when the “A/C”
switch is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning
odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-
tioning system to the outside air
mode.
● During use, various odors from
inside and outside the vehicle may
enter into and accumulate in the
air conditioning system. This may
then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from
occurring:
• It is recommended that the air
conditioning system be set to out-
side air mode prior to turning the
vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may
be delayed for a short period of
time immediately after the air con-
ditioning system is started in auto-
matic mode.
● When parking, the system auto-
matically switches to outside air
mode to encourage better air cir-
culation throughout the vehicle,
helping to reduce odors that occur
when starting the vehicle.
■ Air conditioning system opera-
tions when the engine is
stopped due to the Stop & Start
system (vehicles with Stop &
Start system)
When the engine is stopped due to
Stop & Start system operations, the
automatic air conditioning cooling,
heating and dehumidification func-
tions turn off and the fan speed is
decreased according to the outside
temperature etc. or air blowing
stops. To stop the air conditioning
system from turning off, press the
Stop & Start cancel switch and
refrain from using the Stop & Start
system.
■ When the windshield is fogged
up and the engine is stopped
due to the Stop & Start system
(vehicles with Stop & Start sys-
tem)
Press the windshield defogger
switch to restart the engine and
defog the windshield.
If the windshield continuously fogs
337
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
up, press the Stop & Start cancel
switch and refrain from using the
Stop & Start system.
■ When an odor comes from the
air conditioning system while
the engine is stopped due to the
Stop & Start system (vehicles
with Stop & Start system)
Press the Stop & Start cancel switch
to restart the engine.
■ Air conditioning filter
P. 42 6
■ Air conditioning system refrig-
erant
● A label regarding the refrigerant of
the air conditioning system is
attached to the hood at the loca-
tion shown in the following illustra-
tion.
● The meaning of each symbol on
the label are as follows:
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
Caution
Air conditioning sys-
tem
Air conditioning sys-
tem lubricant type
Requires registered
technician to service
air conditioning sys-
tem
Flammable refrigerant
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield
from fogging up
Do not use the windshield defog-
ger switch during cool air opera-
tion in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
■ When the outside rear view
mirror defoggers are operat-
ing
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces when the outside rear
view mirror defoggers are on.
■ When the windshield wiper
de-icer is operating
Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the
side of the front pillars when the
windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
■ When repairing/replacing
parts of the air conditioning
system
Have repair/replacement per-
formed by your Toyota dealer.
When a part of the air conditioning
system, such as the evaporator, is
to be replaced, it must be
replaced with a new one.
338
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
Left-hand side temperature control switch
Automatic mode switch (P.342)
Fan speed increase switch
Windshield defogger switch
Right-hand side temperature control switch
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch
Fan speed decrease switch
“OFF” switch
■ Adjusting the temperature
setting
Press to increase the
temperature and to
decrease the temperature.
If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the
system will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air.
■ Setting the fan speed
Operate the switch to
increase the fan speed and the
switch to decrease the
fan speed.
Pressing the “OFF” switch to turns
off the fan.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the
windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press the windshield defogger
switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode switch to outside air mode if
the recirculated air mode is used. (It
may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows quickly, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press the windshield defogger
switch again when the windshield is
defogged.
Air conditioning controls (vehicle with a 12.3-inch dis-
play)
339
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
When the windshield defogger
switch is on, the indicator illumi-
nates on the windshield defogger
switch.
■ Defogging the rear window
and outside rear view mir-
rors
Defoggers are used to defog the
rear window and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the
outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror
defoggers switch.
When the rear window defogger
and outside rear view mirror defog-
gers switch is on, the indicator illu-
minates on the rear window
defogger and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after a while.
■ Air conditioning system opera-
tions when the engine is
stopped due to the Stop & Start
system
When the engine is stopped due to
Stop & Start system operations, the
automatic air conditioning cooling,
heating and dehumidification func-
tions turn off and the fan speed is
decreased according to the outside
temperature etc. or air blowing
stops. To stop the air conditioning
system from turning off, press the
Stop & Start cancel switch and
refrain from using the Stop & Start
system.
■ When the windshield is fogged
up and the engine is stopped
due to the Stop & Start system
Press the windshield defogger
switch to restart the engine and
defog the windshield.
If the windshield continuously fogs
up, press the Stop & Start cancel
switch and refrain from using the
Stop & Start system.
■ When an odor comes from the
air conditioning system while
the engine is stopped due to the
Stop & Start system
Press the Stop & Start cancel switch
to restart the engine.
■ Air conditioning filter
P.426
■ Air conditioning system refrig-
erant
● A label regarding the refrigerant of
the air conditioning system is
attached to the hood at the loca-
tion shown in the following illustra-
tion.
● The meaning of each symbol on
the label are as follows:
Caution
Air conditioning sys-
tem
Air conditioning sys-
tem lubricant type
Requires registered
technician to service
air conditioning sys-
tem
Flammable refrigerant
340
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
■ Main control screen
Adjust the left side seat tem-
perature setting
Select the air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and
feet
: Air flows to the feet
: Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates
Display the option control
screen.
Adjust the fan speed setting
Adjust the right side seat
temperature setting
“SYNC” switch
If the indicator on the “SYNC”
switch is off, the temperature for the
driver, passenger and rear seats
can be adjusted separately.
Display the rear air condition-
ing control screen (P.350)
Select the outside air and
recirculated air modes
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield
from fogging up
Do not use the windshield defog-
ger switch during cool air opera-
tion in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and
that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
■ When the outside rear view
mirror defoggers are operat-
ing
Do not touch the rear view mirror
surfaces when the outside rear
view mirror defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
■ When repairing/replacing
parts of the air conditioning
system
Have repair/replacement per-
formed by your Toyota dealer.
When a part of the air conditioning
system, such as the evaporator, is
to be replaced, it must be
replaced with a new one.
Front air conditioning
control screen (vehicle
with a 12.3-inch display)
341
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Set eco air conditioning
mode
The air conditioning is controlled
with low fuel consumption priori-
tized such as reducing fan speed,
etc.
Set cooling and dehumidifi-
cation function
If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the
system will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air.
■ Option control screen
Select “Option” to display the
option control screen.
The functions can be switched on
and off.
When the function is on, the indica-
tor illuminates on the screen.
Select to display the previous
screen.
Select the S-FLOW mode
(P.342)
■ When the outside temperature
exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air
conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air condi-
tioning power consumption, the air
conditioning system may switch to
recirculated air mode automati-
cally. This may also reduce fuel
consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected
as a default mode when the
engine switch is turned to ON.
● It is possible to switch to outside
air mode at any time by pressing
the outside air mode switch.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up
when the humidity in the vehicle is
high. Turning “A/C” on will dehu-
midify the air from the outlets and
defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows
may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the
recirculated air mode is used.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up
by the vehicle is still drawn into the
vehicle after closing the windows, it
is recommended that the air intake
mode be set to outside air mode and
the fan speed to any setting except
off.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● Setting to the recirculated air
mode temporarily is recom-
mended in preventing dirty air
from entering the vehicle interior
and helping to cool the vehicle
when the outside air temperature
is high.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may
automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the
inside temperature.
■ Eco air conditioning mode
When Eco drive mode is selected
using the driving mode select
switch, eco air conditioning mode
turns on.
When a drive mode other than Eco
drive mode is selected, eco air con-
ditioning mode may turn off.
■ Operation of the air condition-
ing system in Eco drive mode
● In Eco drive mode, the air condi-
342
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
tioning system is controlled as fol-
lows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
• Engine speed and compressor
operation controlled to restrict
heating/cooling capacity
• Fan speed restricted when auto-
matic mode is selected
● To improve air conditioning perfor-
mance, perform the following
operations:
• Adjust the fan speed
• Turn off Eco drive mode (P.306)
• Turn off Eco air conditioning mode
● When the driving mode is set to
Eco driving mode, the air condi-
tioning eco mode will be turned on
automatically. Even in this case,
the air conditioning eco mode can
be turned off by pressing the Eco
air conditioning mode switch.
■ When the outside temperature
is low
The dehumidification function may
not operate even when “A/C” is
pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning
odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air condi-
tioning system to the outside air
mode.
● During use, various odors from
inside and outside the vehicle may
enter into and accumulate in the
air conditioning system. This may
then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from
occurring:
• It is recommended that the air
conditioning system be set to out-
side air mode prior to turning the
vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may
be delayed for a short period of
time immediately after the air con-
ditioning system is started in auto-
matic mode.
● When parking, the system auto-
matically switches to outside air
mode to encourage better air cir-
culation throughout the vehicle,
helping to reduce odors that occur
when starting the vehicle.
1 Press the automatic mode
switch.
The dehumidification function
begins to operate. Air outlets and
fan speed are automatically
adjusted according to the tempera-
ture setting and humidity.
2 Adjust the temperature set-
ting.
3 To stop the operation, press
the “OFF” switch.
If the fan speed setting or air
flow modes are operated, the
automatic mode indicator goes
off. However, automatic mode
for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automati-
cally according to the temperature
setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a
while until warm or cool air is ready
to flow immediately after the auto-
matic mode switch is pressed.
This function automatically con-
trols the air conditioning airflow
so that priority is given to the
front seats. When the front pas-
senger seat is not occupied, air-
flow may switch to only the
driver’s seat. Unnecessary air
Using automatic mode
Front seat concentrated
airflow mode (S-FLOW)
343
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
conditioning is suppressed, con-
tributing to increased fuel effi-
ciency.
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode operates in the following
situations.
No passengers are detected
in the rear seats
The windshield defogger is
not operating
While operating, the indicator illumi-
nates on the S-FLOW mode switch.
■ Manually turning front seat
concentrated airflow mode
on/off
In front seat concentrated air-
flow mode, directing airflow to
the front seats only and to all
seats can be switched via switch
operation. When the mode has
been switched manually, auto-
matic airflow control stops oper-
ating.
Select on the option control
screen or press the S-FLOW
mode switch on the air condi-
tioning operation panel and
switch the airflow.
Indicator illuminated: Airflow
to the front seats only
Indicator off: Airflow to all the
seats
■ Operation of automatic airflow
control
● In order to maintain a comfortable
interior, airflow may be directed to
seats without passengers immedi-
ately after the engine is started
and at other times depending on
the outside temperature.
● After the engine is started, if pas-
sengers move around inside or
enter/exit the vehicle, the system
cannot accurately detect the pres-
ence of passengers and automatic
airflow control will not operate.
■ Operation of manual airflow
control
Even if the function is manually
switched to directing airflow to only
the front seats, when a rear seat is
occupied, it may automatically direct
airflow to all seats.
■ To return to automatic airflow
control
1 With the indicator off, turn the
engine switch off.
2 After 60 minutes or more elapse,
turn the engine switch to ON.
This feature is used to prevent
ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Press the switch to turn the sys-
tem on/off.
The indicator comes on when
the system is on.
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after a period
of time.
Windshield wiper de-icer
(vehicle with a 12.3-inch
display)
344
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
change according to the
selected air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the air flow direc-
tion and opening/closing
the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
Front side outlets
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down
2 Open the vent
3 Close the vent
WARNING
■ To prevent burns
Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the
side of the front pillars when the
windshield wiper deicer is on.
Air outlet layout and oper-
ations
345
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
WARNING
■ To not interrupt the wind-
shield defogger from operat-
ing
Do not place anything on the
instrument panel which may cover
the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow
may be obstructed, preventing the
windshield defoggers from defog-
ging.
346
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
Adjust the rear seats fan speed setting
Press to increase the fan speed and to decrease the fan
speed.
“OFF” switch
Pressing the “OFF” switch to turns off the fan.
Airflow mode control switch
Adjust the rear seats temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-
perature.
To change the airflow mode,
press the airflow mode control
switch.
The air outlets used are switched
each time the switch is pressed.
1 Upper body
Rear manual air conditioning system
*
Air conditioning controls
Change the airflow mode
347
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
2 Upper body and feet
3 Feet
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of
and opening and closing
the air outlets
Adjusting the position of and
opening and closing the air out-
lets
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down
2 Open the vent
3 Close the vent
Air outlets
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
348
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
■ Rear air conditioning control panel
Adjust the rear seats fan speed setting
Press to increase the fan speed and to decrease the fan
speed.
“OFF” switch
Pressing the “OFF” switch to turns off the fan.
Air flow mode control switch
Automatic mode switch
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
Adjust the rear seats temperature setting
Rear automatic air conditioning system
*
The air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted
according to the temperature setting.
Vehicles with a 8-inch display: The rear air conditioning sys-
tem can be operated using the front air conditioning control
panel and rear air conditioning control panel. Press the
“REAR CLIMATE” switch on the front air condiotioning con-
trol panel to change the rear air conditioning control mode.
Vehicles with a 12.3-inch display: The rear air conditioning
system can be operated using the toyota multi-operation
touch and rear air conditioning control panel. Select “REAR”
on the front air condiotioning control screen to display the
rear air conditioning control screen.
Rear air conditioning control operation
349
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-
perature.
■ Front air conditioning control panel (vehicle with a 8-inch dis-
play)
Rear air conditioning system on/off switch
“REAR CLIMATE” switch
The mode switches between the rear air conditioning control mode and
front air conditioning control mode each time the “REAR CLIMATE” switch
is pressed.
Rear seat temperature contorl knob
To set temperature, move the rear seat temperature control knob upward or
downward.
Upward: Increases the temperature
Downward: Decreases the temperature
Airflow mode control knob
The airflow mode control knob can be operated while the rear air condition-
ing control indicator is appeared.
Adjust the rear seats fan speed setting
Rear seats fan speed setting can be adjusted while the rear air conditioning
control indicator is appeared.
To set the fan speed, move the fan speed control knob upward or down-
ward.
Upward: Increases the fan speed
Downward: Decreases the fan speed
Automatic mode switch (P.351)
The automatic mode switch can be operated when the rear air conditioning
control indicator is displayed.
Rear air conditioning control indicator
When the “REAR CLIMATE” switch is pressed, the rear air conditioning
350
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
control indicator is displayed for several seconds.
■ Rear air conditioning con-
trol screen (vehicle with a
12.3-inch display)
Adjust the rear seats fan
speed setting
Adjust the rear seats tem-
perature setting
Air flow mode control switch
“OFF” switch
Pressing the “OFF” switch to turns
off the fan.
Automatic mode switch
■ Rear air conditioning con-
trol panel
To change the airflow mode,
press the airflow mode control
switch.
The air outlets used are switched
each time the switch is pressed.
1 Upper body
2 Upper body and feet
3 Feet
■ Front air conditioning con-
trol panel (vehicle with a
8-inch display)
To change the airflow mode,
move the airflow mode control
knob upward or downward.
1 Upper body
2 Upper body and feet
3 Feet
Change the airflow mode
351
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
■ Rear air conditioning con-
trol screen (vehicle with a
12.3-inch display)
To change the airflow mode,
select the airflow mode control
switch.
The air outlets used are switched
each time the switch is selected.
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and
feet
: Air flows to the feet
1 Press the automatic mode
switch.
2 Adjust the temperature set-
ting.
3 To stop the operation, press
the “OFF” switch.
If the fan speed setting or air
flow modes are operated, the
automatic mode indicator goes
off. However, automatic mode
for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automati-
cally according to the temperature
setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a
while until warm or cool air is ready
to flow immediately after the auto-
matic mode switch is pressed.
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of
and opening and closing
the air outlets
Adjusting the position of and
opening and closing the air out-
lets
1 Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down
2 Open the vent
3 Close the vent
Using automatic mode
Air outlets
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning
system on longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
352
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
Turns the heated steering wheel
on/off
The indicator light comes on when
the heated steering wheel is oper-
ating.
■ Operation condition
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Timer function
The heated steering wheel will auto-
matically turn off after a period of
time.
■ Front (Front air condition-
ing control panel)
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes
as follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)Mid (2 seg-
ments lit)Lo (1 segment
lit)Off
The level indicator (amber)
lights up during operation.
Heated steering
wheel
*
/seat heat-
ers
*
/seat ventilators
*
Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the
steering wheel
Seat heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery
Seat ventilators
Maintain good ventilation
using a fan built into the seat
WARNING
■ To prevent minor burn inju-
ries
Care should be taken if anyone in
the following categories comes in
contact with the steering wheel or
seats when the heater is on:
● Babies, small children, the
elderly, the sick and the physi-
cally challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alco-
hol or drugs that induce sleep
(sleeping drugs, cold remedies,
etc.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
seat heaters
Do not put heavy objects that
have an uneven surface on the
seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the functions when the
engine is off.
Heated steering wheel
Seat heaters
353
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Vehicle with a 12.3-inch dis-
play
Vehicle with a 8-inch display
■ Front (Toyota multi-opera-
tion touch: Vehicle with a
12.3-inch display)
Select to display the seats
climate screen.
Each time the switch is selected,
the operation condition changes
as follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)Mid (2 seg-
ments lit)Lo (1 segment
lit)Off
The level indicator (red) lights
up during operation.
■ Rear
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes
as follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)Mid (2 seg-
ments lit)Lo (1 segment
lit)Off
The level indicator (amber)
lights up during operation.
■ Operation condition
The engine switch is in ON.
WARNING
■ To prevent overheating and
minor burn injuries
Observe the following precautions
when using the seat heaters.
● Do not cover the seat with a
blanket or cushion when using
the seat heater.
354
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Front air condioning con-
trol panel
Each time the switch is pressed,
the operation condition changes
as follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)Mid (2 seg-
ments lit)Lo (1 segment
lit)Off
The level indicator (green) lights
up during operation.
Vehicle with a 12.3-inch dis-
play
Vehicle with a 8-inch display
■ Toyota multi-operation
touch (Vehicle with a
12.3-inch display)
Select to display the seat cli-
mate screen.
Each time the switch is selected,
the operation condition changes
as follows.
Hi (3 segments lit)Mid (2 seg-
ments lit)Lo (1 segment
lit)Off
The level indicator (blue) lights
up during operation.
■ Operation condition
The engine switch is in ON.
WARNING
● Do not use seat heater more
than necessary.
Seat ventilators
355
5-3. Using the interior lights
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
5-3.Using the interior lights
Front personal lights (P.356)
Front interior lights (P.356)
Shift lever light
Open tray lights (if equipped)
Door courtesy lights
Ambient lights (if equipped)
Rear personal lights (if equipped) (P.356)
Rear personal lights (if equipped) (P.356)
Rear interior light (P.356)
Outer foot lights (if equipped)
Interior lights list
Location of the interior lights
356
5-3. Using the interior lights
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Front interior lights
1 Turns the lights on/off linked
to door positions
2 Turns the lights on
3 Turns the lights off
■ Rear interior lights
1 Turns the door position on
The rear interior light turns on/off
together the front interior lights.
When a door is opened while the
front and rear interior light door
position is on, the lights turn on.
2 Turns the light on
■ Front personal lights
Turns the lights on/off
■ Rear personal lights
Turns the lights on/off
Vehicles without panoramic
moon roof
Vehicles with panoramic
moon roof
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off
according to the engine switch
mode, the presence of the elec-
tronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the
doors are opened/closed.
Operating the interior
lights
Operating the personal
lights
357
5-3. Using the interior lights
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
■ To prevent the battery from
being discharged
If the interior lights remain on when
the engine switch is turned off, the
lights will go off automatically after
20 minutes.
■ The interior lights may turn on
automatically when
If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the interior lights will
turn on automatically.
The interior lights will turn off auto-
matically after approximately 20min-
utes.
The interior lights can be turned off
manually. However, in order to help
prevent further collisions, it is rec-
ommended that they be left on until
safety can be ensured.
(The interior lights may not turn on
automatically depending on the
force of the impact and conditions of
the collision.)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.515)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer
than necessary when the engine
is not running.
358
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
5-4.Using the stor age features
Auxiliary boxes (P.361)
Open tray (if equipped) (P.361)
Glove box (P.359)
Bottle holders (P.360)
Cup holders (P.360)
Console box (P.359)
List of storage features
Location of the storage features
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left
in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or
spray cans in the storage spaces,
as this may cause the following
when cabin temperature becomes
high:
● Glasses may be deformed by
heat or cracked if they come
into contact with other stored
items.
● Lighters or spray cans may
explode. If they come into con-
tact with other stored items, the
lighter may catch fire or the
spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
359
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
1 Unlock with the mechanical
key
2 Lock with the mechanical key
3 Open (pull lever)
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when
the tail lights are on.
1 Push the tab and slide the
console box lid.
2 Vehicles with wireless
charge: Lift the wireless char-
ger.
■ Tray inside console box
The tray can be slid forward/back-
ward.
WARNING
■ When storage compartments
are not in use
When driving or when the storage
compartments are not in use,
keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or
sudden swerving, an accident
may occur due to an occupant
being struck by an open lid or the
items stored inside.
Glove box
Console box
360
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
Front seats
Second seats (8-seat models)
Pull the armrest down.
Second seats (7-seat models)
Third seats
Front doors
Cup holders
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup
holder
Do not place anything other than
cups, aluminum cans, or water
bottles in the cup holders. Other
items may be thrown out of the
holders in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden braking, possibly
causing injury. If possible, cover
hot drinks to prevent burns.
Bottle holders
361
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Rear doors
■ Bottle holders
● When storing a bottle, close the
cap.
● The bottle may not be stored
depending on its size or shape.
Overhead
Push the lid.
Driver’s side instrument panel
Pull the tab to open.
Instrument panel
NOTICE
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle
holders
Do not place open bottle, glass or
paper cups containing liquid in the
bottle holders. Otherwise, con-
tained liquid may be spilled. Glass
cups may break if used in the bot-
tle holders.
Auxiliary boxes
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for storing
(Overhead)
Do not store items heavier than
0.44 lb. (200 g).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary
box to open and the items inside
may fall out, resulting in an acci-
dent.
■ Caution while driving
(Driver’s side instrument
panel)
Keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.
Injuries may result in the event of
an accident or sudden braking.
Open tray
362
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
Front of console
Rear of console box (if
equipped)
■ Cable pass through (Instru-
ment panel)
The open tray is provided with a
hole that allows cables to be passed
through the tray from the USB port,
USB charging ports or power outlet.
Remove the cover.
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the open
tray
Observe the following precautions
when putting items in the open
tray. Failure to do so may cause
items to be thrown out of the tray
in the event of sudden braking or
steering. In these cases, the items
may interfere with pedal operation
or cause driver distraction, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not store items in the tray
that can easily shift or roll out.
● Do not stack items in the tray
higher than the tray’s edge.
● Do not put items in the tray that
may protrude over the tray’s
edge.
363
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Pull down the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
To hang the cargo net, use the
cargo net hooks and cargo
hooks.
■ Removing the luggage
cover unit (vehicles with-
out side deck board)
1 Fold down the third seats.
(P.143)
Luggage compart-
ment features
Cargo hooks
WARNING
■ When cargo hooks are not in
use
To avoid injury, always return the
hooks to their stowed positions
when not in use.
Cargo net hooks
WARNING
■ When the cargo net is not in
use
To avoid injury, always return the
hooks to their stowed positions
when not in use.
Grocery bag hooks
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the gro-
cery bag hooks
Do not hang any object heavier
than 6.6 lb. (3 kg) on the grocery
bag hooks.
Luggage cover (if
equipped)
364
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
2 Remove the center deck
board (P.467) and take out
the luggage cover unit.
■ Removing the luggage
cover unit (vehicles with
side deck board)
1 Fold down the third seats.
(P.143)
2 Remove the center deck
board (P.467) and side
deck board (P.366) and
take out the luggage cover
unit.
■ Installing the luggage cover
1 Fold down the third seats.
(P.143)
2 Press the lock release but-
tons to extend the ends of the
luggage cover unit.
3 To install the luggage cover
unit, with the lock release
buttons facing upward, insert
one end into the recess, then
compress the other end and
insert it into the other recess.
4 Pull out the luggage cover
and hook it onto the anchors.
365
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
■ Removing the luggage
cover
1 Release the cover from the
left and right anchors and
allow it to retract.
2 Compress the end of the lug-
gage cover and lift the lug-
gage cover up.
■ Stowing the luggage cover
(vehicles without side deck
board)
1 Remove the center deck
board. (P.467)
2 To store the luggage cover
unit, compress both ends
until they lock.
Store the unit with the lock release
buttons facing up and the cover
portion facing the rear of the vehi-
cle.
■ Stowing the luggage cover
(vehicles with side deck
board)
1 Remove the center deck
board (P.467) and the side
deck board. (P.366)
2 To store the luggage cover
unit, compress both ends
until they lock.
Store the unit with the lock release
buttons facing up and the cover
portion facing the rear of the vehi-
cle.
366
5-4. Using the storage features
HIGHLANDER_U
Center deck under tray
Pull the strap upwards to open
the center deck board.
Deck side box (if equipped)
Pull the strap upwards to open
the side deck board.
WARNING
■ Luggage cover
● When installing/stowing the lug-
gage cover, make sure that the
luggage cover is securely
installed/stowed. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury in
the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
● Do not place anything on the
luggage cover. In the event of
sudden braking or turning, the
item may go flying and strike an
occupant. This could lead to an
unexpected accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to climb
on the luggage cover. Climbing
on the luggage cover could
result in damage to the luggage
cover, possibly causing death or
serious injury to the child.
● Do not point the luggage cover
unit at your face or body, as
doing so may cause injuries if
the cover ends extend sud-
denly.
NOTICE
■ When using the luggage
cover
● Do not put heavy items on the
luggage cover.
● Install the cover unit in the cor-
rect direction so that the lock
release button faces upward.
Auxiliary boxes
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the deck board closed. In
the event of sudden braking, an
accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by the deck
board or the items stored under
the deck board.
367
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
5-5.Using the other interior features
The USB charging ports are
used to supply 2.1 A of electric-
ity at 5 V to external devices.
The USB charging ports are for
charging only. They are not
designed for data transfer or
other purposes.
Depending on the external
device, it may not charge prop-
erly. Refer to the manual
included with the device before
using a USB charging port.
■ Using the USB charging
ports
On the instrument panel
Open the lid.
Rear of console box
Open the lid.
■ The USB charging ports can be
used when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Situations in which the USB
charging ports may not operate
correctly
● If a device which consumes more
than 2.1 A at 5 V is connected
● If a device designed to communi-
cate with a personal computer,
such as a USB memory device, is
connected
● If the connected external device is
turned off (depending on device)
● If the temperature inside the vehi-
cle is high, such as after the vehi-
cle has been parked in the sun
■ About connected external
devices
Depending on the connected exter-
nal device, charging may occasion-
ally be suspended and then start
again. This is not a malfunction.
Other interior features
USB charging ports
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
USB charging ports
● Do not insert foreign objects into
the ports.
● Do not spill water or other liq-
uids into the ports.
● When the USB charging ports
are not in use, close the lids. If a
foreign object or liquid enters a
port may cause a short circuit.
368
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
A portable device, such as a
smartphone or mobile battery,
can be charged by just placing it
on the charging area, provided
the device is compatible with the
Qi wireless charging standard
created by the Wireless Power
Consortium.
The wireless charger cannot be
used with a portable device that
is larger than the charging area.
Additionally, depending on the
portable device, the wireless
charger may not operate prop-
erly. Refer to the operation man-
ual of the portable device.
■ The “Qi” symbol
The “Qi” symbol is a trademark
of the Wireless Power Consor-
tium.
■ Name for all parts
Power supply switch
Operation indicator light
Charge area
■ Using the wireless charger
1 Push the tab and slide the
console box lid. (P.359)
2 Press the power supply
switch of the wireless char-
ger.
Pressing the switch again turns the
wireless charger off.
When turned on, the operation indi-
cator light (green) comes on.
When the engine switch is turned
off, the on/off state of the wireless
NOTICE
● Do not apply excessive force to
or impact the USB charging
ports.
● Do not disassemble or modify
the USB charging ports.
■ To prevent damage to exter-
nal devices
● Do not leave external devices in
the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to an
external device.
● Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary force to an exter-
nal device or the cable of an
external device while it is con-
nected.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the USB charging
ports for a long period of time with
the engine stopped.
Wireless charger (if
equipped)
369
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
charger will be memorized.
3 Place a portable device on
the charging area with its
charging surface facing
down.
While charging, the operation indi-
cator light (orange) will be illumi-
nated.
If charging does not begin, move
the portable device as close to the
center of the charging area as pos-
sible.
When charging is complete, the
operation indicator light (green) will
illuminate.
■ Recharging function
If a certain amount of time has
elapsed since charging com-
pleted and the portable device
has not been moved, the
wireless charger will restart
charging.
If the portable device is
moved within the charging
area, charging will stop tem-
porarily then restart.
■ Operation indicator light
status
*
: Depending on the portable
device, the operation indicator
light may stay illuminated
(orange) after charging has com-
pleted.
■ If the operation indicator
light blinks
If an error is detected, the oper-
ation indicator light will blink
(orange). Take the appropriate
measures according to the table
below.
Blinks (orange) at a one sec-
ond interval continuously
Operation indi-
cator light
State
Off
The Wireless char-
ger is off
Green (illumi-
nated)
Standby (charging
is possible)
Charging is com-
plete
*
Orange (illumi-
nated)
A portable device
has been placed
on the charging
area (identifying
the portable
device)
Charging in prog-
ress
370
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
Blinks (orange) 3 times
repeatedly
Blinks (orange) 4 times
repeatedly
■ The wireless charger can be
operated when
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
■ Portable devices that can be
charged
● Portable devices compatible with
the Qi wireless charging standard
can be charged by the wireless
charger. However, compatibility
with all devices which meet the Qi
wireless charging standard is not
guaranteed.
● The wireless charger is designed
to supply low power electricity (5
W or less) to a cellular phone,
smartphone, or other portable
device.
■ If a cover or accessory is
attached to the portable device
Do not charge a portable device if a
cover or accessory which is not Qi
compatible is attached. Depending
on the type of cover and/or acces-
sory attached, it may not be possi-
ble to charge the portable device. If
the portable device is placed on the
charging area and does not charge,
remove the cover and/or accesso-
ries.
■ If interference is heard in AM
radio broadcasts while
charging
Turn off the wireless charger and
check if the noise is reduced. If
noise is reduced, press and hold the
power supply switch of the wireless
charger for 2 seconds. The fre-
quency of the wireless charger is
changed and noise may be
reduced. When the frequency is
changed, the operation indicator
light will blink (orange) 2 times.
■ Charging precautions
● If the electronic key cannot be
detected in the cabin, charging
cannot be performed. When a
door is opened and closed,
charging may be temporarily sus-
pended.
● While charging, the wireless char-
ger and the portable device will
become warm. This is not a mal-
function. If a portable device
becomes warm while charging
and charging stops due to the pro-
tection function of the portable
device, wait until the portable
device cools down and charge it
Suspected
causes
Measure
Vehicle to
charger com-
munication
failure.
Contact your Toy-
ota dealer.
Suspected
causes
Measure
A foreign
object exists
between the
portable
device and
charging area.
Remove the for-
eign object.
Portable
device is not
positioned
properly on the
charging area.
Move the portable
device toward the
center of the
charging area.
Suspected
causes
Measure
The tempera-
ture of the
wireless char-
ger is exces-
sively high.
Stop charging
immediately and
continue charging
after a while.
371
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
again.
■ Sound generated during opera-
tion
When the power supply switch is
turned on or while a portable device
is being identified, operation sounds
may be heard. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
■ Cleaning the wireless charger
P.391
■ Certification for the wireless charger
372
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
373
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
When charging a portable device
while driving, for safety reasons,
the driver should not operate the
portable device.
374
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interfer-
ence with electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac
pacemakers, cardiac resynchroni-
zation therapy pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrilla-
tors, as well as any other electri-
cal medical device, should consult
their physician about the usage of
the wireless charger.
Operations of the wireless char-
ger may have an affect on medi-
cal devices.
■ To prevent damage or burns
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in the
possibility of fire, equipment fail-
ure or damage, or burns due to
heat.
● Do not put any metallic objects
between the charging area and
the portable device while
charging.
● Do not attach metallic objects,
such as aluminum stickers, to
the charging area.
● Do not cover the wireless char-
ger with a cloth or other object
while charging.
● Do not attempt to charge porta-
ble devices which are not com-
patible with the Qi wireless
charging standard.
● Do not disassemble, modify or
remove the wireless charger.
● Do not apply force or impact to
the wireless charger.
NOTICE
■ Conditions in which the wire-
less charger may not operate
correctly
In the following situations, the
wireless charger may not operate
correctly:
● When a portable device is fully
charged
● When there is a foreign object
between the charging area and
portable device
● When a portable device
becomes hot while charging
● When a portable device is
placed on the wireless area with
its charging surface facing up
● When a portable device is not
centered on the charging area
● When the vehicle is near a TV
tower, electric power plant, gas
station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that
generates strong radio waves or
electrical noise
● When the portable device is in
contact with, or is covered by
any of the following metallic
objects:
• Cards to which aluminum foil is
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have alu-
minum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Metal hand warmers
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When wireless keys (that emit
radio waves) other than those of
your vehicle are being used
nearby.
375
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Second seats (8-seat models)
Pull the armrest down for use.
Second seats (7-seat models)
Pull the armrest down for use.
An assist grip installed on the
ceiling can be used to support
your body while sitting on the
seat.
NOTICE
If in situations other than above
the wireless charger does not
operate properly or the operation
indicator light is blinking, the wire-
less charger may be malfunction-
ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ To prevent failure or damage
to data
● Do not bring magnetic cards,
such as a credit card, or mag-
netic recording media, close to
the wireless charger while
charging. Otherwise, data may
be erased due to the influence
of magnetism. Additionally, do
not bring precision instruments
such as wrist watches, close to
the wireless charger, as such
objects may malfunction.
● Do not leave portable devices in
the cabin. The temperature
inside the cabin may become
high when parked in the sun,
and cause damage to the
device.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the wireless charger
for a long period of time with the
engine is stopped.
Armrest
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
armrest
Do not apply too much load on the
armrest.
Assist grips
WARNING
■ Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when
getting in or out of the vehicle or
rising from your seat.
376
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
The coat hooks are provided
with the rear assist grips.
■ 12 V
Please use as a power supply
for electronic goods that use
less than 12 VDC/10 A (power
consumption of 120 W).
When using electronic goods,
make sure that the power con-
sumption of all the connected
power outlets is less than 120
W.
On the instrument panel
Open the lid.
Inside the console box
Open the lid.
■ 120 VAC (if equipped)
Accessories that use less than
100 W.
Open the lid.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or
put a heavy load on the assist
grip.
Coat hooks
WARNING
■ Items that must not be hung
on the hook
Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or sharp objects on the
hook. If the SRS curtain shield air-
bags deploy, these items may
become projectiles, causing death
or serious injury.
Power outlets
377
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
■ The power outlet can be used
when
12 V
The engine switch is in ACC or ON.
120 VAC (if equipped)
The engine switch is in ON.
■ Using the power outlet (vehi-
cles with Stop & Start system)
When the engine restarts after hav-
ing been stopped by the Stop &
Start system, the power outlets may
be temporarily unusable, but this is
not a malfunction.
■ When turning the engine switch
off
Disconnect electrical devices with
charging functions, such as mobile
battery packs.
If such devices are left connected,
the engine switch may not be turned
off normally.
1 To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it back-
ward.
Open the cover.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power
outlet
Close the power outlet lid when
the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that
enter the power outlet may cause
a short circuit.
■ To prevent the battery from
being discharged
Do not use the power outlet lon-
ger than necessary when the
engine is not running.
■ Appliances that may not
operate properly (120 VAC)
The following 120 VAC appliances
may not operate properly even if
their power consumption is under
100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak
wattage
● Measuring devices that pro-
cess precise data
● Other appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply
Sun visors
Vanity mirrors
378
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the vanity lights remain on when
the engine switch is turned off, the
lights will go off automatically after
20 minutes.
1 Push the lid.
2 Push the lid back up half way.
■ To use the overhead console
from the conversation mirror
state
Fully close the lid, then open it
again. (P.361)
1 Pull the tab up.
2 Hook the sunshade on to the
anchors.
To lower the sunshade, pull the tab
up slightly to unhook the shade
from the anchors, and lower it
slowly.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the battery from
being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on
for extended periods while the
engine is off.
Conversation mirror
Rear door sunshades (if
equipped)
NOTICE
■ To ensure normal operation
of the sunshades
● Do not put anything in an area
where it may interfere with the
operation of a rear door sun-
shade.
● To prevent damage to the rear
door sunshades, do not apply
excessive load or attach items
to the rear door sunshades.
379
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
*
: If equipped
The HomeLink
®
wireless control
system in your vehicle has 3
buttons which can be pro-
grammed to operate 3 different
devices. Refer to the program-
ming methods on the following
pages to determine the method
which is appropriate for the
device.
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Garage door operation indi-
cators
HomeLink
®
icon
Illuminates while HomeLink
®
is
operating.
Buttons
Vehicles with Digital Rearview
Mirror
HomeLink
®
logo
Appears while HomeLink
®
is oper-
ating. When the menu button
(P.152) is pressed, the logo dis-
appears even while the HomeLink
®
is operating.
Garage door operation indi-
cators
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Illuminates above each button
selected.
Buttons
■ Codes stored in the Home-
Link
®
memory
● The registered codes are not
erased even if the battery cable is
disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering
a different code to a HomeLink
®
button that already has a code
registered to it, the already regis-
tered code will not be erased.
Garage door opener
*
The garage door opener can
be programmed using the
HomeLink
®
to operate
garage doors, gates, entry
doors, door locks, home
lighting systems, security
systems, and other devices.
System components
380
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Certification for the garage door opener
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at
www.homelink.com/toyota
or call
1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
■ When programming a garage
door or other remote control
device
The garage door or other device
may operate, so ensure people
and objects are out of danger to
prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety
standards
Do not use the HomeLink
®
com-
patible transceiver with any
garage door opener or device that
lacks safety stop and reverse fea-
tures as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door
that cannot detect an interfering
object. A door or device without
these features increases the risk
of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or program-
ming HomeLink
®
Never allow a child to operate or
play with the HomeLink
®
buttons.
381
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
■ Before programming Home-
Link
®
During programming, it is pos-
sible that garage doors,
gates, or other devices may
operate. For this reason,
make sure that people and
objects are clear of the
garage door or other devices
to prevent injury or other
potential harm.
It is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the
remote control transmitter for
more accurate programming.
Garage door opener motors
manufactured after 1995 may
be equipped with rolling code
protection. If this is the case,
you may need a stepladder or
other sturdy, safe device to
reach the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor.
■ Programming HomeLink
®
Steps 1 through 3 must be per-
formed within 60 seconds, oth-
erwise the HomeLink
®
indicator
light will stop flashing and pro-
gramming will not be success-
fully completed.
1 Press and release the Home-
Link
®
button you want to pro-
gram and check that the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
flashes (orange).
2 Point the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink
®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink
®
indicator light
in view while programming.
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Vehicles with Digital Rearview
Mirror
3 Program a device.
Programming the Home-
Link
®
382
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Vehicles with Digital Rearview
Mirror
Programming a device other
than an entry gate (for U.S.A.
owners)
Press and hold the remote con-
trol transmitter button until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green
(rolling code) or continuously lit
green (fixed code), then release
the button.
Programming an entry gate
(for U.S.A. owners)/Program-
ming a device in the Cana-
dian market
Press and release the remote
control transmitter button at 2
second intervals, repeatedly,
until the HomeLink
®
indicator
light changes from slowly flash-
ing (orange) to rapidly flashing
(green) (rolling code) or continu-
ously lit (green) (fixed code).
4 Test the HomeLink
®
opera-
tion by pressing the newly
programmed button and
observing the indicator light:
HomeLink
®
indicator light illu-
minates: Programming of a
fixed code device has com-
pleted. The garage door or
other device should operate
when a HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
HomeLink
®
indicator light
flashes rapidly: The garage
door opener motor or other
device is equipped with a roll-
ing code. To complete pro-
gramming, firmly press and
hold the HomeLink
®
button
for 2 seconds then release it.
If the garage door or other
device does not operate, pro-
ceed to “Programming a roll-
ing code system”.
5 Repeat the steps above to
program another device for
any of the remaining Home-
Link
®
buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code
system
Two or more people may be
necessary to complete rolling
383
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
code programming.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s
manual supplied with the garage
door opener motor for details.
2 Press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after
performing 2.
3 Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence
(press/hold/release) up to 3
times to complete program-
ming.
If the garage door opener
motor operates when the
HomeLink
®
button is
pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink
®
signal.
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Vehicles with Digital Rearview
Mirror
■ Enabling 2-way communi-
cation with a garage door
(only available for compati-
ble devices)
When enabled, 2-way communi-
cation allows you to check the
status of the opening and clos-
ing of a garage door through
indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only
available if the garage door
opener motor used is a compati-
384
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
ble device. (To check device
compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
1 Within 5 seconds after pro-
gramming the garage door
opener has been completed,
if the garage door opener
motor is trained to Home-
Link
®
, both garage door
operation indicators will flash
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicat-
ing that 2-way communica-
tion is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, per-
form 2 and 3 within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink
®
button
after programming has been com-
pleted.
2 Press a programmed Home-
Link
®
button to operate a
garage door.
3 Within 1 minute of pressing
the HomeLink
®
button, after
the garage door operation
has stopped, press the
“Learn” or “Smart” button on
the garage door opener
motor. Within 5 seconds of
the establishment of 2-way
communication with the
garage door opener, both
garage door operation indica-
tors in the vehicle will flash
rapidly (green) and the light
on the garage door opener
motor will blink twice, indicat-
ing that 2-way communica-
tion is enabled.
■ Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
When the following procedure is
performed, buttons which
already have devices registered
to them can be overwritten:
1 Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button.
2 When the HomeLink
®
indica-
tor starts flashing orange,
release the HomeLink
®
but-
ton and perform “Program-
ming HomeLink
®
” 1 (it takes
20 seconds for the Home-
Link
®
indicator to start flash-
ing).
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the trans-
mitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter
must be pointed away from the
HomeLink
®
buttons.
Press the appropriate Home-
Link
®
button. The HomeLink
®
indicator light should turn on.
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is
shown by the garage door
opener indicators.
Operating HomeLink
®
385
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
5
Interior features
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Opening
Closing
Vehicles with Digital Rearview
Mirror
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is a
compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.homelink.com.)
The indicators can operate
within approximately 820 ft. (250
m) of the garage door. However,
if there are obstructions
between the garage door and
the vehicle, such as houses and
trees, feedback signals from the
garage door may not be
received.
To recall the previous door oper-
ation status, press and release
either HomeLink
®
buttons
and or and (vehicles
with auto anti-glare inside rear
view mirror), and
or and (vehicles
with Digital Rearview Mirror),
simultaneously. The last
recorded status will be dis-
played for 3 seconds.
Press and hold the 2 outside
buttons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from continuously lit
(orange) to rapidly flashing
(green).
Color Status
Orange (flash-
ing)
Currently open-
ing/closing
Green
Opening/closing
has completed
Red (flashing)
Feedback sig-
nals cannot be
received
Erasing the entire Home-
Link
®
memory (all three
codes)
Color Status
386
5-5. Using the other interior features
HIGHLANDER_U
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink
®
memory.
Vehicles with auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror
Vehicles with Digital Rearview
Mirror
387
HIGHLANDER_U
6
6
Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
.
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior.......... 388
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior........... 391
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
.................................. 394
General maintenance.. 396
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) pro-
grams........................ 398
6-3. Do-it-yourself mainte-
nance
Do-it-yourself service pre-
cautions..................... 400
Hood ........................... 402
Positioning a floor jack
.................................. 403
Engine compartment... 404
Tires............................ 411
Tire inflation pressure.. 423
Wheels........................ 425
Air conditioning filter.... 426
Electronic key battery.. 428
Checking and replacing
fuses.......................... 429
Headlight aim.............. 431
Light bulbs................... 432
388
6-1. Maintenance and care
HIGHLANDER_U
6-1.Maintenance and care
Working from top to bottom,
liberally apply water to the
vehicle body, wheel wells and
underside of the vehicle to
remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using
a sponge or soft cloth, such
as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks,
use car wash soap and rinse
thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the
waterproof coating deterio-
rates.
If water does not bead on a clean
surface, apply wax when the vehi-
cle body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:
• Fold the mirrors
• Turn off the power back door (if
equipped)
Start washing from the front of the
vehicle. Extend the mirrors before
driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car
washes may scratch the vehicle
surface, parts (wheel, etc.) and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
● Rear spoiler may not be washable
in some automatic car washes.
There may also be an increased
risk of damage to vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
As water may enter the cabin, do
not bring the nozzle tip near the
gaps around the doors or perimeter
of the windows, or spray these
areas continuously.
■ When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet
while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock
and unlock repeatedly. In that case,
follow the following correction pro-
cedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2
m) or more separate from the
vehicle while the vehicle is being
washed. (Take care to ensure that
the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to bat-
tery-saving mode to disable the
smart key system. (P.132)
■ Wheels and wheel ornaments
● Remove any dirt immediately by
using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water
immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage,
make sure to observe the follow-
ing precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or
abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the
wheels when they are hot, such
as after driving or parking in hot
weather
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Plated portions
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the
parts as follows:
● Use a soft cloth dampened with an
Cleaning and protect-
ing the vehicle exte-
rior
Perform cleaning in a man-
ner appropriate to each
component and its material.
Cleaning instructions
389
6-1. Maintenance and care
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
approximately 5% solution of neu-
tral detergent and water to clean
the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alco-
hol wet wipes or a similar product.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of
the engine compartment. Doing
so may cause the electrical com-
ponents, etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield
(vehicles with rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-
ers may operate unexpectedly in
the following situations, and may
result in hands being caught or
other serious injuries and cause
damage to the wiper blades.
AUTO
● When the upper part of the
windshield where the raindrop
sensor is located is touched by
hand
● When a wet rag or similar is
held close to the raindrop sen-
sor
● If something bumps against the
windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop
sensor body or if something
bumps into the raindrop sensor
■ Precautions regarding the
exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the
exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be
careful not to touch the pipe until it
has cooled sufficiently, as touch-
ing a hot exhaust pipe can cause
burns.
■ Precaution regarding the rear
bumper with Blind Spot Moni-
tor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is
chipped or scratched, the system
may malfunction.If this occurs,
consult your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deteriora-
tion and corrosion on the
body and components (alumi-
num wheels, etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in
the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present
on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings
or bird droppings are present on
the paint surface
• After driving in an area contami-
nated with soot, oily smoke,
mine dust, iron powder or chem-
ical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily
soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and
gasoline are spilled on the paint
surface
390
6-1. Maintenance and care
HIGHLANDER_U
NOTICE
● If the paint is chipped or
scratched, have it repaired
immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from cor-
roding, remove any dirt and
store in a place with low humid-
ity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub
with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces
of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the sur-
faces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the
lenses.
■ When using an automatic car
wash (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers)
Set the wiper switch to the off
position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”,
the wipers may operate and the
wiper blades may be damaged.
■ When using a high pressure
car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do
not let water of the high pres-
sure washer hit directly or the
vicinity of the camera. Due to
the shock from the high pres-
sure water, it is possible the
device may not operate as nor-
mal.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close
to boots (rubber or resin manu-
factured cover), connectors or
the following parts. The parts
may be damaged if they come
into contact with high-pressure
water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
● Keep the cleaning nozzle at
least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from
the vehicle body. Otherwise
resin section, such as moldings
and bumpers, may be deformed
and damaged.
Also, do not continuously hold the
nozzle in the same place.
● Do not spray the lower part of
the windshield continuously.
If water enters the air conditioning
system intake located near the
lower part of the windshield, the
air conditioning system may not
operate correctly.
391
6-1. Maintenance and care
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty
surfaces with a cloth damp-
ened with lukewarm water.
If dirt cannot be removed,
wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral deter-
gent diluted to approximately
1%.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of
detergent and water.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foam-
ing-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles. Do not
use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and
let them dry. Excellent results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as
dry as possible.
■ Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm
water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for
excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
Cleaning and protect-
ing the vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a man-
ner appropriate to each
component and its material.
Protecting the vehicle
interior
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in
the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical
components, etc. to malfunc-
tion or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS com-
ponents or wiring in the vehicle
interior wet.
(P.32)
An electrical malfunction may
cause the airbags to deploy or
not function properly, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Vehicles with wireless charger:
Do not let the wireless charger
(P.368) get wet. Failure to do
so may cause the charger to
become hot and cause burns or
could cause electric shock
resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (espe-
cially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish
cleaner. The instrument panel
may reflect off the windshield,
obstructing the driver’s view and
leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types
of detergent, as they may dis-
color the vehicle interior or
cause streaks or damage to
painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic sub-
stances such as benzene or
gasoline, alkaline or acidic solu-
tions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solu-
tions, such as thinner, benzene,
and alcohol
392
6-1. Maintenance and care
HIGHLANDER_U
Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and
dust with a soft cloth damp-
ened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of
approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces
of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry,
soft cloth to remove any
remaining moisture. Allow the
leather to dry in a shaded and
ventilated area.
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the
interior of the vehicle at least twice a
year tomaintain the quality of the
vehicle’s interior.
NOTICE
● Do not use polish wax or polish
cleaner. The instrument panel’s
or other interior part’s painted
surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather
surfaces
Observe the following precautions
to avoid damage to and deteriora-
tion of leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from
leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to
direct sunlight for extended peri-
ods of time. Park the vehicle in
the shade, especially during
summer.
● Do not place items made of
vinyl, plastic, or containing wax
on the upholstery, as they may
stick to the leather surface if the
vehicle interior heats up signifi-
cantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water.
Vehicle systems such as the
audio system may be damaged if
water comes into contact with
electrical components such as the
audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may
also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of
the windshield
Do not allow glass cleaner to con-
tact the lens. Also, do not touch
the lens. (
P.227)
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear
window
● Do not use glass cleaner to
clean the rear window, as this
may cause damage to the rear
window defogger heater wires
or antenna. Use a cloth damp-
ened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean.
Wipe the window in strokes run-
ning parallel to the heater wires
or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or
antenna.
Cleaning the leather areas
393
6-1. Maintenance and care
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt and dust using a
vacuum cleaner.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth
dampened with neutral deter-
gent diluted to approximately
1%.
Wring out any excess water
from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of
detergent and water.
Cleaning the synthetic
leather areas
394
6-2. Maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6-2.Main tenance
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine
Toyota parts be used for repairs to
ensure performance of each sys-
tem. If non-Toyota parts are used in
replacement or if a repair shop other
than a Toyota dealer performs
repairs, confirm the warranty cover-
age.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to
be performed by a Toyota
dealer
● Toyota technicians are
well-trained specialists and are
kept up to date with the latest ser-
vice information. They are well
informed about the operation of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It
proves that the maintenance that
has been performed is under war-
ranty coverage. If any problem
should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Toyota
dealer will promptly take care of it.
General maintenance should be
performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a
Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should
be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
For details about maintenance
items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Maintenance require-
ments
To ensure safe and econom-
ical driving, day-to-day care
and regular maintenance
are essential. It is the
owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks.
Toyota recommends the fol-
lowing maintenance:
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly
maintained
Improper maintenance could
result in serious damage to the
vehicle and possible death or seri-
ous injury.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its
constituents, and a wide variety
of automobile components con-
tain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. Work
in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained
in vehicles as well as waste pro-
duced by component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any
affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds which are
known to cause brain damage.
Wash your hands after han-
dling. (P.408)
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
395
6-2. Maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
■ Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required
After the required maintenance is
preformed according to the mainte-
nance schedule, please reset the
message.To reset the message, fol-
low the procedures described
below:
4.2-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “Scheduled
Maintenance” and then press
.
4 Select “Yes” and press .
5 A message will be displayed on
the multi-information display
when the reset procedure has
been completed.
7-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “Scheduled
Maintenance” and then press
.
4 Select “Yes” and press .
5 A message will be displayed on
the multi-information display
when the reset procedure has
been completed.
You can perform some mainte-
nance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-your-
self maintenance may affect
warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals
is recommended.
For details about warranty cover-
age, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Do-it-yourself mainte-
nance
396
6-2. Maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
General maintenance
Listed below are the general
maintenance items that
should be performed at the
intervals specified in the
“Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide”. It
is recommended that any
problem you notice should
be brought to the attention
of your Toyota dealer or
qualified service shop for
advice.
WARNING
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure
that there is adequate ventilation
before performing maintenance
checks.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery
Check the connec-
tions. (P.408)
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at
the correct level?
(P.408)
Engine coolant
Is the engine cool-
ant at the correct
level? (P.407)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at
the correct level?
(P.404)
Exhaust sys-
tem
There should not
be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/con-
denser
The radiator and
condenser should
be free from for-
eign objects.
(P.408)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient
washer fluid?
(P.410)
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator
pedal
• The accelerator
pedal should
move smoothly
(without uneven
pedal effort or
catching).
Automatic
transmission
“Park” mecha-
nism
• When parked on
a slope and the
shift lever is in P,
is the vehicle
securely
stopped?
Items Check points
397
6-2. Maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Brake pedal
• Does the brake
pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake
pedal have
appropriate
clearance from
the floor?
(P.499)
• Does the brake
pedal have the
correct amount
of free play?
(P.499)
Brakes
• The vehicle
should not pull to
one side when
the brakes are
applied.
• The brakes
should work
effectively.
• The brake pedal
should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal
should not get
too close to the
floor when the
brakes are
applied.
Head
restraints
• Do the head
restraints move
smoothly and
lock securely?
Horn • Works properly?
Indica-
tors/buzzers
• Do the indica-
tors and buzzers
function prop-
erly?
Items Check points
Lights
• Do all the lights
come on?
• Are the head-
lights aimed cor-
rectly? (P.431)
Parking brake
• Does the park-
ing brake switch
operate nor-
mally?
• When parked on
a slope and the
parking brake is
on, is the vehicle
securely
stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts
operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts
should not be
damaged.
Seats
• Do the seat con-
trols operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steer-
ing wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steer-
ing wheel have
the correct
amount of free
play?
• There should not
be any strange
sounds coming
from the steer-
ing wheel.
Items Check points
398
6-2. Maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
The OBD system determines
that a problem exists some-
where in the emission control
system. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test and may need
to be repaired. Contact your
Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
When the battery is discon-
nected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set
during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving
habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
When the fuel tank cap is
loose
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors
• Do the doors
operate
smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the engine
hood lock system
work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not
be any signs of
fluid leakage
after the vehicle
has been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire infla-
tion pressure
correct?
• The tires should
not be damaged
or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires
been rotated
according to the
maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts
should not be
loose.
Windshield
wipers/rear
window wiper
• The wiper blades
should not show
any signs of
cracking, split-
ting, wear, con-
tamination or
deformation.
• The wiper blades
should clear the
windshield/rear
window without
streaking or skip-
ping.
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle
emission inspection pro-
grams which include OBD
(On Board Diagnostics)
checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of
the emission control sys-
tem.
If the malfunction indica-
tor lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass
the I/M test in the follow-
ing situations:
399
6-2. Maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp
comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test.
The error code in the OBD sys-
tem will not be cleared unless
the vehicle is driven 40 or more
times.
Contact your Toyota dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re-test-
ing.
When the malfunction
indicator lamp still
remains on after several
driving trips
If your vehicle does not
pass the I/M test
400
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions
If you perform maintenance
by yourself, be sure to fol-
low the correct procedure
as given in these sections.
Maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Battery condi-
tion (P.408)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
•Grease
• Conventional
wrench (for ter-
minal clamp
bolts)
Brake fluid
level (P.408)
• FMVSS No.116
DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper
towel
• Funnel (used
only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine cool-
ant level
(P.407)
• “Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
ant” or a similar
high quality eth-
ylene gly-
col-based
non-silicate,
non-amine,
non-nitrite and
non-borate cool-
ant with long-life
hybrid organic
acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
ant” is pre-mixed
with 50% cool-
ant and 50%
deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super
Long Life Cool-
ant” is pre-mixed
with 55% cool-
ant and 45%
deionized water.
• Funnel (used
only for adding
coolant)
Engine oil level
(P.404)
• “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper
towel
• Funnel (used
only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses
(P.429)
• Fuse with same
amperage rating
as original
Items Parts and tools
401
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Headlight aim
(P.431)
• Phillips-head
screwdriver
Light bulbs
(P.432)
• Bulb with same
number and
wattage rating as
original
• Flathead screw-
driver
• Wrench
Radiator and
condenser
(P.408)
Tire inflation
pressure
(P.423)
• Tire pressure
gauge
• Compressed air
source
Washer fluid
(P.410)
• Water or washer
fluid containing
antifreeze (for
winter use)
• Funnel (used
only for adding
water or washer
fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains
many mechanisms and fluids that
may move suddenly, become hot,
or become electrically energized.
To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine
compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the moving fan and
engine drive belt.
Items Parts and tools ● Be careful not to touch the
engine, radiator, exhaust mani-
fold, etc. right after driving as
they may be hot. Oil and other
fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper and
rags, in the engine compart-
ment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or
expose an open flame to fuel or
the battery. Fuel and battery
fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when
working on the battery. It con-
tains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the elec-
tric cooling fan or radiator
grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in ON, the
electric cooling fan may automati-
cally start to run if the air condi-
tioning is on and/or the coolant
temperature is high. (P.408)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent
flying or falling material, fluid
spray, etc. from getting in your
eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner
filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter
removed may cause excessive
engine wear due to dirt in the air.
402
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Pull the hood lock release
lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2 Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.
3 Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the support rod into the
slot.
Hood
Opening the hood
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed
and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly,
it may open while the vehicle is in
motion and cause an accident,
which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
■ After installing the support
rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the
hood securely preventing it from
falling down onto your head or
body.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod
to its clip before closing the hood.
Closing the hood with the support
rod not clipped could cause the
hood to bend.
403
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
■ Front
■ Rear
Positioning a floor
jack
When using a floor jack, fol-
low the instructions in the
manual provided with the
jack and perform the opera-
tion safely.
When raising your vehicle
with a floor jack, position
the jack correctly. Improper
placement may damage
your vehicle or cause injury.
Location of the jack point
404
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
Engine coolant reservoir (P.407)
Fuse boxes (P.429)
Engine oil filler cap (P.405)
Engine oil level dipstick (P.404)
Battery (P.408)
Brake fluid reservoir (P.408)
Washer fluid tank (P.410)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (P.408)
Radiator (P.408)
With the engine at operating
temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dip-
stick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1 Park the vehicle on level
ground. After warming up the
engine and turning it off, wait
Engine compartment
Components
Checking and adding the
engine oil
405
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
more than 5 minutes for the
oil to drain back into the bot-
tom of the engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and
check the oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ
depending on the type of vehicle or
engine.
6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert
it fully.
■ Checking the oil type and
preparing the item needed
Make sure to check the oil type
and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
P.495
Oil quantity (Low Full)
1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp. qt.)
Item
Clean funnel
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
1 Remove the oil filler cap by
turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, check-
ing the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by
turning it clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will
be consumed while driving. In the
following situations, oil consump-
tion may increase, and engine oil
may need to be refilled in between
oil maintenance intervals.
406
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
● When the engine is new, for
example directly after purchasing
the vehicle or after replacing the
engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inap-
propriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine
speeds or with a heavy load,
when towing, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating
frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for
a long time, or when driving fre-
quently through heavy traffic
■ If the oil is spilled on the engine
cover
To prevent the engine cover from
being damaged, remove any engine
oil from the engine cover as soon as
possible using a neutral detergent.
Do not use an organic solvent such
as brake cleaner.
■ After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data
should be reset. Perform the follow-
ing procedures:
4.2-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “Oil Mainte-
nance” and then press .
4 Select “Yes” and press .
5 A message will be displayed on
the multi-information display
when the reset procedure has
been completed.
7-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
3 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “Oil Mainte-
nance” and then press .
4 Select “Yes” and press .
5 A message will be displayed on
the multi-information display
when the reset procedure has
been completed.
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains poten-
tially harmful contaminants
which may cause skin disorders
such as inflammation and skin
cancer, so care should be taken
to avoid prolonged and
repeated contact. To remove
used engine oil from your skin,
wash thoroughly with soap and
water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters
only in a safe and acceptable
manner. Do not dispose of used
oil and filters in household trash,
in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service
station or auto parts store for
information concerning recy-
cling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil
within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine
damage
Check the oil level on a regular
basis.
407
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” lines on the reservoir
when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW”
line, add coolant up to the “FULL”
line. (P.487)
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or a similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and
non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Minimum tem-
perature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Minimum tem-
perature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within
a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses,
engine coolant reservoir cap, drain
cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your
Toyota dealer test the cap and
check for leaks in the cooling sys-
tem.
NOTICE
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil
on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine
could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dip-
stick every time you refill the
vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap
is properly tightened.
Checking the coolant
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant
reservoir cap and radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under
pressure and may spray hot cool-
ant if the cap is removed, causing
serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor
straight antifreeze. The correct
mixture of water and antifreeze
must be used to provide proper
lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the
antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging parts or
paint.
408
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
Check the radiator and con-
denser and clear away any for-
eign objects. If either of the
above parts is extremely dirty or
you are not sure of their condi-
tion, have your vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid
type and prepare the necessary
item.
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT
3 brake fluid
Item
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture
from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid
can cause a dangerous loss of brak-
ing efficiency. Use only newly
opened brake fluid.
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery termi-
nals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections,
cracks, or loose clamps.
Checking the radiator and
condenser
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or con-
denser as they may be hot and
cause serious injuries, such as
burns.
Checking and adding the
brake fluid
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm
your hands and eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in
your eyes, flush the affected area
with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort,
see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level
to go down slightly as the brake
pads wear out or when the fluid
level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent
refilling, there may be a serious
problem.
Battery
409
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Therefore,
observe the following precautions
before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery
installed on the vehicle, be sure to
disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on
the charger is off when connecting
and disconnecting the charger
cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting
the battery
● The engine may not start. Follow
the procedure below to initialize
the system.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the
smart key system may not be pos-
sible immediately after reconnect-
ing the battery. If this happens,
use the wireless remote control or
the mechanical key to lock/unlock
the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine
switch in ACC. The engine may
not start with the engine switch
turned off. However, the engine
will operate normally from the sec-
ond attempt.
● The engine switch mode is
recorded by the vehicle. If the bat-
tery is disconnected and recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the
engine switch mode to the status it
was in before the battery was dis-
connected. Make sure to turn off
the engine before disconnecting
the battery. Take extra care when
connecting the battery if the
engine switch mode prior to the
battery being disconnected is
unknown.
If the system will not start even after
multiple attempts, contact your Toy-
ota dealer.
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid and may
produce hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. To
reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precau-
tions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touch-
ing the battery terminals with
tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match
near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin
and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electro-
lyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses
when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the
battery.
410
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
If any washer does not work or
the warning message appears
on the multi-information display,
the washer tank may be empty.
Add washer fluid.
WARNING
■ Where to safely charge the
battery
Always charge the battery in an
open area. Do not charge the bat-
tery in a garage or closed room
where there is insufficient ventila-
tion.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A
or less). The battery may explode
if charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regard-
ing electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes
and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the near-
est medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thor-
oughly. If you feel pain or burn-
ing, get medical attention
immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your
clothes
It can soak through clothing on
to your skin. Immediately take
off the clothing and follow the
procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow elec-
trolyte
Drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Get emergency medical
attention immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while
the engine is running. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned
off.
Washer fluid
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the
engine is hot or running as
washer fluid contains alcohol and
may catch fire if spilled on the
engine, etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other
than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine
antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on
the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as
well as damaging the pump lead-
ing to problems of the washer
fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as
necessary.
Refer to the freezing tempera-
tures listed on the label of the
washer fluid bottle.
411
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Check if the treadwear indica-
tors are showing on the tires.
Also check the tires for uneven
wear, such as excessive wear
on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators
is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark,
etc., molded into the sidewall of
each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear
indicators are showing on a tire.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s
tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are
showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough
to expose the fabric, and bulges
indicating internal damage.
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or can-
not be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other
damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your
Toyota dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician
even if it has seldom or never been
used or damage is not obvious.
■ Proper storage of the spare tire
As an improperly stored spare tire
may cause damage to the wire
cable that holds it, check that the
spare tire is stored properly on a
daily basis.
● If the stored spare tire appears to
be slanted or rattles while driving,
the spare tire may not be properly
stored. Store the spare tire again
by performing the following tire
change procedure correctly:
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in
accordance with mainte-
nance schedules and tread-
wear.
Checking tires
412
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
1 If the spare tire is slanted, the
hoist assembly may be stuck in
the wheel opening. If the spare
tire rattles while driving, it may
not be fully raised. Lower the
spare tire to the ground and
make sure that the hoist assem-
bly is perpendicular to the wheel
opening.
2 Raise the tire slowly and steadily
until a click is heard and the jack
handle skips.
If the spare tire cannot be lowered,
the wire cable may be severed.
Have the vehicle inspected at your
Toyota dealer.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by
dividing the maximum load by 1.10
of the replacement tire is greater
than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR) of either the front
axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label.
For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on
the sidewall of the tire. (P.505)
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed perfor-
mance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since
summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires,
summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow
tires is recommended. When install-
ing snow tires, be sure to replace all
four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to pro-
vide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most win-
ter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, how-
ever, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in accelera-
tion and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway
driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads
or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires,
select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels.
(P.319)
■ If the tread on snow tires wears
down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as
snow tires is lost.
413
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Vehicles with a compact
spare tire
Front
Vehicles with a full-size spare
tire
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pres-
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing
tires
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to parts of the drive train as
well as dangerous handling char-
acteristics, which may lead to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not mix tires of different
makes, models or tread pat-
terns.
Also, do not mix tires of remark-
ably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than
those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently con-
structed tires (radial, bias-belted
or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season
and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been
used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not
know how they were used previ-
ously.
● Vehicles with a compact spare
tire: Do not tow if your vehicle
has a compact spare tire
installed.
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving
on roads with loose surfaces or
potholes.
These conditions may cause
losses in tire inflation pressure,
reducing the cushioning ability of
the tires. In addition, driving on
rough roads may cause damage
to the tires themselves, as well as
the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of
each tire becomes low while
driving
Do not continue driving, or your
tires and/or wheels may be
ruined.
Tire rotation
414
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
sure warning system after tire rota-
tion.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
The tire pressure detected by
the tire pressure warning sys-
tem can be displayed on the
multi-information display.
(P.82, 91)
The illustration used is intended as
an example, and may differ from
the image that is actually displayed
on the multi-information display.
4.2-inch display
7-inch display
If the tire pressure drops
below a predetermined level,
the driver is warned by a
screen display and a warning
light. (P.454)
The illustration used is intended as
an example, and may differ from
the image that is actually displayed
on the multi-information display.
4.2-inch display
7-inch display
■ Routine tire inflation pressure
checks
The tire pressure warning system
does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to
check tire inflation pressure as part
of your routine of daily vehicle
checks.
■ Situations in which the tire
pressure warning system may
not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire
pressure warning system may not
Tire pressure warning
system
415
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
operate properly.
• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are
used.
• A tire has been replaced with a
tire that is not an OE (Original
Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a
tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains, etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire
is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the
radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on
the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is
extremely higher than the speci-
fied level.
• If the spare tire is in a location
subject to poor radio wave signal
reception.
*
• If wheel without the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter is
used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure
warning computer.
*
: Vehicles with full-size spare tire
only
● Performance may be affected in
the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power
plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio
waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio,
cellular phone, cordless phone or
other wireless communication
device
● If tire position information is not
correctly displayed due to the
radio wave conditions, the display
may be corrected by driving and
changing the radio wave condi-
tions.
● When the vehicle is parked, the
time taken for the warning to start
or go off could be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure
declines rapidly for example when
a tire has burst, the warning may
not function.
■ Warning performance of the tire
pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure
warning system will change in
accordance with the conditions
under which it was initialized. For
this reason, the system may give a
warning even if the tire pressure
does not reach a low enough level,
or if the pressure is higher than the
pressure that was adjusted to when
the system was initialized.
416
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
When replacing tires or wheels,
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and trans-
mitters
417
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
installed.
When new tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be
registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must
be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valves and transmitter
ID codes registered by your Toy-
ota dealer. (P.420)
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning
system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire
pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a
system malfunction.
■ The tire pressure warning
system must be initialized
in the following circum-
stances:
When the tire inflation pres-
sure is changed such as
when changing traveling
speed.
When the tire inflation pres-
sure is changed such as
when the tire size is changed.
When rotating the tires.
After registering the ID codes.
(P.420)
When the tire pressure warning
system is initialized, the current
tire inflation pressure is set as
the benchmark pressure.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires,
wheels, tire pressure warn-
ing valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valves and transmit-
ters, contact your Toyota dealer
as the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters may be
damaged if not handled cor-
rectly.
● Make sure to install the tire
valve caps. If the tire valve caps
are not installed, water could
enter the tire pressure warning
valves and the tire pressure
warning valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps,
do not use tire valve caps other
than those specified. The cap
may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire
pressure warning valves and
transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealants, the tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid seal-
ant is used, contact your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service
shop as soon as possible. Make
sure to replace the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter
when replacing the tire. (P.416)
Initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system
418
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
■ How to initialize the tire
pressure warning system
4.2-inch display
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the engine
switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level.
(P.499)
Make sure to adjust the tire pres-
sure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire
pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
4 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
5 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
6 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “TPWS”
and then press .
7 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “Set
Pressure” and then press
and hold .
7-inch display
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the engine
switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level.
(P.499)
Make sure to adjust the tire pres-
sure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire
pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
4 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
5 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
6 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “TPWS”
and then press .
7 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “Set
Pressure” and then press
and hold .
“Setting Tire Pressure Warning
System” will be displayed on the
multi-information display and the
tire pressure warning light will
blink 3 times.
When the message disappears,
initialization is complete.
A message is displayed on the
multi-information display. Also,
“--” is displayed for inflation
pressure of each tire on the
multi-information display while
419
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
the tire pressure warning sys-
tem determines the position.
Drive the vehicle at approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more for approximately 10 to 30
minutes until the inflation pres-
sure of each tire is displayed on
the multi-information display.
When initialization is complete,
the inflation pressure of each
tire will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Even if the vehicle is not driven
at approximately 25 mph (40
km/h) or more, initialization can
be completed by driving for a
long time. However, if initializa-
tion does not complete after
driving for 1 hour or more, park
the vehicle in a safe place for
approximately 20 minutes and
then drive the vehicle again.
■ Initializing the tire pressure
warning system
Initialize the system with the tire
inflation pressure adjusted to the
specified level.
■ Initialization procedure
● Make sure to carry out initializa-
tion after adjusting the tire inflation
pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold
before carrying out initialization or
tire inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the
engine switch off during initializa-
tion, it is not necessary to restart
the initialization again as initializa-
tion will restart automatically when
the engine switch has been turned
to ON for the next time.
● If you accidentally restart the ini-
tialization when initialization is not
necessary, adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level
when the tires are cold, and con-
duct initialization again.
● While the position of each tire is
being determined and the inflation
pressures are not being displayed
on the multi-information display, if
the inflation pressure of a tire
drops, the tire pressure warning
light will come on.
■ When initialization of the tire
pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization may take longer to
complete if the vehicle is driven on
an unpaved road. When performing
initialization, drive on a paved road if
possible. Depending on the driving
environment and condition of the
tires, initialization will be completed
in approximately 10 to 30 minutes. If
initialization is not complete after
driving approximately 10 to 30 min-
utes, continue driving for a while.
If the inflation pressure of each tire
is not displayed after driving for
approximately 1 hour, perform the
following procedure.
● Park the vehicle in a safe place for
approximately 20 minutes. Then
drive straight (with occasional left
and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
However, in the following situations,
the tire inflation pressure will not be
recorded and the system will not
operate properly. Perform initializa-
tion again.
● If the vehicle is reversed during
initialization, the data up to that
point is reset, so perform the ini-
tialization procedure again from
the beginning.
● When operating the tire pressure
warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not blink 3
times.
420
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
● After performing initialization, the
tire pressure warning light blinks
for 1 minute then stays on while
driving.
If the inflation pressure of each tire
is still not displayed, have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Every tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter has a
unique ID code. When replacing
a tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, it is necessary
to register the ID code. When
registering the ID codes, per-
form the following procedure.
4.2-inch display
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the engine
switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level.
(P.499)
Make sure to adjust the tire pres-
sure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire
pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
4 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
5 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
6 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “TPWS”
and then press .
7 Press or of the meter
control switch, select
“Change Wheel” and then
press until the tire pres-
sure warning light starts
slowly blinking 3 times.
The change wheel set mode is acti-
vated and registration is started.
Then a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
When registration is being per-
formed, the tire pressure warning
light will blink for approximately 1
minute then illuminate and “--” will
be displayed for the inflation pres-
sure of each tire on the multi-infor-
mation display.
8 Drive the vehicle at approxi-
mately 25mph (40 km/h) or
more for approximately 10 to
30 minutes.
When registration is completed, the
tire pressure warning light will go off
and the inflation pressure of each
tire will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
WARNING
■ When initializing the tire pres-
sure warning system
Do not initializing tire inflation
pressure without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not
come on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may come on
when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
Registering ID codes
421
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
Even if the vehicle is not driven at
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, registration can be com-
pleted by driving for a long time.
However, if registration does not
complete after driving for 1 hour or
more, perform the procedure again
from the beginning.
9 Initialize the tire pressure
warning system. (P.418)
7-inch display
1 Park the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the engine
switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level.
(P.499)
Make sure to adjust the tire pres-
sure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire
pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the engine switch to
ON.
4 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
5 Press or of the meter
control switch, select and
then press and hold .
6 Press or of the meter
control switch, select “TPWS”
and then press .
7 Press or of the meter
control switch, select
“Change Wheel” and then
press until the tire pres-
sure warning light starts
slowly blinking 3 times.
The change wheel set mode is acti-
vated and registration is started.
Then a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
When registration is being per-
formed, the tire pressure warning
light will blink for approximately 1
minute then illuminate and “--” will
be displayed for the inflation pres-
sure of each tire on the multi-infor-
mation display.
8 Drive the vehicle at approxi-
mately 25mph (40 km/h) or
more for approximately 10 to
30 minutes.
When registration is completed, the
tire pressure warning light will go off
and the inflation pressure of each
tire will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Even if the vehicle is not driven at
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, registration can be com-
pleted by driving for a long time.
However, if registration does not
complete after driving for 1 hour or
more, perform the procedure again
from the beginning.
9 Initialize the tire pressure
warning system. (P.418)
■ When registering ID codes
● ID code registration is performed
while driving at a vehicle speed of
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more.
● Before performing ID code regis-
tration, make sure that no wheels
with tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters installed are near
the vehicle.
● Make sure to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
422
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
registering the ID codes. If the
system is initialized before regis-
tering the ID codes, the initialized
values will be invalid.
● ID codes can be registered by
yourself, but depending on the
driving conditions and driving
environment, registration may
take some time to complete.
■ Canceling ID code registration
● To cancel ID code registration
after it has been started, turn the
engine switch off before driving
the vehicle. If the vehicle is driven
after ID code registration is
started, to cancel registration, per-
form the ID code registration start
procedure again and turn the
engine switch off before driving.
● If ID code registration has been
canceled, the tire pressure warn-
ing light will blink for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the engine
switch is turned to ON and then
illuminate. The tire pressure warn-
ing system will be operational
when the tire pressure warning
light turns off.
● If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes
have elapsed, ID code registration
may not have been canceled cor-
rectly. To cancel registration, per-
form the ID code registration start
procedure again and then turn the
engine switch off before driving.
■ If ID codes are not registered
properly
In the following situations, ID code
registration may take longer than
usual to be completed or may not be
possible. Normally, registration com-
pletes within approximately 30 min-
utes.
● Vehicle is not parked for approxi-
mately 20 minutes or more before
driving
● Vehicle is not driven at approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
● Vehicle is driven on unpaved
roads
● Vehicle is driven near other vehi-
cles and system cannot recog-
nize tire pressure warning valve
and transmitters of your vehicle
over those of other vehicles
Wheel with tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter installed is
inside or near the vehicle
If registration does not complete
after driving for 1 hour or more, per-
form the ID code registration proce-
dure again from the beginning.
● If the vehicle is reversed during
registration, the data up to that
point is reset, so perform the reg-
istration procedure again from the
beginning.
● In the following situations, ID code
registration will not be started or
was not completed properly and
the system will not operate prop-
erly. Perform the ID code registra-
tion procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start ID
code registration, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink slowly
3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been
driven for about 20 minutes after
performing ID code registration,
the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminates.
If the ID codes cannot be registered
even when performing the above
procedure, contact your Toyota
dealer.
423
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure and tire size
are displayed on the tire and
loading information label.
(P.499)
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pres-
sure gauge onto the tire
valve.
3 Read the pressure using the
gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is
not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press
the center of the valve to
deflate.
5 After completing the tire infla-
tion pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy
water to the valve and check
for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back
on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check
interval
You should check tire inflation pres-
sure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. Do not forget to
check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation
pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation
pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor
handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating,
have it checked by your Toyota
dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire
inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pres-
Tire inflation pressure
Checking the specified
tire inflation pressure
Inspection and adjust-
ment procedure
424
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
sure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are
cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for
at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5
km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is
properly inflated based only on its
appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving
as heat is generated in the tire. Do
not reduce tire inflation pressure
after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight.
Passengers and luggage weight
should be placed so that the vehi-
cle is balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to
save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly
inflated, the following conditions
may occur which could lead to an
accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting
from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire
and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire
damage
● Greater possibility of tire dam-
age while driving (due to road
hazards, expansion joints,
sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjust-
ing tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps
back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt
or moisture may get into the valve
and cause an air leak, resulting in
decreased tire inflation pressure.
425
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
When replacing wheels, care
should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those
removed in load capacity, diam-
eter, rim width and inset
*
.
Replacement wheels are avail-
able at your Toyota dealer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as off-
set.
Toyota does not recommend
using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or
types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been
straightened
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are
equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pres-
sure. Whenever wheels are
replaced, tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be
installed. (P.416)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or
heavily corroded, it should
be replaced. Otherwise, the
tire may separate from the
wheel or cause a loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a dif-
ferent size from those recom-
mended in the Owner’s Manual,
as this may result in a loss of
handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an acci-
dent, causing death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the wheel
nuts
Never use oil or grease on the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the
wheel nuts to be excessively tight-
ened, leading to bolt or disc wheel
damage. In addition, the oil or
grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall
off, causing an accident and
resulting in death or serious injury.
Remove any oil or grease from
the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels pro-
hibited
Do not use cracked or deformed
wheels. Doing so could cause the
tire to leak air during driving, pos-
sibly causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replace-
ment may affect the tire pres-
sure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have
tires serviced by your Toyota
dealer or other qualified service
shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmit-
ters at your Toyota dealer.
426
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
Use only Toyota wheel nuts
and wrenches designed for
use with your aluminum
wheels.
When rotating, repairing or
changing your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still
tight after driving 1000 miles
(1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
Use only Toyota genuine bal-
ance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber ham-
mer when balancing your
wheels.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
3 Push in the glove box on the
vehicle’s outer side to discon-
nect the claws. Then pull out
the glove box and disconnect
the lower claws.
4 Unlock the filter cover ( ),
pull the filter cover out of the
NOTICE
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota
wheels are used on your vehi-
cle.
Tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters may not work
properly with non-genuine
wheels.
Aluminum wheel precau-
tions
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter
must be changed regularly
to maintain air conditioning
efficiency.
Removing the air condi-
tioning filter
427
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
claws ( ), and remove the
filter cover.
5 Remove the filter case.
6 Remove the air conditioning
filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “ UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should be
pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air condi-
tioning filter according to the mainte-
nance schedule. In dusty areas or
areas with heavy traffic flow, early
replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Mainte-
nance Guide”.)
■ If air flow from the vents
decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check
the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air condition-
ing system
Make sure that a filter is always
installed.
Using the air conditioning system
without a filter may cause damage
to the system.
428
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
■ If the electronic key battery is
depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system and wire-
less remote control will not func-
tion properly.
● The operational range will be
reduced.
Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2032
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at
your Toyota dealer, local electrical
appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries accord-
ing to the local laws.
1 Release the lock and remove
the mechanical key.
2 Remove the key cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with a rag.
3 Remove the depleted battery.
When removing the cover, the elec-
tronic key module may stick to the
cover and the battery may not be
visible. In this case, remove the
electronic key module in order to
remove the battery.
When removing the battery, use a
screwdriver of an appropriate size.
Insert a new battery with the “+” ter-
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a
new one if it is depleted.
You will need the follow-
ing items:
Replacing the battery
429
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
minal facing up.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: type A
fuse box
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment: type B
fuse box
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other
parts
These parts are small and if swal-
lowed by a child, they can cause
choking. Keep away from chil-
dren. Failure to do so could result
in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after
replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery
to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other
component inside the remote
control.
● Do not bend either of the battery
terminals.
Checking and replac-
ing fuses
If any of the electrical com-
ponents do not operate, a
fuse may have blown. If this
happens, check and replace
the fuses as necessary.
Checking and replacing
fuses
430
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
Under the driver’s side instru-
ment panel
Remove the lid.
Make sure to push the claw when
removing/installing the lid.
3 Remove the fuse.
Only type B fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.
4 Check if the fuse is blown.
Replace the blown fuse with a new
fuse of an appropriate amperage
rating. The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even
after the fuse has been replaced,
a bulb may need replacement.
(P.432)
● If the replaced fuse blows again,
have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a cir-
cuit
The fuses are designed to blow, pro-
tecting the wiring harness from
damage.
431
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
■ When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use
genuine Toyota products designed
for this vehicle. Because certain
bulbs are connected to circuits
designed to prevent overload,
non-genuine parts or parts not
designed for this vehicle may be
unusable.
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
Make sure the vehicle has a
full tank of gasoline and the
area around the headlight is
not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level
ground.
Make sure the tire inflation
pressure is at the specified
level.
Have someone sit in the
driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several
times.
WARNING
■ To prevent system break-
downs and vehicle fire
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause dam-
age to the vehicle, and possibly a
fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher
amperage rating than that indi-
cated, or use any other object in
place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota
fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a
wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse
boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical over-
load determined and repaired by
your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Headlight aim
Vertical movement adjust-
ing bolts
Before checking the head-
light aim
432
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Using a Phillips-head screw-
driver, turn bolt A in either
direction.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.
2 Turn bolt B the same number
of turns and in the same
direction as step 1.
If the headlight cannot be adjusted
using this procedure, take the vehi-
cle to your Toyota dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
Check the wattage of the light
bulb to be replaced. (P.501)
P.520
Front (type A)
Front turn signal lights/park-
Adjusting the headlight
aim
Light bulbs
You may replace the follow-
ing bulbs by yourself. The
difficulty level of replace-
ment varies depending on
the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult
to perform, contact your
Toyota dealer.
For more information about
replacing other light bulbs,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb
replacement
Turning off the power
back door main switch (if
equipped)
Bulb locations
433
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
ing lights
Front side marker lights
Front (type B)
Front turn signal lights
Front side marker lights
Rear
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
■ Lights that need to be
replaced by your Toyota
dealer
Headlight low beams
Headlight high beams
Parking lights (type B)
Daytime running lights (type
A)
Daytime running lights/park-
ing lights (type B)
Front fog lights
Side turn signal lights
Tail lights/stop lights
Rear side marker lights
Tail lights
High mounted stoplight
Outer foot lights (if equipped)
■ LED lights
The lights other than the following
lights each consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out,
take your vehicle to your Toyota
dealer to have the light replaced.
● Front turn signal lights/parking
lights (type A)
● Front turn signal lights (type B)
● Front side marker lights
● Rear turn signal lights
● Back-up lights
● License plate lights
■ Condensation build-up on the
inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up
on the inside of the light lens does
not indicate a malfunction. Contact
your Toyota dealer for more informa-
tion in the following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up
on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the light.
■ When replacing light bulbs
P.431
434
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Front turn signal
lights/parking lights (type
A) and front turn signal
lights (type B)
1 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise and remove it.
2 Remove the light bulb.
3 Install a new light bulb, and
then install the bulb base to
the light unit by inserting it
and turning the bulb base
clockwise.
After installing the bulb base, wig-
gle it lightly to make sure it is
securely installed and turn the lights
and turn signal lights on to visually
check that there is no light leaking
from between the bulb base and
light unit.
■ Front side marker lights
1 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise and remove it.
2 Remove the light bulb.
3 Install a new light bulb, and
then install the bulb base to
the light unit by inserting it
and turning the bulb base
clockwise.
After installing the bulb base, wig-
gle it lightly to make sure it is
securely installed and turn the lights
on to visually check that there is no
light leaking from between the bulb
Replacing light bulbs
435
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
base and light unit.
■ Rear turn signal lights
1 Open the back door and
using a flathead screwdriver,
remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with tape, etc.
2 Remove the securing 2
screws and light unit.
Remove the light unit by pulling it
straight back from the rear of the
vehicle.
3 Disconnect the wire harness.
4 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise and remove it.
5 Remove the light bulb.
6 Install a new light bulb, and
then install the bulb base to
the light unit by inserting it
and turning it clockwise.
After installing the bulb base, wig-
gle it lightly to make sure it is
securely installed and turn on the
turn signal lights to visually check
that there is no light leaking from
between the bulb base and light
436
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
unit.
7 Install the light unit.
Align the 2 guides and push the
light unit toward the front of the
vehicle to install it.
8 Install the 2 screws.
9 Install the cover.
■ Back-up lights
1 Open the back door and
remove the cover.
Using a flathead screwdriver,
remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with tape, etc.
2 Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise and remove it.
437
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
3 Remove the light bulb.
4 Install a new light bulb, and
then install the bulb base to
the light unit by inserting it
and turning it clockwise.
After installing the bulb base, wig-
gle it lightly to make sure it is
securely installed and turn on the
back-up lights to visually check that
there is no light leaking from
between the bulb base and light
unit.
5 Install the cover.
Align the tabs of the cover with the
grooves and install the cover.
■ License plate lights
1 Remove the cover.
Using a flathead screwdriver,
remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the flathead screw-
driver with tape, etc.
2 Remove the lens.
Lens
Hook
438
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Insert a small flathead screw-
driver, etc. into either the
right or left hole of the lens.
2 Push the screwdriver side-
ways in the direction of the
arrow shown in the illustra-
tion, disengage the hook, and
then remove the lens.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the screwdriver with
tape, etc.
3 Remove the light bulb.
4 Install a new light bulb.
5 Install the lens.
Hooks
1 Fit the lens into either the
right or left hooks.
2 Push the lens into place.
After installation, confirm that the
lens is properly installed by gently
pulling it.
6 Install the cover.
439
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
6
Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ To prevent injury
Before performing any light bulb
replacement procedure, be sure
to turn the engine switch off. Fail-
ure to do so may result in burns
from hot components or a part of
your body may get caught on an
operating component, possibly
causing serious injury.
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not
attempt to replace the bulb
immediately after turning off the
lights.The bulbs become very
hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion
of the light bulb with bare
hands. When it is unavoidable
to hold the glass portion, use
and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and
oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb
is scratched or dropped, it may
blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any
parts used to secure them. Fail-
ure to do so may result in heat
damage, fire, or water entering
the light unit. This may damage
the lights or cause condensa-
tion to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or dis-
assemble light bulbs, connec-
tors, electric circuits or
component parts.
Doing so may result in death or
serious injury due to electric
shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully
seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb
before installing to prevent heat
damage.
440
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HIGHLANDER_U
441
HIGHLANDER_U
7
7
When trouble arises
When trouble arises
.
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .... 442
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
.................................. 442
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water................ 443
7-2. Steps to take in an emer-
gency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed......................... 445
If you think something is
wrong ........................ 448
Fuel pump shut off system
.................................. 449
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds
.................................. 450
If a warning message is dis-
played........................ 460
If you have a flat tire.... 464
If the engine will not start
.................................. 478
If you lose your keys... 479
If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened................. 480
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.. 481
If the vehicle battery is dis-
charged..................... 483
If your vehicle overheats
.................................. 487
If the vehicle becomes stuck
..................................489
442
7-1. Essential information
HIGHLANDER_U
7-1.Essential information
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
■ Emergency flashers
● If the emergency flashers are
used for a long time while the
engine is not operating, the bat-
tery may discharge.
● If any of the SRS airbags deploy
(inflate) or in the event of a strong
rear impact, the emergency flash-
ers will turn on automatically.
The emergency flashers will turn
off automatically after operating
for approximately 20 minutes. To
manually turn the emergency
flashers off, press the switch
twice.
(The emergency flashers may not
turn on automatically depending
on the force of the impact and
conditions of the collision.)
1 Steadily step on the brake
pedal with both feet and
firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal
repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
3 After slowing down, stop the
vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
4 Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted to N
3 Keep depressing the brake
pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as
possible.
4 To stop the engine, press and
hold the engine switch for 2
consecutive seconds or
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are
used to warn other drivers
when the vehicle has to be
stopped on the road due to
a breakdown, etc.
Operating instructions
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an emer-
gency
Only in an emergency, such
as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the
normal way, stop the vehicle
using the following proce-
dure:
Stopping the vehicle
443
7-1. Essential information
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
more, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
5 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place by the road.
Remove the seat belt first.
If the door can be opened,
open the door and exit the
vehicle.
If the door can not be opened,
open the window using the
power window switch and exit
the vehicle through the win-
dow.
If the window can not be
opened using the power win-
dow switch, remain calm, wait
until the water level inside the
vehicle rises to the point that
the water pressure inside of
the vehicle equals the water
pressure outside of the vehi-
cle, and then open the door
and exit the vehicle.
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned
off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and
steering wheel will be lost, making
the brake pedal harder to depress
and the steering wheel heavier to
turn. Decelerate as much as pos-
sible before turning off the engine.
If the vehicle is
trapped in rising water
In the event the vehicle is
submerged in water, remain
calm and perform the fol-
lowing.
444
7-1. Essential information
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Using an emergency hammer
*
for emergency escape
The front side windows and rear
side windows, as well as the rear
window can be shattered with an
emergency hammer
*
used for
emergency escape.
However, an emergency hammer
*
can not shatter the windshield as
it is laminated glass.
*
: Contact your Toyota dealer or
aftermarket accessory manu-
facturer for further information
about an emergency hammer.
■ Escaping the vehicle from the
window
There are cases where escaping
the vehicle from the window is not
possible due to seating position,
passenger body type, etc.
When using an emergency ham-
mer, consider your seat location
and the size of the window open-
ing to ensure that the opening is
accessible and large enough to
escape.
445
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
7-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed
If towing is necessary, we
recommend having your
vehicle towed by your Toy-
ota dealer or commercial
towing service, using a
wheel-lift type truck or flat-
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system
for all towing, and abide by
all state/provincial and local
laws.
If towing your vehicle with a
wheel-lift type truck from
the front, the vehicle’s rear
wheels and axles must be in
good conditions. (P.447)
If they are damaged, use a
towing dolly or flatbed
truck.
WARNING
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
2WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle
with the front wheels raised or
with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed
with the front wheels contacting
the ground, the drivetrain and
related parts may be damaged.
AWD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle
with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed
with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain or related
parts may be damaged, the vehi-
cle may fly off the truck.
446
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
The following may indicate a
problem with your transmission.
Contact your Toyota dealer or
commercial towing service
before towing.
The engine is running but the
vehicle does not move.
The vehicle makes an abnor-
mal sound.
WARNING
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or
chains, avoid sudden starts, etc.
which place excessive stress on
the towing eyelets, cables or
chains. The towing eyelets,
cables or chains may become
damaged, broken debris may hit
people, and cause serious dam-
age.
● Do not turn the engine switch
off.
There is a possibility that the
steering wheel is locked and
cannot be operated.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the
rear when the engine switch is
off. The steering lock mecha-
nism is not strong enough to
hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle,
ensure adequate ground clear-
ance for towing at the opposite
end of the raised vehicle. With-
out adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while
being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle when towing with a
sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck,
either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the
vehicle during emergency
towing
Do not secure cables or chains to
the suspension components.
■ When towing a vehicle
equipped with a Stop & Start
system (if equipped)
If it is necessary to tow the vehicle
with all 4 wheels on the ground,
perform the following procedure
before towing the vehicle, in order
to protect the system.
Turn the engine switch off and
then start the engine or turn the
engine switch to ON.
■ Recreational towing (behind
motor home, etc.)
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to
prevent causing serious damage
to the Dynamic Torque Control
AWD system (AWD models) or
Dynamic Torque Vectoring AWD
system (AWD models) and trans-
mission. (P.199)
Situations when it is nec-
essary to contact dealers
before towing
447
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
From the front (2WD models)
Release the parking brake.
Turn automatic mode off.P.210
From the front (AWD models)
Use a towing dolly under the
rear wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
If your vehicle is transported by
a flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in
the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Towing with a wheel-lift
type truck
NOTICE
■ Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
2WD models
AWD models
Using a flatbed truck
448
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes.
The vehicle’s wheels, drive train,
axles, steering and brakes must
be in good condition.
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air
conditioning after use is nor-
mal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven
tire wear
Engine coolant temperature
gauge needle continually
points higher than normal
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when
cornering
Strange noises related to the
suspension system
Pinging or other noises
related to the engine
Engine missing, stumbling or
running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one
NOTICE
■ Using a flatbed truck
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
Emergency towing
If you think something
is wrong
If you notice any of the fol-
lowing symptoms, your
vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
449
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one
side when driving on a level
road
Loss of brake effectiveness,
spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
Follow the procedure below to
restart the engine after the sys-
tem is activated.
1 Turn the engine switch to
ACC or turn it OFF.
2 Restart the engine.
Fuel pump shut off
system
To minimize the risk of fuel
leakage when the engine
stalls or when an airbag
inflates upon collision, the
fuel pump shut off system
stops the supply of fuel to
the engine.
Restarting the engine
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the
vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked
onto the ground, the fuel system
has been damaged and is in need
of repair. Do not restart the
engine.
450
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Brake system warning light
■ Brake system warning light
■ High coolant temperature warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning
lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but
then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction
in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
or
(red)
(Canada)
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehi-
cle may be dangerous.
Warning light Details/Actions
(yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in the electric parking brake
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.487)
451
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
■ Charging system warning light
■ Low engine oil pressure warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Malfunction indicator lamp
■ SRS warning light
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
or
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The electronic automatic transmission control system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The front passenger occupant classification system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
452
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
■ ABS warning light
■ Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control
warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
or
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Brake Override System is malfunctioning;
Drive-Start Control is operating;
Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or
Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) (if
equipped) is operating
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Brake Override System is operating
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake
pedal.
Warning light Details/Actions
(red/yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
453
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
■ Low fuel level warning light
■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warn-
ing buzzer)
*
*
: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to ON, the
buzzer sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain
speed.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger's seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front
passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfas-
tened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the
vehicle reaches a certain speed.
■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder light
*1
(warning buzzer)
*2
*1
:This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*2
:Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers' seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear pas-
senger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfas-
tened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time, after the
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.7 gal. (10.2
L, 2.2 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat
belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to
make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the second and/or third seat passengers to fasten
their seat belts. An indicator corresponding to an unfas-
tened second or third seat seat belt will illuminate.
Fasten the seat belt.
454
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
seat belt is fastened and unfastened and the vehicle reaches a certain
speed.
■ Tire pressure warning light
■ LTA indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Stop & Start cancel indicator
*
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1
minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
Natural causes
Flat tire
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.458)
Warning light Details/Actions
(orange)
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.250)
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
(if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Stop & Start system
(The Stop & Start cancel indicator will come on when the
system is canceled: P.265)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
455
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
■ RCTA OFF indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
(if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist func-
tion
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi-
bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.279)
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
(if equipped)
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) function
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is
covered with dirt, etc. (P.272)
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.285)
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
(if equipped)
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi-
bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.294, 460)
456
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
■ PCS warning light
■ Slip indicator
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes or illu-
minates)
When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Colli-
sion System).
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily
unavailable, corrective action may be necessary.
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.227, 462)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-
minate.
P. 2 40
Warning light Details/Actions
When the warning light is illuminated:
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC system;
The TRAC system;
The Trailer Sway Control; or
The hill-start assist control system;
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
When the warning light flashes:
Indicates that the VSC, TRAC or Trailer Sway Control sys-
tem is operating
457
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
■ Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)
*
*
: A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3
mph (5 km/h) or more.
■ Brake hold operated indicator
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not
be heard due to being in a noisy
location or audio sound.
■ Front passenger detection sen-
sor, seat belt reminder and
warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front
passenger seat, the front passen-
ger detection sensor may cause
the warning light to flash and the
warning buzzer to sound even if a
passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat,
the sensor may not detect a pas-
senger, and the warning light may
not operate properly.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors
the airbag sensor assembly, front
impact sensors, side impact sensors
(front door), side impact sensors
(rear), driver’s seat position sensor,
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front
passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors), “PASS
AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “PASS
AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front
passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
driver’s seat belt pretensioner, front
passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
and force limiter, airbags, intercon-
necting wiring and power sources.
(P. 32)
■ If the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several
driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
(U.S.A.)
or
(flashes)
(Canada)
It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or
released
Operate the parking brake switch once again.
This light comes on when the parking brake is not released.
If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released,
the system is operating normally.
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
458
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Electric power steering system
warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes
insufficient or the voltage temporar-
ily drops, the electric power steering
system warning light may come on
and the warning buzzer may sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning
light comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is
punctured.
If a tire is punctured: P.464
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn
it to ON. Check if the tire pressure
warning light comes on or blinks.
If the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the
tire pressure warning system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on
1 After the temperature of the tires
has lowered sufficiently, check
the inflation pressure of each tire
and adjust them to the specified
level.
2 If the warning light does not turn
off even after several minutes
have elapsed, check that the
inflation pressure of each tire is
at the specified level and perform
initialization. (P.417)
If the warning light does not turn off
several minutes after the initializa-
tion has been performed, have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
■ The tire pressure warning light
may come on due to natural
causes
The tire pressure warning light may
come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation
pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the
tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a
spare tire
Vehicles with a compact spare tire:
The compact spare tire is not
equipped with a tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter. If a tire
goes flat, the tire pressure warning
light will not turn off even though the
flat tire has been replaced with the
spare tire. Replace the spare tire
with the repaired tire and adjust the
tire inflation pressure. The tire pres-
sure warning light will go off after a
few minutes.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire:
The spare tire is also equipped with
a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. The tire pressure warn-
ing light will turn on if the tire infla-
tion pressure of the spare tire is low.
If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure
warning light will not turn off even
though the flat tire has been
replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure. The tire pressure
warning light will go off after a few
minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pres-
sure warning system may not
function properly
P.414
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake
system warning lights remain
on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place
immediately and contact your Toy-
ota dealer.
The vehicle will become
extremely unstable during brak-
ing, and the ABS system may fail,
which could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
459
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
WARNING
■ When the electric power
steering system warning light
comes on
When the light comes on yellow,
the assist to the power steering is
restricted. When the light comes
on red, the assist to the power
steering is lost and handling oper-
ations of the steering wheel
become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations
are heavier than usual, grip the
steering wheel firmly and operate
it using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning
light comes on
Be sure to observe the following
precautions.
Failure to do so could cause a
loss of vehicle control and result
in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire inflation pressure immedi-
ately.
● Vehicles with a compact spare
tire: If the tire pressure warning
light comes on even after tire
inflation pressure adjustment, it
is probable that you have a flat
tire. Check the tires. If a tire is
flat, change it with the spare tire
and have the flat tire repaired by
the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and
braking.
If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the
steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air
leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system
may not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label (tire and
load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load infor-
mation label], you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS-tire pressure warning sys-
tem) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light) when one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead
to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire
pressure warning system) is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light).
460
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pres-
sure telltale (tire pressure warning
light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will con-
tinue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-
tem) malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS
(tire pressure warning system)
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function
properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure
warning system operates
properly
Do not install tires with different
specifications or makers, as the
tire pressure warning system may
not operate properly.
If a warning message
is displayed
The multi-information dis-
play shows warnings of sys-
tem malfunctions,
incorrectly performed oper-
ations, and messages that
indicate a need for mainte-
nance. When a message is
shown, perform the correc-
tion procedure appropriate
to the message.
Additionally, if a warning
light comes on or flashes at
the same time that a warn-
ing message is displayed,
take the appropriate correc-
tive action for the warning
light. (P.450)
If a warning message is dis-
played again after the
appropriate actions have
been performed, contact
your Toyota dealer.
461
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depend-
ing on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need
for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately.
*
: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
■ Warning messages
The warning messages explained
below may differ from the actual
messages according to operation
conditions and vehicle specifica-
tions.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not
be heard due to being in a noisy
location or audio sound.
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or
Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level is low. Check
the level of the engine oil, and add if
necessary.
This message may appear if the
vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move
the vehicle to a level surface and
check to see if the message disap-
pears.
Messages and warnings
Warning light
Warning
buzzer
*
Warning
- Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such as
when a system related to driving is mal-
functioning or that danger may result if
the correction procedure is not per-
formed
Indicates a situation, such as when dam-
age to the vehicle or danger may result
Comes on or
flashes
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such as
when the systems shown on the
multi-information display may be malfunc-
tioning
-
Does not
sound
Indicates a condition, such as malfunc-
tion of electrical components, their condi-
tion, or indicates the need for
maintenance
Indicates a situation, such as when an
operation has been performed incor-
rectly, or indicates how to perform an
operation correctly
462
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
■ If “Engine Stopped Steering
Power Low” is displayed
This message is displayed if the
engine is stopped while driving.
When steering wheel operations are
heavier than usual, grip the steering
wheel firmly and operate it using
more force than usual.
■ If “Shift to P when Parked” is
displayed
This message is displayed when the
driver’s door is opened without turn-
ing the engine switch off with the
shift lever in any position other than
P. Change the shift lever to P.
■ If “Auto Power OFF to Conserve
Battery” is displayed
Power was cut off due to the auto-
matic power off function. Next time
when starting the engine, increase
the engine speed slightly and main-
tain that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery.
■ If “Headlight System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-
played
The following systems may be mal-
functioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
● The LED headlight system (if AFS
[Adaptive Front-lighting System]
equipped)
● AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting Sys-
tem) (if equipped)
● The automatic headlight leveling
system (if equipped)
● Automatic High Beam
■ If “Radar Cruise Control
Unavailable” is displayed
The dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range system cannot
be used temporarily. Use the system
when it becomes available again.
■ If “Front Camera Unavailable”
or “Front Camera Unavailable
See Owner's Manual” is dis-
played
The following systems may be sus-
pended until the problem shown in
the message is resolved. (P.231,
456)
● PCS (Pre-Collision system)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
● Automatic High Beam
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
■ If “AWD System Overheated
Switching to 2WD Mode” or
“AWD System Overheated 2WD
Mode Engaged” is displayed
(AWD models)
This message may be displayed
when driving under extremely high
load conditions.
Drive the vehicle at low speeds or
stop the vehicle in a safe place with
the engine running until the mes-
sage is cleared.
If the message is not cleared, have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ If “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-
played
The fuel tank cap is not properly
installed. Correctly install the fuel
tank cap.
■ If “Maintenance Required
Soon” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance
according to the driven distance on
the maintenance schedule
*
should
be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500
miles (7200 km) after the message
has been reset. If necessary, per-
form maintenance. Please reset the
message after the maintenance is
performed. (P.395)
463
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
*
: Refer to the separate “Scheduled
Maintenance” or “Owner’s Man-
ual Supplement” for the mainte-
nance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit
Your Dealer” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance is
required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance sched-
ule
*
.
Comes on approximately 5000
miles (8000 km) after the message
has been reset. (The indicator will
not work properly unless the mes-
sage has been reset.) Perform the
necessary maintenance. Please
reset the message after the mainte-
nance is performed. (P.395)
*
: Refer to the separate “Scheduled
Maintenance” or “Owner’s Man-
ual Supplement” for the mainte-
nance interval applicable to your
vehicle.
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required
Soon” is displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should
be scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil and change it if
necessary. After changing the
engine oil, make sure to reset the
message. (P.394)
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required” is
displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should
be changed.
Check and change the engine oil,
and oil filter by your Toyota dealer.
After changing the engine oil, make
sure to reset the message.
(P.394)
■ If a message that indicates the
need for visiting your Toyota
dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the
multi-information display is malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If a message that indicates the
need for referring to Owner’s
Manual is displayed
● If any of the following messages
are shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, it may indicate a mal-
function. Immediately stop the
vehicle and contact your Toyota
dealer.
• “Braking Power Low Stop in a
Safe Place See Owner's Manual”
• “Oil Pressure Low Stop in a Safe
Place See Owner's Manual”
• “Charging System Malfunction
Stop in a Safe Place See Owner's
Manual”
● If “Smart Key System Malfunction
See Owner's Manual” is shown on
the multi-information display, it
may indicate a malfunction. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toy-
ota dealer immediately.
● If any of the following messages
are shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, follow the instruc-
tions.
• “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop
in a Safe Place See Owner's Man-
ual” (P.487)
• “High Transmission Fluid Temp
See Owner's Manual” (P.204)
NOTICE
■ If “High Power Consumption
Partial Limit on AC/Heater
Operation” is displayed fre-
quently
There is a possible malfunction
relating to the charging system or
the battery may be deteriorating.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
464
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flash-
ers. (P.442)
For vehicles with power back
door: Turn off the power back
door system. (P.515)
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire. The flat tire
can be replaced with the
spare tire.
For details about tires:
P.411
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat
tire.
Driving even a short distance with
a flat tire can damage the tire and
the wheel beyond repair, which
could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the
vehicle
465
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
Adapter socket
Jack
Spare tire
Wheel lock key (if equipped)
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Improper use of the tire jack may
cause the vehicle to suddenly fall
off the jack, leading to death or
serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any
purpose other than replacing
tires or installing and removing
tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that
comes with this vehicle for
replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles,
and do not use other tire jacks
for replacing tires on this vehi-
cle.
466
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
When replacing tires on a vehi-
cle with wheel lock nuts, use the
following procedures to remove
and install the wheel lock nuts.
The wheel lock key is stored in
the tray inside the luggage com-
partment. Always return the
wheel lock key to its original
position after use, so that it does
not get lost. (P.465)
■ Removal
For ease of removal, the wheel
lock nut should always be the
first one loosened.
1 Place the wheel lock key on
top of the wheel lock nut,
turning until the wheel lock
key and wheel lock nut pat-
terns engage.
2 Place the wheel nut wrench
on the wheel lock key, and
while applying pressure on
the wheel lock key, loosen
the wheel lock nut.
■ Installation
For ease of installation, the
wheel lock nut should always be
the last one tightened.
1 By hand, install a wheel lock
nut on each wheel.
2 Place the wheel lock key on
top of the wheel lock nut,
turning until the wheel lock
key and wheel lock nut pat-
terns engage.
3 Place the wheel nut wrench
on the wheel lock key, and
while applying pressure on
the wheel lock key, tighten
the wheel lock nut to the rec-
ommended torque.
WARNING
● Put the jack properly in its jack
point.
● Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle while it is sup-
ported by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive
the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while
someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not
put an object on or under the
jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a
height greater than that required
to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is neces-
sary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle,
make sure that there is no-one
near the vehicle. If there are
people nearby, warn them
vocally before lowering.
Wheel lock nut (if
equipped)
467
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
1 Pull the strap upwards and
open the center deck board.
2 Remove the center deck
board.
3 Remove the jack cover.
4 Remove the jack after remov-
ing the hook.
1 Pull the strap upwards and
open the center deck board.
NOTICE
■ When using a wheel lock key
(if equipped)
Do not use an impact wrench.
Using an impact wrench may
cause permanent damage to
wheel lock nut and wheel lock
key. If in doubt about wheel lock
application, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Taking out the jack
Taking out the spare tire
468
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
2 Remove the center deck
board.
3 Remove the cover.
If it is difficult to remove the cover,
you can use your key.
4 Attach the adapter socket to
the spare tire clamp bolt.
5 Connect the jack handle
extension to the jack handle.
Check that the extension is locked
in place by the button.
6 Connect the jack handle to
the adapter socket. Turn the
jack handle counterclock-
wise.
The tire will be lowered completely
to the ground.
Turn the jack handle slowly to lower
the spare tire. If the handle is
turned quickly, the wire cable may
slip off of the shaft inside the unit
and the tire may not be lowered.
If the spare tire cannot be lowered:
P.471
469
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
7 Pull out the spare tire and
stand it against the bumper.
With a compact spare tire
With a full-size spare tire
Vehicles with a compact
spare tire
8 Fully depress the secondary
latch and remove the
holding bracket from the
hoist assembly .
9 Tilt the bracket and pass it
through the wheel opening.
Then remove the hoist
assembly .
Vehicles with a full-size spare
tire
8 Fully depress the secondary
latch and remove the
470
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
holding bracket from the
hoist assembly .
9 Tilt the holding bracket so
that it can easily be passed
through the wheel opening.
After passing the holding
bracket through the wheel
opening, remove the hoist
assembly .
1 Chock the tires.
2 Slightly loosen the wheel
nuts (one turn).
Vehicles with wheel locks: Use the
wheel lock key to loosen the wheel
WARNING
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or
other body parts between the
spare tire and the body of the
vehicle.
Replacing a flat tire
Flat tire
Wheel chock
positions
Front left-hand
side
Behind the rear
right-hand side
tire
Front right-hand
side
Behind the rear
left-hand side tire
Rear left-hand
side
In front of the
front right-hand
side tire
Rear right-hand
side
In front of the
front left-hand
side tire
471
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
lock.
3 Turn the tire jack portion
by hand until the notch of the
jack is in contact with the jack
point.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They indi-
cate the jack point positions.
4 Raise the vehicle until the tire
is slightly raised off the
ground.
5 Remove all the wheel nuts
and the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
■ If the spare tire cannot be low-
ered
If the spare tire cannot be lowered, it
may not have been stowed properly.
Perform the following procedure:
1 Fully tighten the spare tire clamp
bolt by turning the jack handle
clockwise until two clicks are
heard and the jack handle skips.
2 Turn the jack handle counter-
clockwise to lower the spare tire.
If the spare tire still cannot be low-
ered, attempt to fully tighten the
spare tire clamp bolt again by turn-
ing the jack handle clockwise. Then
turn it counterclockwise at least 2
turns to lower the spare tire.
If the spare tire still cannot be low-
472
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
ered, the wire cable may be sev-
ered. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
1 Remove any dirt or foreign
matter from the wheel con-
tact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or
the area around the brakes
immediately after the vehicle
has been driven.
After the vehicle has been
driven the disc wheels and the
area around the brakes will be
extremely hot. Touching these
areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire,
etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precau-
tions could cause the wheel
nuts to loosen and the tire to fall
off, resulting in death or serious
injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the
wheel nuts to be excessively
tightened, leading to bolt or disc
wheel damage. In addition, the
oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the
wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death
or serious injury. Remove any
oil or grease from the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf
(103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon
as possible after changing
wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use
wheel nuts that have been spe-
cifically designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or defor-
mations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the
wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
• Do not attach a heavily dam-
aged wheel ornament, as it may
fly off the wheel while the vehi-
cle is moving.
● Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in
serious injury:
• Do not try to remove the wheel
ornament by hand. Take due
care in handling the ornament to
avoid unexpected personal
injury.
• Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground before removing it
from under the vehicle.
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehi-
cles with power back door
In cases such as when replacing
tires, make sure to turn off the
power back door main switch
(P.515). Failure to do so may
cause the back door to operate
unintentionally if the power back
door switch is accidentally
touched, resulting in hands and
fingers being caught and injured.
Installing the spare tire
473
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
motion, causing the tire to come off.
2 Install the spare tire and
loosely tighten each wheel
nut by hand by approximately
the same amount.
Turn the wheel nuts until the wash-
ers come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Disc wheel
Washer
3 Lower the vehicle.
4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the
order shown in the illustra-
tion.
Vehicles with wheel locks: Tighten
the wheel lock using the wheel lock
key after tightening the other wheel
nuts.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
1 Remove the center wheel
ornament by pushing from
the reverse side.
Be careful not to lose the wheel
ornament.
2 Stand the tire against the
bumper with the inner sur-
face facing toward you. Pass
the hoist assembly and
WARNING
■ Stowing the flat tire
Failure to follow steps listed under
stowing the tire may result in
damage to the spare tire carrier
and loss of the tire, which could
result in serious injury or death.
Stowing the flat tire, jack
and all tools
474
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
holding bracket through
the wheel opening.
3 Fully depress the secondary
latch and install the
bracket to the hoist
assembly .
4 Lay the tire on the ground
with the outer surface (valve
stem) facing up.
5 Before raising the tire, make
sure that the hoist assembly
is perpendicular to the wheel
opening. (Try to place the tire
directly beneath the vehicle,
near where the wire cable is
hanging from.)
Valve stem
6 Using the jack handle and
adapter socket, tighten the
tire clamp bolt by turning it
clockwise until the tire is in
the correct position and two
clicks are heard as the jack
handle skips.
475
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
7 Confirm it is not loose after
tightening:
1 Push and pull the tire
2 Try rotating
Visually check to ensure tire is not
hung on surrounding parts.
If looseness or misassembly exists,
repeat steps 2 to 7.
8 Repeat step 7, any time the
tire is lowered or disturbed.
9 Stow the jack and all tools.
■ The compact spare tire (vehi-
cles with a compact spare tire)
● The compact spare tire is identi-
fied by the label “TEMPORARY
USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire tempo-
rarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire infla-
tion pressure of the compact
spare tire. (P.499)
■ When using the compact spare
tire (vehicles with a compact
spare tire)
As the compact spare tire is not
equipped with a tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter, low infla-
tion pressure of the spare tire will
not be indicated by the tire pressure
warning system. Also, if you replace
the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on,
the light remains on.
■ When the compact spare tire is
equipped (vehicles with a com-
pact spare tire)
When driving with the compact
spare tire installed, the vehicle
height will be different than when
driving with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a
road covered with snow or ice
(vehicles with a compact spare
tire)
Install the compact spare tire on one
of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit
tire chains to the front tires:
1 Replace a rear tire with the com-
pact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat front tire with the
tire removed from the rear of the
vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.
WARNING
■ When using the compact
spare tire (vehicles with a
compact spare tire)
● Remember that the compact
spare tire provided is specifi-
cally designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your com-
pact spare tire on another vehi-
cle.
● Do not use more than one com-
pact spare tire simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire
with a standard tire as soon as
possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration,
abrupt steering, sudden brak-
ing and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
476
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ When the compact spare tire
is attached (vehicles with a
compact spare tire)
The vehicle speed may not be
correctly detected, and the follow-
ing systems may not operate cor-
rectly:
• ABS & Brake assist
• VSC
• TRAC
• Trailer Sway Control (if
equipped)
• EPS
• Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped)
• Automatic High Beam
• AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) (if equipped)
• Tire pressure warning system
• Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped)
• PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
(if equipped)
• Toyota parking assist monitor (if
equipped)
• Panoramic view monitor (if
equipped)
• BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if
equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following
system not be utilized fully, but it
may even negatively affect the
drive-train components:
• AWD system (AWD models)
■ Speed limit when using the
compact spare tire (vehicles
with a compact spare tire)
Do not drive at speeds in excess
of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a com-
pact spare tire is installed on the
vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not
designed for driving at high
speeds. Failure to observe this
precaution may lead to an acci-
dent causing death or serious
injury.
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the
tools and jack are securely in
place in their storage location to
reduce the possibility of personal
injury during a collision or sudden
braking.
NOTICE
■ Be careful when driving over
bumps with the compact
spare tire installed on the
vehicle (vehicles with a com-
pact spare tire)
The vehicle becomes lower when
driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with
standard tires. Be careful when
driving over uneven road sur-
faces.
477
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
NOTICE
■ Driving with tire chains and
the compact spare tire (vehi-
cles with a compact spare
tire)
Do not fit tire chains to the com-
pact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehi-
cle body and adversely affect driv-
ing performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the
wheels, tires or the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter,
contact your Toyota dealer as the
tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may be damaged if not
handled correctly.
■ When stowing the flat tire
● Ensure that there is no object
caught between the tire and the
vehicle underbody.
● Securely tighten the spare tire
clamp bolt to hold the spare
wheel carrier by the hook.
● Stow the flat tire in the spare tire
location. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the spare tire
carrier. Proper storage reduces
the possibility of injury in a colli-
sion or during sudden braking.
● Have the flat tire repaired and
the spare tire replaced with it as
soon as possible.
■ Proper storage of the spare
tire
● If the hoist assembly is slanted
when stowing a tire, the hoist
assembly may become stuck in
the wheel opening and the tire
may not be raised properly,
causing damage to the wheel or
the wire cable.
● Do not attempt to turn the spare
tire clamp bolt without a tire on
the hoist assembly, as doing so
may cause the wire cable to slip
off of the shaft inside the unit
and the wire cable may not be
able to be raised or lowered. If
the spare tire clamp bolt has
been turned without a tire on the
hoist assembly and the wire
cable cannot be raised or low-
ered, contact your Toyota
dealer.
478
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
There may not be sufficient
fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again
following correct starting pro-
cedures. (P.200)
There may be a malfunction
in the engine immobilizer sys-
tem. (P.69)
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
The battery may be dis-
charged. (P.483)
The battery terminal connec-
tions may be loose or cor-
roded. (P.408)
The engine starting system may
be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as elec-
tronic key battery depletion or a
blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the
engine. (P.478)
One of the following may be the
cause of the problem:
One or both of the battery ter-
minals may be disconnected.
(P.408)
The battery may be dis-
charged. (P.483)
There may be a malfunction
in the steering lock system.
Contact your Toyota dealer if the
problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
When the engine does not start,
the following steps can be used
If the engine will not
start
If the engine will not start
even though correct starting
procedures are being fol-
lowed (P.200), consider
each of the following points:
The engine will not start
even though the starter
motor operates normally.
The starter motor turns
over slowly, the interior
lights and headlights are
dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does
not turn over
The starter motor does
not turn over, the interior
lights and headlights do
not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.
Starting the engine in an
emergency
479
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
as an interim measure to start
the engine if the engine switch is
functioning normally.
Do not use this starting proce-
dure except in cases of emer-
gency.
1 Pull the parking brake switch
to check that the parking
brake is set. (P.209)
Parking brake indicator will come
on.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Turn the engine switch to
ACC.
4 Press and hold the engine
switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake
pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be
started using the above steps,
the system may be malfunction-
ing. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
If you lose your keys
New genuine mechanical
keys can be made by your
Toyota dealer using another
mechanical key and the key
number stamped on your
key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe
place such as your wallet,
not in the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost,
the risk of vehicle theft increases
significantly. Visit your Toyota
dealer immediately with all
remaining electronic keys that
were provided with your vehicle.
480
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
If the fuel filler door opener
switch cannot be operated,
remove the cover inside the
luggage compartment and
pull the lever to open the fuel
filler door.
Using the lever to open the
fuel filler door may not allow
for an adequate reduction in
fuel tank pressure before refu-
eling. To prevent fuel from
spilling out, turn the cap
slowly when removing it.
During refueling, fuel may spill
out from the filler opening due
to air being discharged from
inside the fuel tank. There-
fore, fill the fuel tank carefully
and slowly.
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened
If the fuel filler door opener
switch cannot be operated,
contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle. In
case where refueling is
urgently necessary, the fol-
lowing procedure can be
used to open the fuel filler
door.
Opening the fuel filler
door
481
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
■ When the electronic key does
not work properly
● Make sure that the smart key sys-
tem has not been deactivated in
the customization setting. If it is
off, turn the function on. (Custom-
izable features: P.515)
● Check if battery-saving mode is
set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P.132)
■ Unlocking the door
Use the mechanical key
(P.114) in order to perform the
following operations:
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
Turning the key unlocks the driver’s
door. Turning the key again unlocks
the other doors.
■ Key linked functions
1 Closes the windows and the
moon roof
*
(turn and hold)
2 Opens the windows and the
moon roof
*
(turn and hold)
These settings must be customized
at your Toyota dealer.
*
: If equipped
If the electronic key
does not operate prop-
erly
If communication between
the electronic key and vehi-
cle is interrupted (P.132)
or the electronic key cannot
be used because the battery
is depleted, the smart key
system and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In
such cases, the doors can
be opened and the engine
can be started by following
the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking
the doors
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical
key and operating the power
windows or moon roof (if
equipped)
Operate the power window or
moon roof after checking to make
sure that there is no possibility of
any passenger having any of their
body parts caught in the window
or moon roof. Also, do not allow
children to operate the mechani-
cal key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get
caught in the power window or
moon roof.
482
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
1 Ensure that the shift lever is
in P and depress the brake
pedal.
2 Touch the Toyota emblem
side of the electronic key to
the engine switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
engine switch will turn to ON.
When the smart key system is
deactivated in customization set-
ting, the engine switch will turn to
ACC.
3 Firmly depress the brake
pedal and check that is
shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
4 Press the engine switch
shortly and firmly.
In the event that the engine still
cannot be started, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P, set the park-
ing brake, and press the engine
switch as you normally do when
stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a tempo-
rary measure, it is recommended
that the electronic key battery be
replaced immediately when the bat-
tery is depleted. (P.428)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press
the engine switch in step 3 above.
The engine does not start and
modes will be changed each time
the switch is pressed. (P.203)
Starting the engine
483
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
If you have a set of jumper (or
booster) cables and a second
vehicle with a 12-volt battery,
you can jump start your vehicle
by following the steps below.
1 Confirm that the electronic
key is being carried.
Vehicles with an alarm: When con-
necting the jumper (or booster)
cables, depending on the situation,
the alarm may activate and doors
locked. (P. 72)
2 Open the hood. (P.402)
3 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and
connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on
the second vehicle. Then, connect a negative cable clamp to
If the vehicle battery
is discharged
The following procedures
may be used to start the
engine if the vehicle’s bat-
tery is discharged.
You can also call your Toy-
ota dealer or a qualified
repair shop.
Restarting the engine
484
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
on the second vehicle and connect the clamp at the other end of
the negative cable to .
Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts as shown in the illustration
4 Start the engine of the sec-
ond vehicle. Increase the
engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your
vehicle.
5 Open and close any of the
doors of your vehicle with the
engine switch OFF.
6 Maintain the engine speed of
the second vehicle and start
the engine of your vehicle by
turning the engine switch to
ON.
7 Once the vehicle’s engine
has started, remove the
jumper cables in the exact
reverse order from which
they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the
vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the
battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by
push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the
audio system while the engine is
stopped. (Vehicles with Stop &
Start system: Except when the
engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system.)
● Turn off any unnecessary electri-
cal components when the vehicle
is running at a low speed for an
extended period, such as in heavy
485
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
traffic.
■ When the battery is removed or
discharged
● Information stored in the ECU is
cleared. When the battery is
depleted, have the vehicle
inspected at your Toyota dealer.
● Some systems may require initial-
ization. (P.527)
■ When removing the battery ter-
minals
When the battery terminals are
removed, the information stored in
the ECU is cleared. Before remov-
ing the battery terminals, contact
your Toyota dealer.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery
will discharge gradually even when
the vehicle is not in use, due to nat-
ural discharge and the draining
effects of certain electrical appli-
ances. If the vehicle is left for a long
time, the battery may discharge,
and the engine may be unable to
start. (The battery recharges auto-
matically during driving.)
■ After jump starting the vehicle
(Vehicles with Stop & Start sys-
tem)
Be sure to disable the Stop & Start
system so that the battery can be
charged. (P.265)
■ When recharging or replacing
the battery
● In some cases, it may not be pos-
sible to unlock the doors using the
smart key system when the bat-
tery is discharged. Use the wire-
less remote control or the
mechanical key to lock or unlock
the doors.
● The engine may not start on the
first attempt after the battery has
recharged but will start normally
after the second attempt. This is
not a malfunction.
● The engine switch mode is memo-
rized by the vehicle. When the
battery is reconnected, the system
will return to the mode it was in
before the battery was dis-
charged. Before disconnecting the
battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the
engine switch was in before the
battery discharged, be especially
careful when reconnecting the
battery.
● Vehicles with power back door:
The power back door must be ini-
tialized. (P.126)
● Vehicles with Stop & Start system:
For a while after the battery termi-
nals have been disconnected and
reconnected, for a while after the
battery has been replaced, the
Stop & Start system may not auto-
matically stop the engine for
approximately 5 to 60 minutes.
■ When replacing the battery
● Use a Central Degassing type bat-
tery (European Regulations).
● Vehicles with Stop & Start system:
Use a genuine battery specifically
designed for use with the Stop &
Start system or a battery with
equivalent specifications to a gen-
uine battery. If an unsupported
battery is used, Stop & Start sys-
tem functions may be restricted to
protect the battery.
Also, battery performance may
decrease and the engine may not
be able to restart. Contact your
Toyota dealer for details.
● Vehicles without Stop & Start sys-
tem: Use a battery that the case
size is same as the previous one
(LN3), 20 hour rate capacity
(20HR) is equivalent (70Ah) or
greater, and performance rating
(CCA) is equivalent (603A) or
greater.
Vehicles with Stop & Start system:
Use a battery that the case size is
same as the previous one (LN3), 20
hour rate capacity (20HR) is equiva-
486
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
lent (65Ah) or greater, and perfor-
mance rating (CCA) is equivalent
(603A) or greater.
• If the sizes differ, the battery can-
not be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low,
even if the time period where the
vehicle is not used is a short time,
the battery may discharge and the
engine may not be able to start.
For details, consult your Toyota
dealer.
WARNING
■ When removing the battery
terminals
Always remove the negative (-)
terminal first. If the positive (+) ter-
minal contacts any metal in the
surrounding area when the posi-
tive (+) terminal is removed, a
spark may occur, leading to a fire
in addition to electrical shocks
and death or serious injury.
■ Avoiding battery fires or
explosions
Observe the following precautions
to prevent accidentally igniting the
flammable gas that may be emit-
ted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is
connected to the correct termi-
nal and that it is not unintention-
ally in contact with any other
than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of
the jumper cable connected to
the “+” terminal to come into
contact with any other parts or
metal surfaces in the area, such
as brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps
of the jumper cables to come
into contact with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches,
cigarette lighters or allow open
flame near the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous
and corrosive acidic electrolyte,
while related parts contain lead
and lead compounds. Observe
the following precautions when
handling the battery:
● When working with the battery,
always wear safety glasses and
take care not to allow any bat-
tery fluids (acid) to come into
contact with skin, clothing or the
vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid
comes into contact with the skin
or eyes, immediately wash the
affected area with water and
seek medical attention. Place a
wet sponge or cloth over the
affected area until medical
attention can be received.
● Always wash your hands after
handling the battery support,
terminals, and other bat-
tery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the
battery.
■ When replacing the battery
● When the vent plug and indica-
tor are close to the hold down
clamp, the battery fluid (sulfuric
acid) may leak.
● For information regarding bat-
tery replacement, contact your
Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper
cables, ensure that they do not
become entangled in the cooling
fan or engine drive belt.
487
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the air con-
ditioning system, and then
stop the engine.
2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after
the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
Radiator
Cooling fan
4 The coolant level is satisfac-
tory if it is between the
“FULL” and “LOW” lines on
the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
Radiator cap
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
If your vehicle over-
heats
The following may indicate
that your vehicle is over-
heating.
The needle of the engine
coolant temperature gauge
(P.79) enters the red zone
or a loss of engine power is
experienced. (For example,
the vehicle speed does not
increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High
Stop in a Safe Place See
Owner’s Manual” is shown
on the multi-information dis-
play.
Steam comes out from
under the hood.
Correction procedures
488
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
gency if coolant is unavailable.
6 Start the engine and turn the
air conditioning system on to
check that the radiator cool-
ing fan operates and to check
for coolant leaks from the
radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air con-
ditioning system is turned on imme-
diately after a cold start. Confirm
that the fan is operating by check-
ing the fan sound and air flow. If it is
difficult to check these, turn the air
conditioning system on and off
repeatedly. (The fan may not oper-
ate in freezing temperatures.)
7 If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately
and contact your Toyota
dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at
the nearest Toyota dealer.
8 Check if “Engine Coolant
Temp High Stop in a Safe
Place See Owner's Manual”
is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the engine and contact your
Toyota dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest Toyota dealer.
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the
hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may result in seri-
ous injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from
under the hood, do not open the
hood until the steam has sub-
sided. The engine compart-
ment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (espe-
cially a tie, a scarf or a muffler)
away from the fan and belts.
Failure to do so may cause the
hands or clothing to be caught,
resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap
and the coolant reservoir cap
while the engine and radiator
are hot.
High temperature steam or
coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the
engine has cooled down suffi-
ciently. Adding cool coolant to a
hot engine too quickly can cause
damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the
cooling system
Observe the following precau-
tions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant
with foreign matter (such as
sand or dust, etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
489
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
7
When trouble arises
1 Stop the engine. Shift the
shift lever to P and set the
parking brake.
2 Remove the mud, snow or
sand from around the front
wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some
other material under the front
wheels to help provide trac-
tion.
4 Restart the engine.
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R
and release the parking
brake. Then, while exercising
caution, depress the acceler-
ator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the
vehicle
Press to turn off TRAC.
If the vehicle becomes
stuck
Carry out the following pro-
cedures if the tires spin or
the vehicle becomes stuck
in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a
stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle
back and forth to free it, make
sure the surrounding area is clear
to avoid striking other vehicles,
objects or people. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
This may lead to unexpected
rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the trans-
mission and other compo-
nents
● Avoid spinning the front wheels
and depressing the accelerator
pedal more than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck
even after these procedures are
performed, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
490
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HIGHLANDER_U
491
HIGHLANDER_U
8
8
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle specifications
.
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil
level, etc.).................. 492
Fuel information.......... 503
Tire information........... 505
8-2. Customization
Customizable features
.................................. 515
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ......... 527
492
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8-1.Specifications
*1
:Unladen vehicle
*2
:For 7-seat models
*3
:For 8-seat models
*4
:For GSU75L-ARZGHA models
*6
*5
:Except for GSU75L-ARZGHA models
*6
*6
:The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (P.492)
■ Vehicle identification num-
ber
The vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) is the legal identifier
for your vehicle. This is the pri-
mary identification number for
your Toyota. It is used in regis-
tering the ownership of your
vehicle.
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length 194.9 in. (4950 mm)
Overall width 76 in. (1930 mm)
Overall height
*1
68.1 in. (1730 mm)
Wheelbase 112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tread
Front 65.3 in. (1659 mm)
Rear 65.4 in. (1662 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
1225 lb. (555 kg)
*2
1330 lb. (605 kg)
*3,4
1390 lb. (630 kg)
*3,5
Trailer Weight Rating
(Trailer weight + cargo weight)
5000 lb. (2200 kg)
Seating capacity
Seating capacity
7-seat models 8-seat models
7 (Front 2, Rear 5) 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)
Vehicle identification
493
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
Top left of the instrument
panel
The vehicle identification number is
stamped.
Under the right-hand front
seat
1 Remove the scuff plate.
2 Remove the nut and trim.
3 Turn back the carpet.
4 Remove the dash panel insu-
lator pad.
5 Turn back the floor panel
insulator pad.
The vehicle identification number is
stamped.
6 Return the floor panel insula-
tor pad to its original position.
Insert the 2 ends of the floor panel
insulator pad under the wire har-
494
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
ness.
7 Install the dash panel insula-
tor pad.
8 Return the carpet to its origi-
nal position.
Install the 2 holes of the carpet to
the wire harness clamps.
9 Install the trim.
Align the clip, claw and bolt hole
and install the trim with the nut.
10Install the scuff plate.
Insert the 2 guides at the front of
the scuff plate into the trim, align
the 7 claws with the wire harness
clamps, and install the scuff plate.
Left-hand side center pillar
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
495
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Oil capacity (Drain and
refillreference
*
)
*
: The engine oil capacity is a refer-
ence quantity to be used when
changing the engine oil. Warm up
and turn off the engine, wait more
than 5 minutes, and check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is
used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genu-
ine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
Engine
Model 2GR-FKS
Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement
210.9 cu. in. (3456 cm
3
)
Valve clearance (engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.9 gal. (68 L, 14.9 Imp. gal.)
Lubrication system
With filter
5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp.
qt.)
Without
filter
5.6 qt. (5.3 L, 4.7 Imp.
qt.)
496
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multi-
grade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE
0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained
here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates
the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability.
Oils with a lower value before
the W allow for easier starting
of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the
viscosity characteristic of the
oil when the oil is at high tem-
perature. An oil with a higher
viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if
the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme
load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is
added to some oil containers to
help you select the oil you
should use.
497
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Cooling system
Capacity
Vehicles with Stop & Start system
12.9 qt. (12.2 L, 10.7 Imp. qt.)
Vehicles without Stop & Start system
12.5 qt. (11.8 L, 10.4 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and
non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system (spark plug)
Make DENSO FK20HBR8
Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system (battery)
Open voltage at 68°F (20°C):
12.3 V or higher
(Turn the engine switch off and turn on the
high beam headlights for 30 seconds.)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity
*
8.0 qt. (7.58 L, 6.7 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
498
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal
noise or vibration, or damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity
*
0.41 qt. (0.39 L, 0.35 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX
NOTICE
■ Transfer oil type precaution
Using transfer oil other than the specified oil may cause abnormal noise
or vibration, or damage the transfer of your vehicle.
Rear differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity
*
0.56 qt. (0.53 L, 0.47 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX
NOTICE
■ Differential gear oil type precaution
Using differential gear oil other than the specified oil may cause abnormal
noise or vibration, or damage the differential gear of your vehicle.
499
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
*
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf) while the engine is running.
Type A
Brakes
Pedal clearance
*
3.7 in. (94 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Tire size 235/65R18 106V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are per-
mitted by law)
Add 4 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire side-
wall.
Wheel size 18 8 J, 18 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
500
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
Type B
Type C
Tire size 235/55R20 102V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are per-
mitted by law)
Add 4 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire side-
wall.
Wheel size 20 8 J, 18 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size 235/65R18 106V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are per-
mitted by law)
Add 4 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire side-
wall.
Wheel size 18 8 J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
501
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
Type D
A: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
B: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Tire size 235/55R20 102V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are per-
mitted by law)
Add 4 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire side-
wall.
Wheel size 20 8 J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Light bulbs
Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Front side marker lights 5 B
Front turn signal lights 7444NA 28 A
Rear turn signal lights 21 A
Back-up lights 16 B
License plate lights 5 B
Parking lights 7444NA 8 A
Interior
Door courtesy lights 5 C
Vanity lights 8 C
Rear personal light 8 C
Rear interior light 8 C
502
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
C: Single end bulbs (clear)
503
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability prob-
lems may be caused by the brand of
gasoline you are using. If driveability
problems persist, try changing the
brand of gasoline. If this does not
correct the problem, consult your
Toyota dealer.
■ Recommendation of the use of
gasoline containing detergent
additives
● Toyota recommends the use of
gasoline that contains detergent
additives to avoid the build-up of
engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. con-
tains minimum detergent additives
to clean and/or keep clean intake
systems, per EPA’s lowest addi-
tives concentration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the
use of Top Tier Detergent Gaso-
line. For more information on Top
Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list
of marketers, please go to the offi-
cial website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of
low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
as reformulated gasolines, are avail-
able in some cities. These fuels are
typically acceptable for use, provid-
ing they meet other fuel require-
ments.
Toyota recommends these fuels,
since the formulations allow for
reduced vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the
use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to
15% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gas-
oline that could contain more than
15% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E30 (30% ethanol
[ ]), E50 (50% ethanol [ ]), E85
(85% ethanol [ ]) (which are only
some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle,
be sure that it has an octane rat-
ing no lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing metha-
nol.
■ Non-recommendation of the
use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane
enhancing additive called MMT
(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manga-
nese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use
of gasoline that contains MMT. If
fuel containing MMT is used, your
emission control system may be
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded
gasoline.
Select octane rating 87
(Research Octane Number
91) or higher. Use of
unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knock-
ing. Persistent knocking
can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you
use should meet the specifica-
tions of ASTM D4814 in the
U.S.A.
504
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the instrument cluster may come on.
If this happens, contact your Toyota
dealer for service.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If
improper fuels are used, the
engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause
damage to your vehicle’s
three-way catalytic converters
causing the emission control
system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than
the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel
system damage or vehicle per-
formance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with
an octane number or rating
lower than the level previously
stated will cause persistent
heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine
damage.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It
can damage your vehicle’s paint.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knock-
ing, etc.) is encountered after
using a different type of fuel, dis-
continue the use of that type of
fuel.
505
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (P.507)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P.506)
Location of treadwear indicators (P.411)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
506
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.412)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.499)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tires or all season tires (P.412)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use
only.
Type A
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
:The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
Type B
Typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number
(TIN)
507
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
Manufacturer’s code
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use (P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to
section width)
Tire construction code (R =
Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 dig-
its)
Speed symbol (alphabet with
one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Tire size
Tire section names
508
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
Chafer
This information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regu-
lations issued by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
It provides the purchasers
and/or prospective purchasers
of Toyota vehicles with informa-
tion on uniform tire quality grad-
ing.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to
these grades. Quality grades
can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Trac-
tion AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a com-
parative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from high-
est to lowest, are AA, A, B and
C, and they represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled
conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
braking (straight ahead) traction
tests and does not include corner-
ing (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, repre-
senting the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor labo-
ratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
509
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
Grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades
of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km
under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to
which a tire may be inflated, shown on the
sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pres-
sure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as fac-
tory-installed equipment (whether installed
or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
dard equipment, including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
weight optional engine
510
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occu-
pants specified in the second column of
Table 1
*
that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as
specified in the third column of Table 1
*
below
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3
kg) in excess of the standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diame-
ter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation
for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total
load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150
lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated
seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share
of the maximum loaded vehicle weight,
and dividing by two
Tire related term Meaning
511
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle normal load on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share
of curb weight, accessory weight, and nor-
mal occupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1
*
below), and dividing by
two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by
the inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel
wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords
and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between compo-
nents in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
angles substantially less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and side-
wall rubber which, when inflated, bears the
load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread
or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or
innerliner of the tire extending to cord
material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange
tire and rim system in which the rim is
designed with rim flanges pointed radially
inward and the tire is designed to fit on the
underside of the rim in a manner that
encloses the rim flanges inside the air cav-
ity of the tire
Tire related term Meaning
512
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads
and at higher inflation pressures than the
corresponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating
medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord
material in the carcass
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as
primarily intended for use on lightweight
trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to
carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to
which a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, side-
wall, or innerliner that extends to cord
material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including
elevations due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs
Tire related term Meaning
513
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and
trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between
adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other materi-
als, that, when mounted on an automotive
wheel, provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substan-
tially 90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads
and at higher inflation pressures than the
corresponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors
of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, exclud-
ing elevations due to labeling, decoration,
or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread
and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from
the cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to
or greater than 110, compared to the
ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test
Tire, when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard
Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Trac-
tion in a Straight Line on Snow-and
Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is
marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Tire related term Meaning
514
8-1. Specifications
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: Table 1 -Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for var-
ious designated seating capacities
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing,
and may be any rim listed as appropriate
for use with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into con-
tact with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire car-
cass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual indica-
tion of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Tire related term Meaning
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
515
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
8-2.Customiz ation
■ Changing by using the navi-
gation/multimedia system
1 Press the “MENU” button.
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “General” or “Vehicle”
on the “Setup” screen.
Various setting can be changed.
Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
■ Changing by using the
meter control switches
4.2-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch to select the
desired item to be custom-
ized.
3 Press or press and hold .
The available settings will differ
depending on if is pressed or
pressed and held. Follow the
instructions on the display.
7-inch display
1 Press or of the meter
control switch to select .
2 Press or of the meter
control switch to select the
desired item to be custom-
ized.
3 Press or press and hold .
The available settings will differ
depending on if is pressed or
pressed and held. Follow the
instructions on the display.
■ When customizing using the
navigation/multimedia system
Stop the vehicle in a safe place,
apply the parking brake, and shift
the shift lever to P. Also, to prevent
battery discharge, leave the engine
running while customizing the fea-
tures.
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a vari-
ety of electronic features
that can be personalized to
suit your preferences. The
settings of these features
can be changed using the
multi-information display,
the navigation/multimedia
system, or at your Toyota
dealer.
Customizing vehicle fea-
tures
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be run-
ning during customization, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a
place with adequate ventilation. In
a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful
carbon monoxide (CO) may col-
lect and enter the vehicle. This
may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
516
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further
details.
Settings that can be changed using the navigation/multimedia
system screen
Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.74, 79, 82,
91)
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge,
ensure that the engine is running
while customizing features.
Customizable Features
Function
*1
Default setting Customized setting
Language English
French
O O —
Spanish
Units
*2
miles (MPG)
km (km/L)
O O —
km (L/100 km)
miles (MPG Impe-
rial)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light
On Off — O —
Fuel economy display
*3
Total average
(Average fuel
consumption
[after reset])
Trip average (Aver-
age fuel consump-
tion [after start])
— O —
Tank average
(Average fuel con-
sumption [after
refuel])
517
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
*1
:For details about each function: P.89, 99
*2
:The default setting varies according to country.
*3
:4.2-inch display
*4
:AWD models
*5
:7-inch display
*6
:Selecting this item will only change the gadget.
*7
:Selecting this item will turn the display of the gadget off.
Audio system linked dis-
play
*3
On Off — O —
AWD system display
*3, 4
On Off — O —
Drive information type
*3
After start After reset — O —
Drive information items
(First item)
*3
Distance
Average vehicle
speed
— O —
Elapsed time
Drive information items
(Second item)
*3
Elapsed time
Average vehicle
speed
— O —
Distance
Speedometer display
*5
On Off — O —
Gadget content
*5
Off
Average vehicle
speed
— O —
Distance
Elapsed time
Fuel economy type
*5
Trip (after
start)
*6
Total (after reset)
— O —
Tank (after refuel)
*7
Pop-up display On Off — O —
Rear seat reminder
function
On Off — O —
Suggestion function On
On (when the vehi-
cle is stopped)
O — O
Off
Function
*1
Default setting Customized setting
518
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Head-up Display
*
(P.101)
*
: If equipped
■ Door lock (P.115, 481)
Function Default setting Customized setting
Head-up display On Off — O —
Gauge information Tachometer
Eco Driving Indica-
tor
— O —
No content
Route guidance to desti-
nation/street name
On Off — O —
Driving support system
display
On Off — O —
Compass On Off — O —
Audio system operation
status
On Off — O —
Function Default setting Customized setting
Unlocking using a
mechanical key
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two step
All doors unlocked
in one step
— — O
Automatic door locking
function
Shift position
linked door
locking opera-
tion
Off
O — O
Speed linked door
locking operation
Automatic door unlock-
ing function
Shift position
linked door
unlocking
operation
Off
O — O
Driver’s door linked
door unlocking
operation
519
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Smart key system and wireless remote control (P.115, 131)
■ Smart key system (P.115, 131)
*
: This setting can be changed when the smart door unlocking setting is set
to driver’s door.
Function Default setting Customized setting
Operation buzzer vol-
ume
5
Off
O — O
1 to 7
Operation signal (emer-
gency flashers)
On Off O — O
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
Off
O — O
30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door reminder
buzzer (when locking
the vehicle)
On Off — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Smart key system On Off — — O
Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O — O
Number of consecutive
door lock operations
2 times
As many as
desired
— — O
Time elapsed before
unlocking all the door
when gripping and hold-
ing the driver’s door
handle
*
2 seconds
Off
— — O
1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
520
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Wireless remote control (P.113, 115, 119)
■ Power back door
*1
(P.119)
Function Default setting Customized setting
Wireless remote control On Off — — O
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two step
All doors unlocked
in one step
O — O
Theft deterrent panic
mode
On Off — — O
Locking operation when
door opened
On Off O — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Power back door On Off — O —
Kick sensor
*1
On Off — O —
Power back door open-
ing position
5
1 to 4
— O —
User setting
*2
Buzzer volume Level 3
Level 1
— O —
Level 2
Opening/closing of the
back door using the
power back door switch
on the instrument panel
Press and hold One short press — — O
Opening/closing of the
power back door using
the switch of the
wireless remote control
Press and hold
One short press
— — O
Push twice
Off
521
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
*1
:If equipped
*2
:The open position is set by the power back door switch. (P.88, 98)
*3
:The operation buzzer that sounds when the back door begins to operate
cannot be turned off.
■ Driving position memory
*
(P.144)
*
: If equipped
■ Power windows and moon roof
*
(P.164, 167)
*
: If equipped
Operation buzzer while
the back door is operat-
ing
*3
Off On — — O
Power back door open
operation when the back
door opener switch is
pressed
On Off — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Selecting doors linked to
the memory recall func-
tion
Driver’s door All doors — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Mechanical key linked
operation
Off On — — O
Wireless remote control
linked operation
Off On (open only) — — O
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)
On Off — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
522
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Moon roof
*
(P.167)
*
: If equipped
■ Automatic light control system (P.214)
■ Lights (P.214)
*1
:Except for Canada
*2
:If equipped
Function Default setting Customized setting
Linked operation of com-
ponents when mechani-
cal key is used (open
only)
Slide only Tilt only — — O
Linked operation of com-
ponents when wireless
remote control is used
Slide only Tilt only — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O — O
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
30 seconds
Off
O — O60 seconds
90 seconds
Windshield wiper linked
headlight illumination
On Off — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Daytime running lights On
Off
*1
O — O
Welcome lighting On Off — — O
AFS (Adaptive
Front-lighting System)
*2
On Off — — O
523
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Rear window wiper (P.223)
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (P.233)
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (P.241)
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
(P.251)
Function Default setting Customized setting
Back door opening
linked rear window wiper
stop function
Off On — — O
Washer linked rear win-
dow wiper operation
On Off — — O
Shift position linked rear
window wiper operation
(P.224)
Only once
Off
— — O
Continuous
Function Default setting Customized setting
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)
On Off — O —
Adjust alert timing Middle
Early
— O —
Late
Function Default setting Customized setting
Lane centering function On Off — O —
Steering assist function On Off — O —
Alert sensitivity High Standard — O —
Vehicle sway warning
function
On Off — O —
Vehicle sway warning
sensitivity
Standard
High
— O —
Low
Function Default setting Customized setting
RSA (Road Sign Assist) On Off — O —
Excess speed notifica-
tion method
Display only
No notification
— O —
Display and buzzer
524
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
■ Stop & Start system
*
(P.264)
*
: If equipped
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
*
(P.270)
*
: If equipped
■ Intuitive parking assist
*
(P.276)
*
: If equipped
Excess speed notifica-
tion level
1 mph (2 km/h)
3 mph (5 km/h)
— O —
5 mph (10 km/h)
Other notifications
method (no-entry notifi-
cation)
Display only
No notification
— O —
Display and buzzer
Function Default setting Customized setting
Change the Stop & Start
system duration when
the A/C is on
Standard Extended — O —
Function Default setting Customized setting
BSM (Blind Spot Moni-
tor)
On Off — O —
Outside rear view mirror
indicator brightness
Bright Dim — O —
Alert timing for pres-
ence of approaching
vehicle (sensitivity)
Intermediate
Early
— O —
Late
Only when vehicle
detected in blind
spot
Function Default setting Customized setting
Intuitive parking assist On Off — O —
Buzzer volume Level 2
Level 1
— O —
Level 3
Function Default setting Customized setting
525
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
■ RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function
*
(P.284)
*
: If equipped
■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
*
(P.289)
*
: If equipped
■ Front automatic air conditioning system
*
(P.333)
*
: If equipped
■ Illumination (P.355)
Function Default setting Customized setting
RCTA (Rear cross traf-
fic alert) function
On Off — O —
Buzzer volume Level 2
Level 1
— O —
Level 3
Function Default setting Customized setting
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) function
On Off — O —
Function Default setting Customized setting
A/C auto switch opera-
tion
On Off O — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
Time elapsed before the
interior lights turn off
15 seconds
Off
O — O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
off
On Off — — O
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On Off — — O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle
with the electronic key
on your person
On Off — — O
526
8-2. Customization
HIGHLANDER_U
*
: If equipped
■ Vehicle customization
● When the smart key system is off,
smart door unlocking cannot be
customized.
● When the doors remain closed
after unlocking the doors and the
timer activated automatic door
lock function activates, signals will
be generated in accordance with
the operation buzzer volume and
operational signal (emergency
flashers) function settings.
Instrument panel orna-
ment light
*
and door trim
ornament lights
*
On Off — — O
Time elapsed before the
outer foot lights
*
turn off
15 seconds
Off
O — O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation of the outer
foot lights
*
when you
approach the vehicle
with the electronic key
on your person
On Off — — O
Operation of the outer
foot lights
*
when the
doors are unlocked with
the power door lock
switch
On Off — — O
Function Default setting Customized setting
527
8-3. Initialization
HIGHLANDER_U
8
Vehicle specifications
8-3.Initialization
*
: If equipped
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system
operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected,
or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
List of items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Power back door
*
• After reconnecting or changing
the battery
P.1 26
Intuitive parking
assist
*
• After reconnecting or changing
the battery
P.2 79
PKSB (Parking
Support Brake)
*
• After reconnecting or changing
the battery
P.2 95
Message indicat-
ing maintenance is
required (U.S.A.
only)
• After the maintenance is per-
formed
P.3 95
Oil maintenance
• After the maintenance is per-
formed
P.4 06
Tire pressure warn-
ing system
• When the tire inflation pressure
is changed such as when
changing traveling speed
• When the tire inflation pressure
is changed such as when the
tire size is changed
• When rotating the tires
P.4 17
528
8-3. Initialization
HIGHLANDER_U
529
HIGHLANDER_U
9
9
For owners
For owners
.
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners............... 530
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 530
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 532
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners (in
French)...................... 539
530
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
9-1.For owners
Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu'elle passe
bien sur l'épaule, sans pour
autant être en contact avec le
cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le
dos droit et calez-vous bien
dans le siège.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
Reporting safety
defects for U.S. own-
ers
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should
immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notify-
ing Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in
individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota
Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or
write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Ave, S.E., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French
explanation of seat belt
instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this
manual.
See the seat belt section for
more detailed seat belt
instructions in English.
Utilisation correcte des
ceintures de sécurité
531
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
9
For owners
sécurité.
■ Traitement des ceintures de
sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une
éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau
savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez
régulièrement que les ceintures
ne sont pas usées, effilochées
ou entaillées excessivement.
Entretien et soin
WARNING
■ Détérioration et usure des
ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez le système de ceintures
de sécurité régulièrement. Con-
trôlez l'absence de coupures,
d'effilochages et de pièces
desserrées. N'utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée
avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée.
Une ceinture de sécurité endom-
magée ne permet pas de protéger
un occupant de blessures graves
ou mortelles.
532
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS
Coussin gonflable conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager
avant SRS
Participe à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du pas-
sager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de l'habitacle
Coussin gonflable de genoux SRS
Participe à la protection du conducteur
Coussin gonflable de coussin de siège SRS
Contribue à retenir le passager avant
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instruc-
tions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-
tions in English.
Système de coussins gonflables SRS
533
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
9
For owners
Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS
Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège avant
Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants des
sièges latéraux
• Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en
cas de tonneau
■ Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Coussin gonflable passager avant
Témoins indicateurs “PASS AIR BAG ON” et “PASS AIR BAG
OFF”
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
Coussins gonflables rideaux
Capteurs d'impact latéral (arrière)
Témoin d'avertissement SRS
Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant
(ECU et capteurs)
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Capteurs d'impact latéral (porte avant)
Prétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité et limiteurs de force
Coussin gonflable de coussin de siège
Capteur de position du siège conducteur
534
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
Coussin gonflable de genoux du conducteur
Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur
Capteurs d'impact avant
Ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLI-
GENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applica-
bles aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs
de coussins gonflables (ECU) régule le déploiement des coussins
gonflables sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs,
etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du
système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occu-
pation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des
coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique
dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif per-
mettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
WARNING
■ Précautions relatives aux
coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suiva-
ntes concernant les coussins gon-
flables SRS.
Le non-respect de ces précau-
tions peut occasionner des bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les pas-
sagers du véhicule doivent por-
ter correctement leur ceinture
de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS
sont des dispositifs supplémen-
taires à utiliser avec les cein-
tures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable conduc-
teur SRS se déploie avec une
force considérable, pouvant
occasionner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles, si le
conducteur se trouve très près
du coussin gonflable. L'autorité
fédérale chargée de la sécurité
routière aux États-Unis
(NHTSA) conseille:
La zone à risque du coussin
gonflable conducteur se situant
dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à
75 mm) de déploiement, vous
placer à 10 in. (250 mm) de
votre coussin gonflable conduc-
teur vous garantit une marge de
sécurité suffisante. Cette dis-
tance est à mesurer entre le
centre du volant et le sternum.
Si vous êtes assis à moins de
10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez
changer votre position de con-
duite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus pos-
sible, de manière à pouvoir
encore atteindre confortable-
ment les pédales.
535
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
9
For owners
WARNING
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier
du siège.
Bien que les véhicules aient une
conception différente, un grand
nombre de conducteurs peu-
vent s'asseoir à une distance de
10 in. (250 mm), même avec le
siège conducteur complètement
avancé, simplement en inclinant
un peu le dossier de siège. Si
vous avez des difficultés à voir
la route après avoir incliné le
dossier de votre siège, utilisez
un coussin ferme et antidéra-
pant pour vous rehausser ou
remontez le siège si votre
véhicule est équipé de cette
fonction.
• Si votre volant est réglable,
inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a
pour effet d'orienter le coussin
gonflable en direction de votre
poitrine plutôt que de votre tête
et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon les
recommandations de la NHTSA
ci-dessus, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales, du volant et
la vue des commandes du tab-
leau de bord.
● Si vous attachez une rallonge
de ceinture de sécurité aux bou-
cles de ceinture de sécurité
avant, sans l'attacher au pêne
de la ceinture de sécurité, les
coussins gonflables frontaux
SRS déterminent que le con-
ducteur et le passager avant ont
attaché leur ceinture de sécu-
rité, bien que la ceinture de
sécurité ne soit pas attachée.
Dans ce cas, les coussins gon-
flables frontaux SRS peuvent
ne pas se déployer correcte-
ment en cas de collision, pou-
vant occasionner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles. Veillez
à porter la ceinture de sécurité
avec la rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable passager
avant SRS se déploie égale-
ment avec une force con-
sidérable, pouvant occasionner
des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si le passager avant
se trouve très près du coussin
gonflable. Le siège du passager
avant doit être éloigné le plus
possible du coussin gonflable
en réglant le dossier de siège
de façon à ce que le passager
avant soit assis bien droit dans
le siège.
536
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
● Les nourrissons et les enfants
qui ne sont pas correctement
assis et/ou attachés peuvent
être grièvement blessés ou tués
par le déploiement d'un coussin
gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un
enfant trop petit pour utiliser une
ceinture de sécurité doit être
correctement attaché au moyen
d'un siège de sécurité enfant.
Toyota recommande vivement
d'installer tous les nourrissons
et enfants sur les sièges arrière
du véhicule et de prévoir pour
eux des systèmes de retenue
adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont
plus sûrs pour les nourrissons
et les enfants que le siège du
passager avant.
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le
bord du siège et ne vous
appuyez pas contre la planche
de bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester
debout devant le coussin gon-
flable passager avant SRS ou
s'asseoir sur les genoux du pas-
sager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants
des sièges avant voyager avec
un objet sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la
porte, le rail latéral de toit ou les
montants avant, latéraux et
arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s'age-
nouiller sur le siège passager
en appui contre la porte ou sor-
tir la tête ou les mains à
l'extérieur du véhicule.
● Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien
sur des emplacements tels que
la planche de bord, la garniture
du volant et la partie inférieure
du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments peuvent se trans-
former en projectiles lorsque les
coussins gonflables conducteur,
passager avant et genoux SRS
se déploient.
537
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
9
For owners
WARNING
● Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la
vitre du pare-brise, aux vitres
latérales, aux montants avant et
arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à
la poignée de maintien.
● Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou
objet dur aux crochets à vête-
ments. Tous ces objets pour-
raient se transformer en
projectiles et causer des bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles en
cas de déploiement des couss-
ins gonflables rideaux SRS.
● Si un cache en vinyle est placé
sur la zone où le coussin gon-
flable de genoux SRS se
déploie, assurez-vous de le
retirer.
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de
siège recouvrant les zones de
déploiement des coussins gon-
flables latéraux SRS et du cous-
sin gonflable de coussin de
siège SRS, car il risque de
gêner le déploiement des cous-
sins gonflables SRS. De tels
accessoires peuvent empêcher
les coussins gonflables latéraux
et le coussin gonflable de cous-
sin de siège de s'activer cor-
rectement, désactiver le
système ou entraîner le déploie-
ment accidentel des coussins
gonflables latéraux et du cous-
sin gonflable de coussin de
siège, occasionnant des bless-
ures graves, voire mortelles.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs
ou des pressions excessives
aux parties renfermant les com-
posants de coussins gonflables
SRS ou aux portes avant. En
effet, cela pourrait entraîner un
dysfonctionnement des couss-
ins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant
immédiatement après le
déploiement (gonflage) des
coussins gonflables SRS, car ils
peuvent être chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à
respirer après le déploiement
des coussins gonflables SRS,
ouvrez une porte ou une vitre
pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si
cela ne présente pas de danger.
Essuyez tout résidu dès que
possible afin d'éviter d'éventu-
elles irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les
coussins gonflables SRS,
comme les garnitures du volant
et des montants avant et
arrière, sont endommagées ou
craquelées, faites-les remplacer
par votre concessionnaire Toy-
ota.
● Ne placez rien sur le siège du
passager avant, comme un
coussin par exemple. Cela a
pour conséquence de répartir le
poids du passager sur toute la
surface du siège, ce qui
empêche le capteur de détecter
correctement le poids du pas-
sager. En conséquence, les
coussins gonflables frontaux
SRS du passager avant ris-
quent de ne pas se déployer en
cas de collision.
538
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
WARNING
■ Modification et mise au rebut
des composants du système
de coussins gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au
rebut et ne procédez à aucune
des modifications suivantes sans
consulter votre concessionnaire
Toyota. Les coussins gonflables
SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner
correctement ou se déployer (se
gonfler) accidentellement, provo-
quant la mort ou de graves bless-
ures.
● Installation, dépose, démon-
tage et réparation des coussins
gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications,
démontage ou remplacement
du volant, du tableau de bord,
de la planche de bord, des
sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et
arrière, des rails latéraux de toit,
des panneaux de porte avant,
des garnitures de porte avant
ou des haut-parleurs de porte
avant
● Modifications du panneau de
porte avant (par exemple,
perçage d'un trou dans le pan-
neau)
● Réparations ou modifications
des ailes avant, du pare-chocs
avant ou des flancs de l'habita-
cle
● Installation d'un protège-calan-
dre (pare-buffle, pare-kangou-
rou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de
treuils ou d'un porte-bagages de
toit
● Modifications du système de
suspension du véhicule
● Installation d'appareils électro-
niques tels que les émet-
teurs/récepteurs radios mobiles
et les lecteurs CD
● Modifications de votre véhicule
pour une personne atteinte d'un
handicap physique
539
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
9
For owners
Boulon de réglage A
Boulon de réglage B
Vérifiez que le réservoir de
carburant du véhicule est
plein et que la zone autour
des phares n'est pas
déformée.
Stationnez le véhicule sur une
surface plane.
Assurez-vous que la pression
de gonflage des pneus est au
niveau recommandé.
Faites asseoir quelqu'un dans
le siège conducteur.
Balancez le véhicule plu-
sieurs fois.
1 À l'aide d'un tournevis cruci-
forme, tournez le boulon A
dans n'importe quel sens.
Mémorisez le sens dans lequel
vous avez tourné et le nombre de
tours.
2 Tournez le boulon B du
même nombre de tours dans
le même sens qu'à l'étape 1.
Si vous n'arrivez pas à régler le
phare en procédant de la sorte,
confiez le véhicule à votre conces-
sionnaire Toyota pour qu'il règle le
faisceau des phares.
Headlight aim instruc-
tions for Canadian
owners (in French)
The following is a French
explanation of headlight aim
instructions from the head-
light aim section in this
manual.
Boulons de réglage du
mouvement vertical
Avant de vérifier le
réglage des phares
Réglage du faisceau des
phares
540
9-1. For owners
HIGHLANDER_U
542
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HIGHLANDER_U
1-1.What to d o if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you lose your mechanical
keys, new genuine mechani-
cal keys can be made by your
Toyota dealer. (P.479)
If you lose your electronic
keys, the risk of vehicle theft
increases significantly. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer imme-
diately. (P.479)
Is the electronic key battery
weak or depleted? (P.428)
Is the engine switch in ON?
When locking the doors, turn the
engine switch off. (P.201)
Is the electronic key left inside
the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure
that you have the electronic key on
your person.
The function may not operate
properly due to the condition
of the radio wave. (P.132)
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set. Open the rear door from
outside and then unlock the
child-protector lock. (P.11 8)
Did you press the engine
switch while firmly depress-
ing the brake pedal?
(P.200)
Is the shift lever in P?
(P.200)
Is the electronic key any-
where detectable inside the
vehicle? (P.131)
Is the steering wheel
unlocked? (P.200)
Is the electronic key battery
weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be
started in a temporary way.
(P.482)
Is the battery discharged?
(P.483)
If you have a problem,
check the following before
contacting your Toyota
dealer.
The doors cannot be
locked, unlocked, opened
or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be
locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be
opened
If you think something is
wrong
The engine does not start
543
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HIGHLANDER_U
Is the engine switch in ON?
If you cannot release the shift lever
by depressing the brake pedal with
the engine switch in ON (P.206)
It is locked automatically to
prevent theft of the vehicle.
(P.200)
Is the window lock switch
pressed?
The power window except for the
one at the driver’s seat cannot be
operated if the window lock switch
is pressed. (P.166)
The auto power off function
will be operated if the vehicle
is left in ACC or ON (the
engine is not running) for a
period of time. (P.203)
The seat belt reminder light is
flashing
Are the driver and the passengers
wearing the seat belts? (P.453)
The parking brake indicator is
on
Is the parking brake released?
(P.209)
Depending on the situation,
other types of warning buzzer
may also sound. (P.450, 460)
Did anyone inside the vehicle
open a door during setting the
alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm
sounds. (P. 71 )
Do one of the following to stop
the alarms:
Unlock the doors.
Turn the engine switch to
ACC or ON, or start the
engine.
Is the message displayed on
the multi-information display?
Check the message on the
multi-information display. (P.460)
When a warning light turns on
The shift lever cannot be
shifted from P even if you
depress the brake pedal
The steering wheel can-
not be turned after the
engine is stopped
The windows do not open
or close by operating the
power window switches
The engine switch is
turned off automatically
A warning buzzer sounds
during driving
An alarm is activated and
the horn sounds (vehicles
with an alarm)
A warning buzzer sounds
when leaving the vehicle
A warning light turns on
or a warning message is
displayed
544
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HIGHLANDER_U
or a warning message is dis-
played, refer to P.450, 460.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and replace the flat tire
with the spare tire. (P.464)
Try the procedure for when
the vehicle becomes stuck in
mud, dirt, or snow. (P.489)
When a problem has
occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes
stuck
545
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C...................................328, 333
Air conditioning filter.............426
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem.....................................333
Eco air conditioning mode....340
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW).................342
Manual air conditioning system
...........................................328
Rear automatic air conditioning
system................................348
Rear manual air conditioning
system................................346
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
...............................................313
Warning light ........................452
ACA (Active Cornering Assist)
...............................................313
Active Cornering Assist (ACA)
...............................................313
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS)......................................216
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) .................................216
AHB (Automatic High Beam).217
Air conditioning filter.............426
Air conditioning system 328, 333
Air conditioning filter.............426
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem.....................................333
Eco air conditioning mode....340
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW).................342
Manual air conditioning system
...........................................328
Rear automatic air conditioning
system................................348
Rearmanual air conditioning sys-
tem.....................................346
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions....34
Airbag precautions for your child
.............................................37
Correct driving posture...........23
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions.............................35
Curtain shield airbag precautions
.............................................37
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system...................41
General airbag precautions....37
Locations of airbags ...............32
Modification and disposal of air-
bags......................................40
Side airbag operating conditions
.............................................35
Side airbag precautions..........37
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions.............35
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions...........................37
SRS airbags ...........................32
SRS warning light.................451
Alarm .........................................71
Warning buzzer ....................450
Anchor brackets.................50, 60
Antennas (smart key system)131
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
...............................................313
Warning light.........................452
Approach warning..................261
Armrest....................................375
Assist grips.............................375
Audio system-linked display.86,
95
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem.........................................333
Eco air conditioning mode....340
Automatic headlight leveling
system...................................215
Automatic High Beam............217
546
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Automatic light control system
...............................................215
Automatic transmission ........204
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................206
M mode................................206
Auxiliary boxes...............361, 366
Average fuel economy.......84, 92
Average vehicle speed.......86, 95
AWD Control.......................87, 95
B
Back door................................119
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs............432
Battery
Battery checking...................408
If the battery is discharged...483
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................319
Replacing.............................485
Warning light ........................451
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)......270
Brake
Brake hold............................212
Fluid .............................408, 499
Parking brake.......................209
Warning light ........................450
Brake assist............................313
Break-in tips ...........................178
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control.81
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)......270
Buzzer
Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing (LTA).............................249
C
Care
Exterior.................................388
Interior..................................391
Seat belts .............................391
Wheels and wheel ornaments
...........................................388
Cargo capacity........................187
Cargo net hooks.....................363
Chains......................................320
Child restraint system
Fixed with a LATCH system ...58
Fixed with a seat belt..............53
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system...................41
Points to remember................48
Riding with children ................47
Types of child restraint system
installation method ...............50
Using an anchor bracket ........60
Child safety
Airbag precautions .................37
Back door precautions..........119
Battery precautions ......409, 486
Child restraint system.............50
Heated steering wheel and seat
heater precautions..............352
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................26
Moon roof precautions..........168
Panoramic moon roof precau-
tions....................................172
Power window lock switch....166
Power window precautions...165
Rear door child-protectors....118
Removed electronic key battery
precautions.........................429
Seat belt extender precautions
.............................................27
Seat belt precautions..............47
Child-protectors......................118
Cleaning
Exterior.................................388
Interior ..................................391
Radar sensor........................228
Seat belts .............................391
547
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Wheels and wheel ornaments
...........................................388
Clock ...................................79, 82
Coat hooks..............................376
Condenser ..............................408
Console box............................359
Consumption screen..............106
Conversation mirror...............378
Cooling system ......................407
Engine overheating..............487
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........254
Cup holders ............................360
Current fuel consumption .84, 92
Curtain shield airbags .............32
Customizable features...........515
D
Daytime running light system214
Replacing light bulbs............432
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors...329,
335, 339
Rear window ........329, 335, 339
Windshield............329, 335, 338
Differential
Rear differential oil...............498
Digital Rearview Mirror..........152
Dimension...............................492
Dinghy towing ........................199
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........254
Head-up display...................101
Intuitive parking assist..........276
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....246
Multi-information display ..82, 91
RCTA....................................284
Toyota Multi-operation touch 326
Warning message ................460
Distance until next engine oil
change.....................................81
Do-it-yourself maintenance...395
Door courtesy lights...............355
Door lock
Back door.............................119
Side doors ............................115
Smart key system.................131
Wireless remote control........113
Doors
Automatic door locking and
unlocking system................118
Back door.............................119
Door glasses ........................164
Door lock ..............................119
Open door warning buzzer.116,
118
Outside rear view mirrors .....162
Rear door child-protectors....118
Downhill assist control system
...............................................311
Drive distance.....................86, 95
Drive information................86, 95
Driver’s seat position memory
Driving position memory.......144
Memory recall function .........145
Drive-start control ..................178
Driving
Break-in tips .........................178
Correct driving posture...........23
Driving mode select switch...306
Procedures...........................177
Winter drive tips....................319
Driving information display83, 92
Driving mode select switch...306
Driving position memory.......144
Memory recall function .........145
Driving range ................84, 92, 93
Driving support system informa-
tion display........................85, 95
548
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ...........254
Warning message ................263
Dynamic Torque Control AWD
system...................................314
Dynamic Torque Vectoring AWD
system...................................314
E
Eco drive mode ......................306
Eco Driving Indicator.84, 93, 104
Eco Driving Indicator Light84, 93
EDR (Event data recorder).........7
Elapsed time.......................86, 95
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
...............................................313
Warning light ........................452
Electronic key.........................112
Battery-saving function.........132
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.................481
Replacing the battery...........428
Electronic roof sunshade
Jam protection function........171
Operation .............................170
Emergency flashers...............442
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds..450
If a warning light turns on.....450
If a warning message is dis-
played.................................460
If the battery is discharged...483
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.................481
If the engine will not start .....478
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened...............................480
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water ..................................443
If you have a flat tire.............464
If you lose your keys ............479
If you think something is wrong
...........................................448
If your vehicle becomes stuck
...........................................489
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................442
If your vehicle needs to be towed
...........................................445
If your vehicle overheats ......487
Engine
ACCESSORY mode.............203
Compartment........................404
Engine switch .......................200
Fuel pump shut off system ...449
Hood.....................................402
How to start the engine ........200
Identification number............494
If the engine will not start......478
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................442
Ignition switch (engine switch)
...........................................200
Overheating..........................487
Tachometer.............................79
Engine coolant
Capacity ...............................497
Checking ..............................407
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................319
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................79
Engine immobilizer system.....69
Engine oil
Capacity ...............................495
Checking ..............................404
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................319
Warning light.........................451
Engine oil maintenance data.406
Engine switch .........................200
Auto power off function.........203
549
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Changing the engine switch
modes ................................203
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................442
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
...............................................313
Warning light ........................452
Event data recorder (EDR).........7
F
Flat tire
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................414
Vehicles with a spare tire .....464
Floor mats.................................22
Fluid
Automatic transmission........497
Brake....................................499
Washer.................................410
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs............432
Switch...................................220
Footwell light..........................355
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system....................41
Front seats
Adjustment...........................138
Cleaning...............................391
Correct driving posture...........23
Driving position memory.......144
Head restraints.....................147
Memory recall function.........145
Seat heaters.........................352
Seat position memory ..........144
Seat ventilators ....................352
Front side marker light
Light switch ..........................214
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs............432
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............432
Turn signal lever...................208
Fuel
Capacity ...............................495
Fuel gauge .............................79
Fuel pump shut off system ...449
Information ...........................503
Refueling ..............................225
Type......................................495
Warning light.........................453
Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy......84, 92
Current fuel consumption .84, 92
Fuel economy .....................84, 92
Fuel filler door
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ...............................480
Refueling ..............................225
Fuel gauge.................................79
Fuel pump shut off system....449
Fuses.......................................429
G
Garage door opener...............379
Gauges ......................................79
Glove box................................359
Glove box light........................359
H
Head restraints .......................147
Headlight aim..........................431
Headlights
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS)..................................216
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................217
Light switch...........................214
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Head-up display......................101
Driving information display area
...........................................101
Eco Driving Indicator ............104
550
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Navigation system-linked display
...........................................104
Settings................................102
Heated steering wheel ...........352
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning sys-
tem.....................................333
Heated steering wheel .........352
Manual air conditioning system
...........................................328
Outside rear view mirrors...329,
335, 339
Rear automatic air conditioning
system................................348
Rear manual air conditioning
system................................346
Seat heaters.........................352
High mounted stoplight
Replacing light bulbs............432
Hill-start assist control ..........313
Hood
Open ....................................402
Hooks
Cargo net hooks...................363
Coat hooks...........................376
Retaining hooks (floor mat)....22
Horn.........................................150
I
I/M test.....................................398
Identification
Engine..................................494
Vehicle..................................492
Ignition switch (engine switch)
...............................................200
Auto power off function ........203
Changing the engine switch
modes ................................203
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.................442
Indicators..................................76
Initialization
Items to initialize...................527
Maintenance.................395, 406
Power windows ....................164
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................417
Inside rear view mirror...151, 152
Instrument panel light control.81
Interior lights...........................355
Front interior light .................355
Rear interior light..................355
Intuitive parking assist
Function................................276
Warning message.................279
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack .........403
Vehicle-equipped jack ..........465
Jack handle.............................465
Jam protection function
Electronic roof sunshade......171
Moon roof.............................167
Panoramic moon roof...........171
Power back door ..................125
Power windows ....................164
K
Keyless entry
Smart key system.................131
Wireless remote control........113
Keys
Battery-saving function.........132
Electronic key.......................112
Engine switch .......................200
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.................481
If you lose your keys.............479
Key number plate .................112
Keyless entry........115, 121, 131
Mechanical key.....................112
551
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Replacing the battery...........428
Warning buzzer....................131
Wireless remote control .......113
Knee airbags.............................32
L
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)
Operation .............................241
Warning messages...............250
Language (multi-information dis-
play)...................................87, 96
LATCH anchors ........................58
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .............402
Hood lock release lever........402
Shift lever.............................204
Turn signal lever...................208
Wiper lever...................220, 223
License plate lights
Light switch ..........................214
Replacing light bulbs............432
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................432
Lights
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................217
Fog light switch ....................220
Front interior lights ...............356
Front personal lights.............356
Headlight switch...................214
Interior lights.........................355
Interior lights list ...................355
Rear interior lights................356
Rear personal lights.............356
Replacing light bulbs............432
Turn signal lever...................208
Vanity lights..........................377
Welcome light illumination con-
trol......................................215
Lock steering column............200
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Operation .............................241
Warning messages...............250
Luggage cover........................363
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ..400
General maintenance...........396
Maintenance data.................492
Maintenance requirements...394
Malfunction indicator lamp....451
Manual air conditioning system
...............................................328
Menu icons..........................82, 91
Meter
Clock ................................79, 82
Indicators................................76
Instrument panel light control.81
Meter control switches......83, 92
Meters ....................................79
Multi-information display...82, 91
Settings ............................87, 96
Warning lights.......................450
Warning message.................460
Mirrors
Digital Rearview Mirror.........152
Inside rear view mirror..........151
Outside rear view mirror defog-
gers ....................329, 335, 339
Outside rear view mirrors .....162
Vanity mirrors........................377
Moon roof
Door lock linked moon roof oper-
ation....................................167
Jam protection function ........167
Operation..............................167
Mud & Sand mode..................307
Multi Weather Lights
Switch...................................220
Multi-information display...82, 91
Audio system-linked display.86,
95
AWD Control.....................87, 95
552
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Driving information display83, 92
Driving support system...........96
Driving support system informa-
tion display.....................85, 95
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........254
Eco Driving Indicator........84, 93
Fuel economy...................84, 92
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....246
Menu icons.......................82, 91
Meter control switches .....83, 92
Navigation system-linked display
.......................................85, 95
Pop-up display .................82, 91
Settings............................87, 96
Suggestion function........91, 100
Tire pressure............86, 95, 414
Vehicle information display86, 95
Warning message ..90, 100, 460
Multi-terrain Select.................307
N
Navigation system-linked display
...................................85, 95, 104
Noise from under vehicle ..........5
Normal mode ..................306, 308
O
“ODO TRIP” switch..................81
Odometer ..................................81
Odometer and trip meter display
Display items..........................81
“ODO TRIP” switch ................81
Pop-up display .......................81
Oil
Engine oil .............................495
Rear differential oil...............498
Opener
Back door.............................121
Fuel filler door ......................225
Hood.....................................402
Outer foot lights
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment ...........................162
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)....270
Linked mirror function when
reversing.............................162
Mirror position memory.........144
Outside rear view mirror defog-
gers ....................329, 335, 339
RCTA function.......................284
Outside temperature ................79
Overheating.............................487
P
Panic mode .............................114
Panoramic moon roof
Jam protection function ........171
Operation..............................170
Parking assist sensors (intuitive
parking assist)......................276
Parking brake
Operation..............................209
Parking brake engaged warning
buzzer.................................211
Warning light.........................457
Warning message.................211
Parking lights
Light switch...........................214
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Parking Support Brake function
(for rear-crossing vehicles).302
Function................................302
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)......................296
Function................................296
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Function................................233
PCS OFF switch...................235
Warning light.........................456
Personal lights........................355
553
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...............................................289
Warning message ................294
Power outlets..........................376
Power steering (Electric power
steering system)...................313
Warning light ........................452
Power windows
Door lock linked window opera-
tion .....................................165
Jam protection function........164
Operation .............................164
Window lock switch..............166
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Function ...............................233
PCS OFF switch...................235
Warning light ........................456
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range) ..................254
Radiator...................................408
RCTA
Function ...............................284
Warning message ................285
RCTA function.........................286
Rear automatic air conditioning
system...................................348
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
...............................................284
Rear door sunshades ............378
Rear fog lights
Switch...................................220
Rear manual air conditioning
system...................................346
Rear seats...............................139
Head restraints.....................147
Seat heaters.........................352
Rear side marker lights
Light switch ..........................214
Replacing light bulbs............432
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Turn signal lever...................208
Rear view mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror.........152
Inside rear view mirror..........151
Outside rear view mirrors .....162
Rear window defogger..329, 335,
339
Refueling
Capacity ...............................495
Fuel types.............................495
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ...............................480
Opening the fuel tank cap ....225
Replacing
Electronic key battery...........428
Fuses....................................429
Light bulbs............................432
Tires......................................464
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners...................................530
Resetting the message indicat-
ing maintenance is required395
Road Sign Assist....................251
Rock & Dirt mode ...................307
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .........251
S
Safety Connect .........................63
Seat belt reminder light..........453
Seat belts...................................25
Automatic Locking Retractor..26
Child restraint system installation
.............................................50
Cleaning and maintaining the
seat belt..............................391
Emergency Locking Retractor26
How to wear your seat belt.....26
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................26
554
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use.................................25
Reminder light and buzzer ...453
Seat belt extender..................26
Seat belt pretensioners..........30
SRS warning light.................451
Seat heaters............................352
Seat position memory............144
Seat ventilators ......................352
Seating capacity.....................187
Seats
Adjustment...........................138
Adjustment precautions........138
Child seats/child restraint system
installation............................48
Cleaning...............................391
Driving position memory.......144
Head restraints.....................147
Properly sitting in the seat......23
Seat heaters.........................352
Seat position memory ..........144
Seat ventilators ....................352
Sensor
Automatic headlight system.215
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................217
Digital Rearview Mirror.........156
Inside rear view mirror..........152
Intuitive parking assist..........276
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....241
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)......302
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)....................297
Radar sensor................227, 272
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
...........................................222
RCTA....................................285
Service reminder message....395
Shift lever
Automatic transmission........204
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................206
Shift lever light........................355
Shift lock system....................205
Shopping bag hooks..............363
Side airbags..............................32
Side doors
Door lock ..............................115
Side marker lights
Light switch...........................214
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Side mirrors
Adjustment ...........................162
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)....270
Heaters.................329, 335, 339
Linked mirror function when
reversing.............................162
Mirror position memory.........144
RCTA function.......................284
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Turn signal lever...................208
Side windows..........................164
Smart key system
Antenna location...................131
Entry functions..............115, 121
Starting the engine ...............200
Snow mode switch.................310
Snow tires ...............................319
Spare tire.................................464
Storage location ...................465
Spark plug...............................497
Specifications.........................492
Speedometer.............................79
Sport mode..............................306
Steering lock
Column lock release.............200
Steering lock system warning
message.............................200
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...........................150
Heated steering wheel..........352
555
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Meter control switches .....83, 92
Stop & Start system...............264
Warning light ........................454
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs............432
Storage features.....................358
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck 489
Suggestion function.........91, 100
Sun visors...............................377
Sunshade
Roof......................................167
Switches
Activating the Automatic High
Beam..................................217
Automatic High Beam system
...........................................217
Brake Hold switch ................212
Digital Rearview Mirror control
switches .............................152
Door lock switches...............118
Driving mode select switch...306
Driving position memory
switches .............................144
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range switch254
Electronic roof sunshade
switches .............................170
Emergency flashers switch ..442
Engine switch.......................200
Fog light switch ....................220
Garage door opener switches
...........................................379
Heated steering wheel switch
...........................................352
Ignition switch.......................200
Instrument panel light control
switches ...............................81
Intuitive parking assist switch277
Light switches.......................214
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch
...........................................246
Meter control switches......83, 92
Moon roof switches ..............167
“ODO TRIP” switch.................81
Outside rear view mirror
switches..............................162
Panoramic moon roof switches
...........................................170
Parking brake switch ............209
PCS OFF switch...................235
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
switch .................................290
Power door lock switch.........118
Power window switches .......164
RCTA switch.........................284
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers switch
...........................329, 335, 339
Seat heater switches............352
Seat ventilator switches........352
Snow mode switch ...............310
“SOS” button ..........................63
Stop & Start cancel switch....265
Tilt and telescopic steering con-
trol switch ...........................150
Tire pressure warning reset
switch .................................417
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch .................................254
VSC OFF switch...................314
Window lock switch ..............166
Windshield defogger switch329,
335, 338
Windshield wiper and washer
switch .........................220, 223
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
...........................330, 335, 343
T
Tachometer ...............................79
Tail lights
Light switch...........................214
Replacing light bulbs ............432
556
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
The Secondary Collision Brake
...............................................314
Theft deterrent system
Alarm......................................71
Engine immobilizer system ....69
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data.................499
Tire inflation pressure display
function...............................414
Warning light ........................454
Tire information......................505
Glossary...............................509
Size......................................507
Tire identification number.....506
Uniform Tire Quality Grading508
Tire pressure display.............414
Tire pressure warning system
Function ...............................414
Initializing .............................417
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters......416
Registering ID codes............420
Warning light ........................454
Tires
Chains..................................320
Checking..............................411
If you have a flat tire.............464
Inflation pressure..................423
Information...........................505
Replacing.............................464
Rotating tires........................413
Size......................................499
Snow tires ............................319
Spare tire..............................464
Tire inflation pressure display
function...............................414
Tire pressure warning system
...........................................414
Warning light ........................454
Tools........................................465
Top tether strap........................60
Total load capacity.................492
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................199
Emergency towing................445
Trailer towing........................188
Toyota Multi-operation touch 326
Toyota Safety Sense 2.0
Automatic High Beam...........217
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range..........254
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).....241
PCS (Pre-Collision System) .233
RSA (Road Sign Assist)........251
TRAC (Traction Control) ........313
Traction Control (TRAC) ........313
Trailer Sway Control...............313
Trailer towing ..........................188
Transmission
Automatic transmission ........204
Driving mode select switch...306
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................206
M mode ................................206
Trip meters................................81
Trunk........................................119
Trunk features ......................363
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............432
Turn signal lever...................208
U
USB charging ports................367
V
Vanity lights ............................377
Vanity mirrors .........................377
Vehicle data recording...............6
Vehicle identification number492
Vehicle information display86, 95
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)
...............................................313
Ventilators (seat ventilators) .352
557
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
...............................................313
W
Warning buzzers
ABS......................................452
Airbags.................................451
Approach warning ................261
Brake hold............................457
Brake Override System........452
Brake system .......................450
Charging system ..................451
Downshifting.........................207
Drive-Start Control ...............452
Electric power steering.........452
Engine..................................451
Hands off steering wheel warn-
ing (LTA).............................249
High coolant temperature.....450
Intuitive parking assist.280, 283,
455
Low engine oil pressure.......451
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)...241,
244, 454
Open door.................... 116, 118
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...........................................455
Pre-collision braking.............234
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
...........................................455
RCTA function ......................285
Seat belt...............................453
Warning lights ........................450
ABS......................................452
Brake hold operated indicator
...........................................457
Brake Override System........452
Brake system .......................450
Charging system ..................451
Drive-Start Control ...............452
Electric power steering.........452
High coolant temperature.....450
Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-
cator ...................................455
Low engine oil pressure .......451
Low fuel level........................453
LTA indicator.........................454
Malfunction indicator lamp....451
Parking brake indicator.........457
PKSB OFF indicator.............455
Pre-collision system .............456
RCTA OFF indicator .............455
Seat belt reminder light ........453
Slip indicator.........................456
SRS......................................451
Stop & Start cancel indicator454
Tire pressure ........................454
Warning message.............90, 100
Warning messages.................460
Washer
Adding ..................................410
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................319
Switch...........................220, 223
Washing and waxing..............388
Weight
Cargo capacity .....................187
Load limits ............................187
Weight ..................................492
Wheels.....................................425
Size ......................................499
Window lock switch ...............166
Windows
Power windows ....................164
Rear window defogger 329, 335,
339
Washer.........................220, 223
Windshield defogger.....329, 335,
338
Windshield wiper de-icer.....330,
335, 343
Windshield wipers
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
...................................220, 223
558
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
Winter driving tips..................319
Wireless charger ....................368
Wireless remote control
Battery-Saving Function.......132
Locking/Unlocking................113
Replacing the battery...........428
For information regarding
the equipment listed
below, refer to the “NAVI-
GATION AND MULTIME-
DIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
· Rear seat entertainment sys-
tem
· Rear view monitor system
· Toyota parking assist monitor
· Panoramic view monitor
559
Alphabetical Index
HIGHLANDER_U
560
HIGHLANDER_U
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever (P.402)
Fuel filler door (P.226)
Hood lock release lever (P.402)
Fuel filler door opener (P.226)
Power back door switch
*
(P.122)
Tire inflation pressure (P.499)
*
: If equipped
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.9 gal. (68 L, 14.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P.495
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P.499
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
P.495
Engine oil type P.495
